Basic Handset Operations
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Vodafone 802SH.
^ For proper handset use, read this manual beforehand.
^ This manual was created exclusively for Vodafone 802SH handsets sold in Japan.
^ Keep this manual in a convenient place for reference.
^ Accessible Vodafone services may vary by service area, subscription, etc.
Note
^ Copying this manual in whole or part without authorisation is prohibited.
^ Manual content is subject to change without prior notice.
^ Efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy and clarity of this manual. Please contact
Customer Service, General Information (see P.16-32) concerning unclear or missing information.
Symbols
In this manual, most operations are described with handset open (clamshell open: see P.1-13).
Sample screen shots, etc. are provided for reference only. Actual handset windows, menus, etc. may differ in appearance.
Multi Selector
Use Multi Selector to select
menu items, move cursor,
scroll, etc. In this manual, Multi
Selector operations are
indicated as shown to the right.
Basic Multi Selector Operations
B E: Press C or D
B F: Press B or A
B G: Press C, D, B or A
Side Keys
C
B
b
A
D
Use Side Keys when Display is
in Viewer position (see P.1-14).
In this manual, Side Keys are
indicated as shown to the right.
c is not inscribed on the actual
Clear Key.
L Zoom/Select Key M
Clear Key
c
h
Shutter Key
i
Handset Menu Operations
In this manual, menu operations are indicated as follows:
Select menu item and press b Operations such as selecting a file
Main Menu
Press b
H Menu Item A Handset Operation
A Options (c/e)
Press c or e
In this Vodafone 802SH Instruction Manual, Vodafone 802SH is abbreviated as 802SH.
ii
Accessories
CBattery (SHBW01)*
CDesktop Holder (SHEW01)*
CMulti Stereo Headphones
(Type 1 Lithium-ion Battery)
CAC Charger (SHCW01)*
CUtility Software (CD-ROM)
*May also be purchased separately.
Tip H ^ For accessory-related information, please contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
^ 802SH is compatible with SD Memory Cards. SD Memory Card is not included in this package. Purchase SD Memory Card to
use Memory Card-related handset functions.
iii
Contents
Contents
Symbols ............................................................................................i
Accessories ....................................................................................iii
Contents .........................................................................................iv
Safety Precautions........................................................................xv
General Notes..............................................................................xxv
Basic Operations
1
Getting Started
Function & Feature Preview....................................................... 1-2
USIM Card.................................................................................... 1-4
C General Information & Precautions ...................................... 1-4
C Inserting & Removing USIM Card ........................................ 1-5
C USIM PINs............................................................................ 1-7
Handset Parts & Functions ........................................................ 1-8
C Handset ................................................................................ 1-8
C Display................................................................................ 1-11
Display Positions & Keys ......................................................... 1-13
C Display Positions ................................................................ 1-13
C Key Press Methods ............................................................ 1-15
C Side Key Assignments (Viewer) ......................................... 1-15
Battery & Charger ..................................................................... 1-16
C Getting Started ................................................................... 1-16
C Installing & Removing Battery ............................................ 1-20
C AC Charger ........................................................................ 1-22
C Desktop Holder................................................................... 1-23
C In-Car Charger ................................................................... 1-24
iv
Memory Card ............................................................................. 1-25
C Precautions ........................................................................ 1-25
C Inserting & Removing SD Memory Card ............................ 1-26
Handset Power On/Off .............................................................. 1-28
C Keypad Lock....................................................................... 1-29
C Pen Light ............................................................................ 1-29
0 Pen Light On/Off ............................................................ 1-29
Handset Menus ......................................................................... 1-30
C Main Menu.......................................................................... 1-30
C Soft Keys ............................................................................ 1-31
C User Shortcuts.................................................................... 1-32
0 Assign ............................................................................ 1-32
0 Move .............................................................................. 1-32
0 Set to Default ................................................................. 1-32
Security Codes .......................................................................... 1-33
C Handset Code .................................................................... 1-33
C Centre Access Code .......................................................... 1-33
C Network Password ............................................................. 1-33
2
Basic Handset Operations
Initiating a Voice Call (in Japan) ................................................ 2-2
0 Viewer Position ................................................................ 2-3
0 Hold.................................................................................. 2-3
0 Mute Microphone ............................................................. 2-3
C Redial ................................................................................... 2-4
Incoming Voice Call .................................................................... 2-5
0 Viewer Position ................................................................ 2-5
C Calling from Received Calls ................................................. 2-7
Rejecting Incoming Calls ........................................................... 2-8
C Rejecting a Call .................................................................... 2-8
3
Text Entry
Characters ................................................................................... 3-2
C Entry Modes ......................................................................... 3-2
C Key Assignments.................................................................. 3-3
Entering Characters.................................................................... 3-5
C Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana ................................................. 3-5
C Entering Alphanumerics ....................................................... 3-7
C Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons ..................................... 3-7
C Mail & Web Extensions ........................................................ 3-9
C Character Code .................................................................... 3-9
C Pager Code .......................................................................... 3-9
Conversion Methods (Japanese Only).................................... 3-11
C Phonetic Conversion .......................................................... 3-11
C One-Hiragana Conversion.................................................. 3-11
C Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion............. 3-12
C Quick Conversion (for Hiragana)........................................ 3-12
C Conversion Settings ........................................................... 3-13
0 Disable Predictive/Previous Usage................................ 3-13
0 Clear Conversion Log .................................................... 3-13
Editing Characters .................................................................... 3-14
C Deleting .............................................................................. 3-14
C Replacing ........................................................................... 3-14
C Copy/Cut & Paste............................................................... 3-14
C Deleting Text After Cursor.................................................. 3-15
C Using Phone Book.............................................................. 3-15
C Using Text Templates ........................................................ 3-15
4
Contents
Engaged Call Operations ........................................................... 2-9
C Earpiece Volume .................................................................. 2-9
C Voice Memo ....................................................................... 2-10
0 Play ................................................................................ 2-10
Call History ................................................................................ 2-11
0 Delete............................................................................. 2-11
Call Time .................................................................................... 2-12
0 Clear Timers .................................................................. 2-12
Call Charge ................................................................................ 2-13
0 Clear Costs .................................................................... 2-13
0 Max Cost........................................................................ 2-13
0 Cost Units ...................................................................... 2-13
Outside Japan (International Roaming) .................................. 2-14
C Changing System Settings ................................................. 2-14
0 Select Network............................................................... 2-14
C Calling from Outside Japan ................................................ 2-15
Manner Mode ............................................................................. 2-16
C Minding Mobile Manners .................................................... 2-16
C Activating/Cancelling Manner Mode................................... 2-17
C Activating/Cancelling Off Line Mode .................................. 2-18
Multi Stereo Headphones ......................................................... 2-19
C Initiating Calls ..................................................................... 2-19
C Answering Calls.................................................................. 2-19
Message Recorder .................................................................... 2-20
C Activate/Deactivate............................................................. 2-20
C Playing Messages .............................................................. 2-20
Phone Book
Saving to Phone Book ................................................................ 4-2
C Phone Book Entry Items....................................................... 4-2
C New Phone Book Entries ..................................................... 4-3
C Additional Settings................................................................ 4-4
C Saving from Dialled Numbers/Received Calls...................... 4-6
C Phone Book Memory Status................................................. 4-6
Group Settings ............................................................................ 4-7
C Changing Group Name ........................................................ 4-7
C Group Ringtone/Ringvideo ................................................... 4-7
v
Contents
Using Phone Book ...................................................................... 4-8
C Dialling from Phone Book..................................................... 4-8
0 By Reading Order ............................................................ 4-9
0 By Group.......................................................................... 4-9
0 By Katakana..................................................................... 4-9
C Speed Dial.......................................................................... 4-10
Editing Phone Book .................................................................. 4-10
C Correction/Change ............................................................. 4-10
C Copying Phone Book Entries ............................................. 4-11
C Deleting Phone Book Entries ............................................. 4-11
Speed Dial List .......................................................................... 4-12
C Saving Phone Numbers ..................................................... 4-12
C Deleting Phone Numbers ................................................... 4-12
Owner Profile............................................................................. 4-13
0 Edit................................................................................. 4-13
0 Delete............................................................................. 4-13
5
TV Call
Getting Started ............................................................................ 5-2
Initiating a TV Call....................................................................... 5-3
0 Viewer Position ................................................................ 5-3
Answering a TV Call ................................................................... 5-3
0 Viewer Position ................................................................ 5-3
Engaged TV Call Operations...................................................... 5-4
0 Switch Cameras............................................................... 5-4
0 Swap Images ................................................................... 5-4
0 Send Alternative Image.................................................... 5-4
0 Mute ................................................................................. 5-4
vi
TV Call Settings........................................................................... 5-5
0 Default Image................................................................... 5-5
0 Setting Alternative Image................................................. 5-5
0 Loudspeaker .................................................................... 5-5
0 Picture Quality.................................................................. 5-5
0 Backlight .......................................................................... 5-5
0 Mute Microphone ............................................................. 5-5
0 Hold Guidance Pict .......................................................... 5-5
6
Camera
Getting Started ............................................................................ 6-2
C Precaution ............................................................................ 6-2
C Mobile Camera Basics ......................................................... 6-2
C Viewfinder & Key Assignments ............................................ 6-4
Still Images .................................................................................. 6-5
C Photo Camera Mode ............................................................ 6-5
C Capturing Still Images .......................................................... 6-6
C Still Image Functions ............................................................ 6-7
C Continuous Shoot................................................................. 6-8
C Adding Frames ................................................................... 6-10
Video .......................................................................................... 6-10
C Video Camera Mode .......................................................... 6-10
C Recording Video................................................................. 6-11
C Video Recording Operations .............................................. 6-12
Camera Settings........................................................................ 6-13
C Shooting Options................................................................ 6-13
0 Toggle Preview .............................................................. 6-13
0 Picture Size.................................................................... 6-13
0 Shutter Sound ................................................................ 6-13
0 Timer.............................................................................. 6-14
0 Mobile Light.................................................................... 6-14
7
Media Player
Media Player ................................................................................ 7-2
Playing Music .............................................................................. 7-3
C Playback............................................................................... 7-4
C Playback Settings................................................................. 7-5
0 Tone Control .................................................................... 7-5
0 Playback Pattern.............................................................. 7-6
Playing Video .............................................................................. 7-6
C Playback............................................................................... 7-7
C Playback Settings................................................................. 7-7
0 Playback Pattern.............................................................. 7-7
0 Backlight .......................................................................... 7-7
0 Display Size ..................................................................... 7-7
Editing Video ............................................................................... 7-8
C Selecting Start and End Points............................................. 7-8
C Cropping Video Clips............................................................ 7-8
C Editing Subtitles.................................................................... 7-9
0 Duration ........................................................................... 7-9
0 Display Position ............................................................... 7-9
0 Font Size.......................................................................... 7-9
0 Scrolling ......................................................................... 7-10
0 Background Colour ........................................................ 7-10
0 Font Colour .................................................................... 7-10
0 Highlight ......................................................................... 7-10
0 Blink ............................................................................... 7-10
0 Reset Effects.................................................................. 7-10
C Deleting All Subtitles .......................................................... 7-11
Managing Video & Music Files................................................. 7-11
C Adding New Playlist............................................................ 7-11
C Adding Clips/Tracks ........................................................... 7-12
C Deleting Files in SD VIDEO & SD AUDIO.......................... 7-12
Contents
C Image Settings ................................................................... 6-15
0 Exposure........................................................................ 6-15
0 Picture Size.................................................................... 6-15
0 Scene............................................................................. 6-15
0 Picture Quality................................................................ 6-16
0 Record Time .................................................................. 6-16
0 Microphone .................................................................... 6-17
0 Video Encode................................................................. 6-17
C Additional Settings.............................................................. 6-17
0 Help................................................................................ 6-17
0 Save to........................................................................... 6-17
0 Select Mode ................................................................... 6-18
0 Auto Save ...................................................................... 6-18
Opening Images & Playing Video ............................................ 6-18
C Opening Still Images .......................................................... 6-18
C Playing Video ..................................................................... 6-18
0 QVGA Size Images........................................................ 6-18
Sending Still Images & Video .................................................. 6-19
C Still Images......................................................................... 6-19
C Video Clips ......................................................................... 6-19
vii
Contents
viii
8
Managing Files
Data Folder .................................................................................. 8-2
C File Organisation .................................................................. 8-2
C Sorting Files ......................................................................... 8-3
Opening Files .............................................................................. 8-4
C SVG Files ............................................................................. 8-5
Using Files ................................................................................... 8-5
C Wallpaper ............................................................................. 8-5
C Phone Book Picture.............................................................. 8-5
C Ringvideo & Ringtone........................................................... 8-6
Editing Images ............................................................................ 8-6
C Changing Image Size ........................................................... 8-6
C Enlarging/Reducing Image ................................................... 8-8
C Visual Effects........................................................................ 8-8
C Face Arrange........................................................................ 8-9
C Panorama Images .............................................................. 8-11
C Split Screen ........................................................................ 8-12
C Additional Picture Effects ................................................... 8-13
0 Reformat file................................................................... 8-13
0 Add Frame ..................................................................... 8-13
0 Rotate ............................................................................ 8-13
Text Templates .......................................................................... 8-13
C New Entry........................................................................... 8-13
C Editing Templates............................................................... 8-13
C Deleting Templates ............................................................ 8-13
Editing Files & Folders ............................................................. 8-14
C Adding Folders ................................................................... 8-14
C Changing File Names......................................................... 8-14
C Deleting Files & Folders ..................................................... 8-14
C Copying/Moving Files ......................................................... 8-15
9
Connectivity
Getting Started ............................................................................ 9-2
Bluetooth ..................................................................................... 9-3
C Getting Started ..................................................................... 9-3
C Bluetooth Operations............................................................ 9-5
C Bluetooth Settings ................................................................ 9-8
0 Device Name ................................................................... 9-8
0 Bluetooth Timeout............................................................ 9-8
0 Handsfree Setting ............................................................ 9-8
Infrared......................................................................................... 9-9
C Getting Started ..................................................................... 9-9
C Transferring Files ............................................................... 9-10
PC Transmissions..................................................................... 9-12
C Utility Software ................................................................... 9-13
C 3G/GSM GPRS Modem ..................................................... 9-13
C Handset Manager............................................................... 9-14
Network Settings....................................................................... 9-14
0 Add, Edit & Delete.......................................................... 9-14
0 Set Preferred.................................................................. 9-15
0 Network Information....................................................... 9-15
Internet Setting.......................................................................... 9-15
C Profile Contents.................................................................. 9-15
C Settings .............................................................................. 9-17
0 Create New .................................................................... 9-17
0 Activate .......................................................................... 9-17
0 Edit................................................................................. 9-17
0 Copy............................................................................... 9-17
0 Delete............................................................................. 9-17
0 Create New .................................................................... 9-18
0 Edit................................................................................. 9-18
0 Copy............................................................................... 9-18
0 Delete............................................................................. 9-18
10
Additional Functions
Mode Settings ........................................................................... 10-2
0 Mode Settings ................................................................ 10-2
0 Set to Default ................................................................. 10-2
C Customising Incoming Communication Settings ................ 10-2
0 Volume........................................................................... 10-2
0 Ringtone/Ringvideo........................................................ 10-2
0 Vibration......................................................................... 10-3
0 External Light ................................................................. 10-3
0 Any Key Answer............................................................. 10-3
C Customising System Sounds ............................................. 10-3
0 Keypad Tones................................................................ 10-3
0 Warning Tone & Power On/Off Sound........................... 10-3
Display ....................................................................................... 10-4
C Display Settings.................................................................. 10-4
0 Wallpaper....................................................................... 10-4
0 System Graphics............................................................ 10-4
0 Clock & Calendar ........................................................... 10-5
0 Font Settings.................................................................. 10-5
0 Greeting Message.......................................................... 10-5
0 Show Operator Name .................................................... 10-5
0 Language ....................................................................... 10-5
C Light Settings...................................................................... 10-6
0 Backlight ........................................................................ 10-6
0 Brightness ...................................................................... 10-6
0 Display Saving ............................................................... 10-6
Sound Settings.......................................................................... 10-6
Clock Settings ........................................................................... 10-7
0 Set Date/Time ................................................................ 10-7
0 Time/Date Format .......................................................... 10-7
0 Time Zone/Daylight Saving............................................ 10-7
0 Calendar Format ............................................................ 10-7
User Dictionary ......................................................................... 10-8
C Entries (Partly Japanese Only)........................................... 10-8
0 New Entry ...................................................................... 10-8
0 Edit/Delete ..................................................................... 10-8
C 802SH Download Dictionary (Japanese Only) ................... 10-8
0 Acquire Dictionary.......................................................... 10-8
0 Cancel............................................................................ 10-8
Call Settings .............................................................................. 10-9
C International Call ................................................................ 10-9
0 Int'l Prefix ....................................................................... 10-9
0 Country Codes ............................................................... 10-9
C Additional Settings.............................................................. 10-9
0 Display Call Info ............................................................. 10-9
0 Minute Minder ................................................................ 10-9
0 Display Call Timer.......................................................... 10-9
Handset Security..................................................................... 10-10
C PIN ................................................................................... 10-10
0 Switch On/Off............................................................... 10-10
0 Change PIN ................................................................. 10-10
Contents
C Additional Settings.............................................................. 9-18
0 Re-Provisioning.............................................................. 9-18
0 Clear DNS Cache .......................................................... 9-18
0 White List ....................................................................... 9-18
Backup & Restore ..................................................................... 9-19
C Handset to Memory Card ................................................... 9-20
C Memory Card to Handset ................................................... 9-20
ix
Contents
C Handset Locks.................................................................. 10-11
0 Phone Lock .................................................................. 10-11
0 Handset Lock ............................................................... 10-11
0 Phone Book Lock......................................................... 10-11
C Secret Mode ..................................................................... 10-12
0 Show Secret Data ........................................................ 10-12
C Changing Handset Code .................................................. 10-12
0 Change Handset Code ................................................ 10-12
Memory Settings ..................................................................... 10-13
0 Memory Status............................................................. 10-13
0 Format Card................................................................. 10-13
LBS (Location Based Service) Settings................................ 10-13
0 LBS URL Setting.......................................................... 10-13
0 Datum On/Off............................................................... 10-13
Reset ........................................................................................ 10-14
0 Reset Settings.............................................................. 10-14
0 Reset All....................................................................... 10-14
11
Tools
Calendar..................................................................................... 11-2
C Opening Calendar .............................................................. 11-2
C Saving Entries .................................................................... 11-2
0 Assign Tone ................................................................... 11-3
0 Assign Video .................................................................. 11-3
0 Duration ......................................................................... 11-3
0 Repeat ........................................................................... 11-4
0 Secret............................................................................. 11-4
C Opening Entries.................................................................. 11-4
C Editing Entries .................................................................... 11-4
x
C Deleting Entries .................................................................. 11-4
0 This Appointment ........................................................... 11-4
0 All This Day.................................................................... 11-4
0 All This Month ................................................................ 11-5
0 Up to Last Month............................................................ 11-5
0 All Appointments ............................................................ 11-5
Alarm .......................................................................................... 11-5
C Setting Alarm...................................................................... 11-5
0 Assign Alarm Tone......................................................... 11-6
0 Assign Alarm Video........................................................ 11-6
0 Snooze........................................................................... 11-6
0 Alarm Volume ................................................................ 11-7
0 Duration ......................................................................... 11-7
0 Vibration......................................................................... 11-7
C Cancelling & Reactivating Alarm ........................................ 11-7
0 Switch Off....................................................................... 11-7
0 Switch On....................................................................... 11-7
C Deleting Alarm.................................................................... 11-7
0 Reset Alarm ................................................................... 11-7
0 Clear All ......................................................................... 11-7
Calculator .................................................................................. 11-8
Voice Recorder.......................................................................... 11-9
C Recording Voice ................................................................. 11-9
C Recording Settings ........................................................... 11-10
0 Record Time ................................................................ 11-10
0 Save Rec. to ................................................................ 11-10
C Playback........................................................................... 11-10
Barcode.................................................................................... 11-11
0 Scanning during Text Entry.......................................... 11-13
0 Open Barcode.............................................................. 11-13
0 Scanned Results.......................................................... 11-13
Creating QR Codes ................................................................. 11-14
0 Phone Book ................................................................. 11-14
0 Text Input ..................................................................... 11-14
0 Data Folder .................................................................. 11-14
C Using A Dictionary............................................................ 11-27
0 Look Up Word .............................................................. 11-27
0 Properties..................................................................... 11-27
Phone Help .............................................................................. 11-28
12
Optional Services
Optional Service Overview....................................................... 12-2
Call Forwarding ......................................................................... 12-2
0 Call Forwarding.............................................................. 12-3
0 Cancel Forwarding......................................................... 12-3
0 Status............................................................................. 12-3
Voice Mail .................................................................................. 12-4
0 Voice Mail ...................................................................... 12-4
0 Cancel Voice Mail .......................................................... 12-4
0 Status............................................................................. 12-4
0 Play Voice Mail .............................................................. 12-5
Call Waiting ............................................................................... 12-5
0 Start/Cancel Call Waiting ............................................... 12-5
0 Status............................................................................. 12-5
0 Incoming Calls ............................................................... 12-5
Conference Call......................................................................... 12-6
0 Dial New Number........................................................... 12-6
0 Switch Line..................................................................... 12-6
0 Conference Call ............................................................. 12-6
Call Barring................................................................................ 12-7
C Restricting Outgoing Calls.................................................. 12-8
0 Set Restriction................................................................ 12-8
0 Cancel Restriction.......................................................... 12-8
0 Status............................................................................. 12-8
C Restricting Incoming Calls.................................................. 12-9
0 Set/Cancel Restriction ................................................... 12-9
Contents
Text Scanner ........................................................................... 11-15
0 Scanning during Text Entry.......................................... 11-16
Stopwatch................................................................................ 11-17
Tasks........................................................................................ 11-18
C Saving Entries .................................................................. 11-18
0 Assign Tone ................................................................. 11-19
0 Assign Video ................................................................ 11-19
0 Duration ....................................................................... 11-19
0 Secret........................................................................... 11-19
C Opening Entries................................................................ 11-19
C Editing Entries .................................................................. 11-19
C Deleting Entries ................................................................ 11-20
0 This Task ..................................................................... 11-20
0 All Completed Tasks .................................................... 11-20
0 All Tasks ...................................................................... 11-20
World Clock ............................................................................. 11-20
Countdown Timer ................................................................... 11-21
Expenses Memo...................................................................... 11-22
0 Add New Expense ....................................................... 11-22
0 Totals ........................................................................... 11-22
0 Edit Category ............................................................... 11-22
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)......................................... 11-22
C Selecting Images & Prints ................................................ 11-23
C Print Settings .................................................................... 11-23
0 Add Date ...................................................................... 11-23
0 Index Print.................................................................... 11-23
0 Check Print Setting ...................................................... 11-23
0 Number of Copies ........................................................ 11-23
E-Books ................................................................................... 11-24
C Reading Content .............................................................. 11-24
C Using E-Book Images....................................................... 11-27
0 As Wallpaper................................................................ 11-27
0 Embedded Information................................................. 11-27
xi
Contents
C Rejecting Calls ................................................................... 12-9
0 Rejected Numbers ......................................................... 12-9
0 Set Reject Number......................................................... 12-9
C Rejecting Calls without Caller ID ........................................ 12-9
0 Withheld Call.................................................................. 12-9
C Changing Network Password ........................................... 12-10
0 Change N/W Password................................................ 12-10
Caller ID ................................................................................... 12-10
0 Show Your Number...................................................... 12-10
0 Status........................................................................... 12-10
Vodafone live!
13
Vodafone live! Overview
Vodafone live! Basics ............................................................... 13-2
C Vodafone live! Services...................................................... 13-2
C Automatic Network Setup................................................... 13-4
C Customising Handset Address ........................................... 13-4
Getting Started .......................................................................... 13-5
Using Web ................................................................................. 13-6
C Opening Web Menu ........................................................... 13-6
C Entering URLs Directly ....................................................... 13-7
C Using URL Log ................................................................... 13-7
Basic Operations ...................................................................... 13-8
C Using Linked Info................................................................ 13-9
Advanced Features ................................................................. 13-10
C Saving to Data Folder....................................................... 13-10
C Bookmarks & My Saved Page.......................................... 13-11
C Editing Bookmarks & My Saved Page.............................. 13-13
0 Rename ....................................................................... 13-13
0 Delete........................................................................... 13-13
0 Edit URL (only for Bookmarks) .................................... 13-13
0 Bookmarks Folder........................................................ 13-13
xii
C Streaming ......................................................................... 13-14
C Sub Menu Settings ........................................................... 13-15
0 Reload Page ................................................................ 13-15
0 Send Page ................................................................... 13-15
0 Properties..................................................................... 13-15
0 Browser Data ............................................................... 13-16
0 Search This Page ........................................................ 13-16
0 Restart Browser ........................................................... 13-16
0 About............................................................................ 13-16
0 Uploading Files ............................................................ 13-16
Other Functions ...................................................................... 13-17
C Basic Settings................................................................... 13-17
0 Cookies ........................................................................ 13-17
0 Downloads ................................................................... 13-17
0 IMEI Notification........................................................... 13-17
0 Scroll Step.................................................................... 13-17
0 Font Size...................................................................... 13-17
0 Download to ................................................................. 13-17
C Security ............................................................................ 13-18
0 Secure Prompt ............................................................. 13-18
0 Certificates ................................................................... 13-18
0 Root Certificates .......................................................... 13-18
0 Authentication .............................................................. 13-18
14
Messaging
Incoming Text Messages.......................................................... 14-2
C Opening New Messages .................................................... 14-2
C Retrieving MMS Messages ................................................ 14-4
C Using Received Messages................................................. 14-5
0 Reply.............................................................................. 14-5
0 Forward.......................................................................... 14-5
0 Call................................................................................. 14-5
Server Mail ............................................................................... 14-29
C Retrieving Mail List ........................................................... 14-29
C Retrieving Selected Messages......................................... 14-30
C Deleting Selected Messages............................................ 14-30
C Forwarding Server Mail .................................................... 14-31
Mail Settings ............................................................................ 14-31
C General Settings............................................................... 14-31
0 Home Download .......................................................... 14-31
0 Roam. Download ......................................................... 14-31
0 Delivery Report ............................................................ 14-31
0 Edit Signature .............................................................. 14-31
0 Delivery Rep. Allow...................................................... 14-32
0 Reply History................................................................ 14-32
C SMS Settings.................................................................... 14-32
0 Message Centre........................................................... 14-32
0 Message Format .......................................................... 14-32
0 Reply Path ................................................................... 14-32
0 Text Optimisation ......................................................... 14-32
C MMS Settings ................................................................... 14-33
0 Slide Duration .............................................................. 14-33
0 Max Message Size....................................................... 14-33
C Memory Status ................................................................. 14-33
Contents
Sending Text Messages ........................................................... 14-6
C Overview ............................................................................ 14-6
C Creating a Message ........................................................... 14-7
C Entering Message Text ...................................................... 14-8
C Attaching Images & Sounds ............................................... 14-9
C Creating Slides ................................................................. 14-11
C Entering Recipient ............................................................ 14-12
C Entering Subject ............................................................... 14-13
C Setting Message Type...................................................... 14-14
C Advanced Settings ........................................................... 14-14
0 Delivery Report ............................................................ 14-14
0 Expiry Time .................................................................. 14-14
0 Priority.......................................................................... 14-15
0 Delivery Time ............................................................... 14-15
C Saving to Draft.................................................................. 14-15
C Using Mail Templates....................................................... 14-16
Mail Box ................................................................................... 14-17
C Mail Box Type................................................................... 14-17
C Checking Messages ......................................................... 14-17
C Personal Folders .............................................................. 14-20
C Replying to Messages ...................................................... 14-23
C Forwarding Messages ...................................................... 14-23
C Sending from Draft ........................................................... 14-24
C Protecting a Message....................................................... 14-24
C Deleting Messages........................................................... 14-25
C Linked Info........................................................................ 14-26
C Saving Attachments to Data Folder.................................. 14-27
C Mail Box List ..................................................................... 14-28
0 Message Details .......................................................... 14-28
0 Read/Unread................................................................ 14-28
xiii
15
V-applications
16
Appendix
V-application Basics ................................................................. 15-2
C Getting Started ................................................................... 15-2
C Downloading V-applications ............................................... 15-3
C Starting V-applications ....................................................... 15-4
C Exit, Pause & Resume ....................................................... 15-5
C Managing V-applications .................................................... 15-5
0 Properties....................................................................... 15-5
0 Move to Card ................................................................. 15-6
0 Delete............................................................................. 15-6
Using V-applications ................................................................ 15-6
C Setting Screensaver ........................................................... 15-6
C Setting Security Level......................................................... 15-7
Additional Functions ................................................................ 15-8
C V-application Operational Settings ..................................... 15-8
0 Application Volume ........................................................ 15-8
0 Backlight ........................................................................ 15-8
0 Blink ............................................................................... 15-8
0 Vibration......................................................................... 15-9
0 Calls & Alarms ............................................................... 15-9
C Reset .................................................................................. 15-9
0 Set to Default ................................................................. 15-9
0 Memory All Clear ........................................................... 15-9
Function Menu .......................................................................... 16-2
Troubleshooting........................................................................ 16-4
Character Code List .................................................................. 16-9
Pictograph List ........................................................................ 16-15
Specifications.......................................................................... 16-21
Index......................................................................................... 16-23
Warranty & After-Sales Services ........................................... 16-31
Customer Service ................................................................... 16-32
xiv
Safety Precautions
^ Read safety precautions before using handset.
^ Observe precautions to avoid injury to self or others, or damage to property.
^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.
Before Using Handset
CSymbols
Make sure you thoroughly understand these symbols before reading on.
Symbols and their meanings are described below:
!
!
!
DANGER
Great risk of death or serious injury from improper use
WARNING
Risk of death or serious injury from improper use
CAUTION
Risk of injury or damage to property from improper use
CSymbols
$(%+*
#)
!
Prohibited Actions
Compulsory Actions
Attention Required
xv
!DANGER
Handset, Battery & Charger
Use only the specified battery, Charger or Holder
(see P.iii).
Battery
#
Prevent injury from battery leakage, breakage or fire.
Do not:
$
Heat or dispose of battery in fire.
Disassemble, modify or break battery.
Damage or solder battery.
Use a damaged or deformed battery.
Use non-specified charger (see P.iii).
Force battery into handset.
Charge or place battery near fire, heat sources or in
extreme heat.
^ Use battery for other equipment.
Using non-specified equipment may cause malfunctions, electric
shock or fire due to battery leakage, overheating or bursting.
Do not short-circuit Charger Terminals.
Keep metal objects away from Charger Terminals. Keep
handset away from necklaces, hairpins, etc.
Battery may leak, overheat, burst or ignite causing injury.
Use a case to carry handset.
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
If battery fluid contacts eyes, do not rub them. Rinse
with clean water and consult a doctor immediately.
Eyes may be severely damaged.
xvi
$
$
!WARNING
Handset, Battery & Charger
Do not insert foreign objects into handset.
Do not place metal or flammable objects in handset,
Charger or Holder. This may cause fire or electric shock.
Keep handset out of the reach of children.
Keep handset out of rain or extreme humidity.
Fire or electric shock may occur.
Keep handset away from liquid-filled containers.
Keep handset, Charger and Holder away from chemicals/liquids.
Fire or electric shock may result.
Avoid sources of fire.
Prevent fire or explosion. Do not use handset in the
presence of gas or fine particles (coal, dust, metal, etc.).
Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces.
Eyesight may be temporarily affected leading to accidents.
$
Keep handset, Charger or Holder away from
microwave ovens.
%
$
Do not disassemble or modify handset.
$
$
Battery or handset may leak, burst, overheat or ignite and
cause accidents.
^ Do not open housing of handset, Charger or Holder; may
cause electric shock or injury.
Contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer
Assistance for repairs.
^ Do not modify handset, Charger or Holder. Fire or electric
shock may result.
If water or foreign matter is inside handset:
Discontinue handset use to prevent fire or electric shock.
Turn handset power off, remove battery, unplug Charger and
contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.
$
(
)
xvii
!WARNING
Handset, Battery & Charger
Do not subject handset to shocks.
Subjecting handset, Charger or Holder to shocks may
cause malfunction or injury.
Should the handset break, remove the battery and contact
Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.
Discontinue handset use. Fire or electric shock may occur.
If an abnormality occurs:
Should there be unusual sound, smoke or odour,
discontinue handset use to avoid fire or electric shock. Turn
handset power off, remove battery and unplug Charger and
contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.
Handset
$
)
Preventing accidents
^ For safety, never use handset while driving. Pull over
beforehand.
Mobile phone use while driving is prohibited by the revised
Road Traffic Law (effective from 1 November 2004).
^ Do not use Headphones while driving or riding a bicycle.
Accidents may result.
^ Moderate volume outside, especially at level/road
crossings to avoid accidents.
Do not swing handset by handstrap.
May result in injury or breakage.
Turn handset power off before boarding aircraft.
Using wireless devices aboard aircraft may cause
electronic malfunctions or endanger aircraft operation.
Adjusting vibration and Ringtone settings:
Select settings carefully if you have a heart condition or
pacemaker.
During lightning storms, turn power off and take shelter.
There is a risk of lightning strike or electric shock.
xviii
$
$
#
#
#
!WARNING
Charger Care
Use only the specified voltage.
Non-specified voltage may cause fire or electric shock.
^ AC Charger: 100 - 240 VAC
B Vodafone is not liable for problems caused by charging
handset abroad.
^ In-Car Charger: 12/24 VDC
Do not use commercially available transformers.
Use of AC Charger with commercially available
transformers may result in fire, electric shock or breakage.
Do not use In-Car Charger inside vehicles with a
positive earth.
Fire may result. Use In-Car Charger inside vehicles with a
negative earth only.
$
Do not short-circuit Charger connector.
Keep metal away from connector.
May cause overheating, fire or electric shock.
Do not use Desktop Holder inside vehicles.
Extreme temperature or vibration may cause fire or breakage.
$
Preventing accidents
Secure In-Car Charger to avoid injury or accidents.
If Charger or In-Car Charger cord is damaged:
$
May cause fire or electric shock; Contact Vodafone
Customer Centre, Customer Assistance to replace.
During lightning storms:
Unplug Charger to avoid breakage, fire or electric shock.
Charger Care
^ Do not touch blades with wet hands. Electric shock may occur.
^ Do not use multiple cords in one outlet. May generate
excess heat or fire.
^ Do not bend, twist, pull or set objects on cord. Exposed
wire may cause fire or electric shock.
+
$
Keep Charger & Desktop Holder out of the reach of
children.
$
$
#
#
)
#
Electric shock or injury may occur.
xix
!WARNING
Battery
^ If battery does not charge properly, stop charging. Battery
may overheat, burst or ignite.
^ If there is leakage or abnormal odour, avoid fire sources.
It may catch fire or burst.
#
If there is abnormal odour, excessive heat, discolouration
or distortion, remove battery from handset.
It may leak, overheat or explode.
#
Handset Use & Electronic Medical Equipment
This section is based on "Guidelines on the Use of Radio Communications Equipment such as Cellular Telephones and Safeguards
for Electronic Medical Equipment" (Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference, April 1997) and "Report of Investigation of the Effects
of Radio Waves on Medical Equipment, etc." (Association of Radio Industries and Businesses, March 2001).
Persons with implanted pacemakers or defibrillators
should keep handset more than 22 cm away.
#
Implanted pacemakers or defibrillators may malfunction
due to radio waves.
Turn handset power off in crowded places such as
trains. People with implanted pacemakers or
defibrillators may be near.
Implanted pacemakers or defibrillators may malfunction
due to radio waves.
xx
#
Observe these rules when visiting medical institutions:
^ Do not take handset into operating rooms or Intensive or
Coronary Care Units.
^ Keep handset off in hospitals.
^ Keep handset off in hospital lobbies. Electronic
equipment may be near.
^ Obey rules regarding mobile phone use in medical institutions.
Consult manufacturer for radio wave effects on
electronic medical equipment.
#
#
!CAUTION
Handset, Battery & Charger
Handset care
^ Place handset on stable surfaces to avoid malfunction or injury.
^ Keep handset away from oily smoke or steam. Fire or
accidents may result.
^ Cold air from air conditioners may condense, resulting in
leakage or burnout.
^ Keep handset away from direct sunlight (inside vehicles,
etc.) or heat sources.
Distortion, discolouration or fire may occur. Battery shape
may be affected.
^ Keep handset out of extremely cold places to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
^ Keep handset away from fire sources to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
Usage environment
^ Excessive dust may prevent heat release and cause
burnout or fire.
^ Avoid using handset on the beach.
Sand may cause malfunction or accidents.
^ Keep handset away from credit cards, phone cards, etc.
to avoid data loss.
Handset
!
Avoid leaving handset in extreme heat (inside vehicles,
etc.).
$
Handset may heat up and lead to burns.
Volume settings
Keep handset volume moderate.
Excessive volume may cause damage to your hearing.
Headphones
^ Do not unplug by pulling the cord. May cause damage to
the cord.
^ Keep plug clean to prevent noise and malfunction.
Inside vehicles:
!
Handset use may cause electronic equipment to malfunction.
!
!
!
xxi
!CAUTION
Handset
Should skin irritation occur, discontinue handset use and consult a doctor.
See below for handset materials. They may cause skin irritation, rashes, or itchiness depending on your physical condition.
Parts
Housing (Main Display side)
#
Materials & Finishing
Magnesium alloy/Acrylic baking finish (sealer: epoxy baking finish)
Housing (Display back/bottom side, Keypad/Battery side),
ABS resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: acrylic painting)
Battery Cover, Memory Card Slot Cover, Outer Cover (Display side)
Display window
xxii
Acrylic resin
Logo badge 1, Logo badge 2 (below Keypad)
UV curing resin
Lens cover
Acrylic resin
Small Light window
ABS resin/Chrome plating (sealer: nickel, copper)/PC resin/Acrylic resin
Camera Ornament
ABS resin (deposition/sealer: tin)/Acrylic UV curing painting
Screw cover (above Display/Keypad)
Urethane resin
Screw cover (below Display)
PET
Screw cover (hinge)
UV curing resin
Side Keys
ABS resin (chrome plating/sealer: nickel, copper)/PC resin
Multi Selector, Function Key, Left Soft Key, Right Soft Key
ABS resin (chrome plating/sealer: nickel, copper)
Start Key, Power On/Off Key
ABS resin (chrome plating/sealer: nickel, copper)/PC resin
Shortcuts & A/a Key, Clear Key, Multimedia/Text Key
PC resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: acrylic painting)
Headphone Connector Cover, External Device Connector Cover
Elastomeric resin
Battery
PC resin
Charger Terminal
Nylon 6T/Brass, Au plating (sealer: nickel, copper)
Screw (Display side, Keypad side)
SWCH12A/Ni plating
SIM pin
Phosphor bronze, nickel plating, palladium-nickel alloy plating, gold plating
SIM cover
SUS
!CAUTION
Charger Care
Charger & In-Car Charger
^ Grasp plug (not cord) to disconnect Charger. May cause
fire/electric shock.
^ Keep cord away from heaters. Exposed wire may cause
fire or electric shock.
$
Always charge handset in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid covering/wrapping Charger/Desktop Holder.
May cause damage/fire.
Do not use In-Car Charger when engine is off.
^ Stop use if plug is hot or improperly connected.
May cause fire/electric shock.
^ Keep In-Car Charger socket clean. May overheat and
cause injury.
#
Do not touch Desktop Holder while in use.
$
Handset maintenance
$
Installing In-Car Charger
May cause burns.
Use only the specified fuse.
1A fuse for In-Car Charger.
Or may cause breakage/fire.
Start engine before use. Or car battery may be weakened.
Long periods of disuse
Be sure to unplug Charger or In-Car Charger after use.
When cleaning, disconnect Charger/In-Car Charger to
prevent shock/injury.
Properly position the cable for safe driving to avoid injury or
accidents.
$
$
)
)
!
xxiii
!CAUTION
Battery
Do not throw or abuse battery.
Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.
$
Do not leave battery in direct sunlight or inside vehicles.
Overheating/fire may occur.
Performance may deteriorate.
$
Do not expose battery to liquids.
Performance may deteriorate.
*
#
If battery fluid contacts skin or clothes, rinse with clean
water immediately.
^ Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary
refuse. Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or
bring them to a Vodafone shop.
Follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.
^ Keep battery out of the reach of children.
xxiv
^ Charge battery within a range of 5]C - 35]C. Out of this
range, battery may leak/overheat or performance may
deteriorate.
^ If your child is using handset, explain all instructions and
supervise usage.
^ If there is abnormal odour or excessive heat, stop using battery
and call Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.
^ Do not leave battery uncharged. Charge at least once
every 6 months.
!
General Notes
General Use
^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from
accidental loss/alteration of handset or SD Memory Card data.
Please keep separate records of Phone Book entries, etc.
^ Handset transmissions may be disrupted inside buildings,
tunnels or underground, or when moving into/out of such places.
^ Use handset without disturbing others.
^ Handsets are radios as stipulated by the Radio Law. Under the
Radio Law, handsets must be submitted for inspection upon request.
^ Handset use near landlines, TVs or radios may cause interference.
^ Beware of eavesdropping.
Because this service is completely digital, the possibility of
signal interception is greatly reduced, however, some
transmissions may be overheard.
Eavesdropping
Deliberate/accidental interception of communications
constitutes eavesdropping.
Inside Vehicles
^ Never use handset when driving.
^ Do not park illegally to use handset.
^ Handset use may affect a vehicle's electronic equipment.
Aboard Aircraft
Never use handset aboard aircraft (keep power off).
Handset use may impair aircraft operation.
xxv
Handset Care
xxvi
^ If handset is left with no battery or an exhausted one, data may
^ Handset is not water-proof.
be altered/lost. Vodafone is not liable for any resulting damages.
^ Use handset between 5]C - 35]C and 35% - 85% humidity.
Avoid extreme temperatures/direct sunlight.
^ Exposing lens to direct sunlight may damage colour filter and
affect image colour.
^ Do not drop or subject handset to shocks.
^ Clean handset with dry, soft cloth. Using alcohol, thinner, etc.
may damage it.
^ Do not expose handset to rain, snow or high humidity.
^ Never disassemble or modify handset.
^ Avoid scratching handset Display.
^ When closing handset, keep straps, etc. outside to avoid
damaging the Display.
^ When using headphones, moderate volume to avoid sound bleed.
Avoid exposure to liquids and high humidity.
B Keep handset away from precipitation.
B Cold air from air conditioning, etc. may condense causing
corrosion.
B Avoid dropping handset in a wet area (toilet, bathroom, etc.).
B On the beach, keep handset away from water and direct sunlight.
B Perspiration may seep inside handset causing malfunction.
^ Heavy objects or excessive pressure should be avoided.
May cause malfunction or injury.
B Do not sit down with handset in a back pocket.
B Do not place heavy objects on handset in a bag.
^ Connect only the specified products to Headphone Connector.
Malfunction or damage may result.
^ Always turn off handset before removing battery.
If battery is removed while saving data or sending mail, data
may be lost, changed, or destroyed.
Copyrights
Copyright laws protect sounds, images, computer programmes, databases, other materials and copyright holders.
Duplicated material is limited to private use only. Use of materials beyond this limit or without permission of copyright holders
may constitute copyright infringement, and be subject to criminal punishment. Comply with copyright laws when using
images captured with handset camera.
Video recording and playback are based on MPEG-4.
This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to
(i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Video Standard
("MPEG-4 Video") and/or (ii) decode MPEG-4 Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and
non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a licensed video
provider. No licence is granted or implied for any other use.
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA.
See http://www.mpegla.com
This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Systems Patent
Portfolio License for encoding in compliance with the MPEG-4
Systems Standard, except that an additional licence and payment
of royalties are necessary for encoding in connection with (i) data
stored or replicated in physical media which is paid for on a title by
title basis and/or (ii) data which is paid for on a title by title basis
and is transmitted to an end user for permanent storage and/or use.
Such additional licence may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com for additional details.
^ Microsoft, MS and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
^ The names of other companies and products mentioned herein
may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
^ Windows Me is an abbreviation for Microsoft# Windows#
Millennium Edition operating system (Japanese version).
^ Windows 98 SE is an abbreviation for Microsoft# Windows# 98
Second Edition operating system (Japanese version).
^ Windows 2000 is an abbreviation for Microsoft# Windows# 2000
operating system (Japanese version).
^ Windows XP is an abbreviation for Microsoft# Windows# XP
operating system (Japanese version).
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
xxvii
This product is equipped with JBlend!
designed to accelerate the performance
of Java! Application.
Powered by JBlend! Copyright
1997-2004 Aplix Corporation.
All rights reserved.
JBlend and JBlend-related brands are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries.
Java and Java-related brands are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and
other countries.
The SD logo is a trademark.
Chaku-Uta# is a Trademark of Sony Music Entertainment (Japan) Inc.
xxviii
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the
following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307
5,490,165
5,056,109
5,504,773
5,101,501
5,506,865
5,109,390
5,511,073
5,228,054
5,535,239
5,267,261
5,544,196
5,267,262
5,568,483
5,337,338
5,600,754
5,414,796
5,657,420
5,416,797
5,659,569
5,710,784
5,778,338
Bluetooth is a trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Sharp is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Powered by Mascot Capsule#/Micro3D Edition!
Mascot Capsule# is a registered trademark of HI Corporation.
$2002-2004 HI Corporation. All rights reserved.
The 2.4 GHz frequency band is used for handset Bluetooth-related
functions. Read through the following before use.
The 2.4 GHz frequency band is shared with other industrial,
scientific or medical equipment (microwave ovens, etc.), and
used at licensed premises radio stations and unlicensed
specified low-power radio stations for mobile equipment
identification.
This product employs Macromedia# Flash Lite! technology
developed by Macromedia, Inc.
Copyright $ 1995-2004 Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved.
Macromedia, Flash, Flash Lite, Macromedia Flash and Macromedia
Flash Lite are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
1 Before using this product, ensure that there is no premises
radio station or specified low-power radio station operating for
mobile equipment identification.
2 Should interference occur between this product and premises
radio station for mobile equipment identification, change the
frequency immediately, or stop the transmission and contact
us for countermeasures (partitioning, etc.).
CP8 PATENT
3 For any other issues including interference with specified
low-power radio stations for mobile equipment identification,
contact us at the following number.
Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information
From a Vodafone handset, call toll free at 157 for General
Information.
From landlines, refer to "Customer Service" on P.16-32.
^ This product operates in the 2.4 GHz frequency band based on
FHSS modulation. The operation range is 10 m or less.
xxix
FCC Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
TEL: 1-800-BE-SHARP
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
FCC Notice
The handset may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the handset if such interference
cannot be eliminated.
xxx
Information to User
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation; if this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
1. Reorient/relocate the receiving aerial.
2. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF Exposure Information
Your handset is a radio transmitter and receiver.
It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission
limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the
Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The guidelines are based on standards that were developed
by independent scientific organisations through periodic and
thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards
include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the
safety of all persons, regardless of age and health.
The exposure standard for wireless handsets employs a
unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.
The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for
each model. The highest SAR value for this model handset
when tested for use at the ear is 0.549W/kg and when worn
on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.326W/kg.
Body- worn Operation; This device was tested for typical
body-worn operations with the back of the handset kept
1.5cm from the body. To maintain compliance with FCC RF
exposure requirements, use accessories that maintain a
1.5cm separation distance between the user's body and the
back of the handset. The use of beltclips, holsters and
similar accessories should not contain metallic components
in its assembly.
The use of accessories that do not satisfy these
requirements may not comply with FCC RF exposure
requirements, and should be avoided.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorisation for this
model handset with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in
compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR
information on this model handset is on file with the FCC
and can be found under the Display Grant section of
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID
APYHRO00039.
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR)
can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Association (CTIA) website at
http://www.phonefacts.net.
xxxi
European RF Exposure Information
Your handset has been designed, manufactured and tested
so as not to exceed the limits for exposure to
electromagnetic fields recommended by the Council of the
European Union. These limits are part of comprehensive
guidelines developed by independent scientific
organisations. The guidelines include a substantial safety
margin designed to assure the safety of the handset user
and others and to take into account variations in age and
health, individual sensitivities and environmental conditions.
European standards provide for the amount of radio
frequency electromagnetic energy absorbed by the body
when using a handset to be measured by reference to the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR limit for the
general public is currently 2W/kg averaged over 10g of body
tissue. Your handset SAR value is 0.686W/kg.
This has been tested to ensure that this limit is not
exceeded even when the handset is operating at its highest
certified power. In use however your handset may operate
at less than full power because it is designed to use only
sufficient power to communicate with the network.
xxxii
xxxiii
Getting Started
1-1
1
Getting Started
Function & Feature Preview
SD Memory Card is required for items with grey background.
USIM Card
Rotating Display
Memory Card
Contains user information. For
use with USIM Card compatible
Vodafone handsets.
Change handset Display
position to use mobile camera,
etc.
Save files to SD Memory Card
to expand handset memory or
back-up handset files.
P.1-4
P.1-13 - 1-14
P.1-25
International Roaming
Compatible with both W-CDMA
and GSM network systems.
Use the same number in Japan
and abroad.
P.2-14
Manner Mode
Use Predictive or Previous
Usage to reduce keystrokes
when entering Japanese text.
P.2-16
P.3-6, P.3-12 - 3-13
Phone Book
Save up to 500 entries (with up
to three phone numbers and mail
addresses each) on handset and
more on USIM Card.
P.4-2
TV Call
1-2
Camera
Place or receive calls with
voice and video.
Capture still and video images.
P.5-2
P.6-2
Media Player
Play downloaded music and
video images as well as
captured video images.
P.7-2
Kanji Conversion
Press a single key to mute
ringer and activate Message
Recorder automatically.
Data Folder
Bluetooth
Save and manage a variety of
handset files.
Exchange files and information
with other handsets, etc.
wirelessly via Bluetooth.
P.9-3
P.8-2
Calendar & Tasks
Display
Set Wallpaper, System
Graphics and Fonts to
customise your handset.
P.10-4
Voice Recorder
Organise daily, weekly, and
monthly events.
Record/play voice. Send
recorded voice via MMS.
P.11-2
P.11-9
Electronic Books
Vodafone live!
Read E-Books (XMDF format)
saved on SD Memory Card.
Exchange SMS/MMS messages,
access the Mobile Internet and
download V-applications.
P.13-2
P.11-24
Display Language
Set handset menus, etc. to
appear in English or Japanese.
P.10-5
1
Getting Started
Infrared
Exchange files and information
with other handsets, etc.
wirelessly via Infrared.
P.9-9
Barcodes
Scan UPC and QR Codes or
create QR Codes from Phone
Book entries, etc.
P.11-11
Optional Services
Call Forwarding
Forward incoming calls to a
specified number.
P.12-2
Voice Mail
Forward incoming calls to
Voice Mail Centre.
P.12-4
Conference Call
Switch between multiple lines
or talk on all simultaneously.
P.12-6
Call Barring
Restrict incoming/outgoing calls.
P.12-7
Call Waiting
Answer an incoming call during
a call.
P.12-5
Caller ID
Show or hide your number
when placing calls.
P.12-10
1-3
1
Getting Started
USIM Card
General Information & Precautions
Vodafone Global Standard USIM Card is an IC card
containing customer information such as handset number.
USIM Card must be inserted before using a USIM Card
compatible handset. Without USIM Card, calls, messaging,
Web and other Network-related services are not available.
^ Save Phone Book on USIM Card (see P.4-2).
^ Use USIM Card files with other compatible Vodafone
handsets.
^ Do not apply excessive force to insert/remove USIM Card.
^ Do not insert USIM Card into any other IC card device.
Vodafone is not liable for resulting damages.
^ Keep the USIM Card IC chip clean.
^ Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the USIM Card.
^ Do not attach labels to USIM Card. Malfunction may result.
IC
USIM Card
1-4
If Handset is Dropped or Subjected to Shocks
USIM Card may not be recognised. In such cases, handset
may automatically restart. This is not a malfunction. If Insert
SIM Card appears, check that USIM Card is properly
inserted and restart handset.
Important
^ USIM Card is the property of Vodafone.
^ USIM Card will be reissued for a fee if lost or damaged.
^ Return USIM Card to Vodafone upon subscription
termination.
^ Returned USIM Cards are recycled.
^ USIM Card specifications are subject to change without prior
notice.
^ Back-up USIM Card files. Vodafone is not liable for lost files.
1
Inserting & Removing USIM Card
1
Remove battery (see P.1-21)
2
Slide in USIM Card with IC chip facing down
3
Insert battery
Getting Started
Inserting
Note H ^ Do not force USIM Card into handset. Damage may result.
^ Avoid touching USIM Card IC chip. May hinder
performance.
1-5
1
Removing
Getting Started
1
Remove battery (see P.1-21)
2
Press down the tab and slide out USIM Card as shown
e
Note H ^ Do not force USIM Card out of handset. Damage may result.
^ Be careful not to lose removed USIM Card.
^ Avoid touching USIM Card IC chip. May hinder
performance. In such cases, Insert SIM Card may
appear or handset may automatically restart. This is not a
malfunction. Avoid touching USIM Card terminals as well.
f
3
1-6
Insert battery
1
USIM PINs
PIN1
A 4-digit to 8-digit Security Code to prevent unauthorised
use of Vodafone handset.
^ PIN1 is 9999 by default.
^ To change PIN1, see P.10-10.
^ When Switch On/Off in PIN Entry is On (see P.10-10), PIN1
is required every time handset is turned on (with USIM Card
inserted).
PIN2
Required to clear Call Costs and to set Max Cost.
^ PIN2 is 9999 by default.
^ To change PIN2, see P.10-10.
PIN Lock & PUK Code
PIN1 Lock or PIN2 Lock is activated if PIN1 or PIN2 is
incorrectly entered three times consecutively. Cancel PIN1
Lock by entering the Personal Unblocking Key (PUK Code).
For information on PUK Code, contact Vodafone Customer
Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
Getting Started
There are two Security Codes for USIM Card: PIN1 and PIN2.
Note H ^ If PUK Code is incorrectly entered ten times, USIM
Card is locked and handset is disabled. Write down
PUK Code.
^ For procedures required to unlock USIM Card, contact
Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information
(see P.16-32).
1-7
1
Getting Started
Handset Parts & Functions
Handset
8
R
S
9
A
5
6
7
4
D
E
1-8
N
H
W
O
P
F
G
T
U
V
M
B
C
2
3
L
K
1
I
J
Q
a
b
Open messaging menu or execute Soft Key function/
command.
3 Start Key
Initiate/answer calls. Open records of All Calls.
4 Shortcuts & A/a Key
List User Shortcuts, etc. Toggle between upper/lower case
roman letters or standard/small hiragana/katakana in text
entry windows.
5 Clear/Back Key
Delete entries/return to previous window.
6 Keypad
7 U Key/Keypad Lock
Press for 1+ seconds to set or release Keypad Lock. In
alphanumeric entry, open web/mail address prefixes & suffixes.
8 Internal Camera
Use during TV Call.
9 Earpiece
A Multi Selector
Select menu items, move cursor, scroll, etc.
B Microphone
Use in Viewer position.
C Right Soft Key
Open Vodafone live! menu or execute Soft Key function/command.
D Power On/Off Key
Press for 2+ seconds to turn handset power on/off.
E Multimedia/Text Key
Start Media Player or toggle character types.
F # Key
^ When handset is opened for mobile camera (clamshell
open), turn Mobile Light on/off. In text entry windows, toggle
through Symbol & Pictograph lists.
^ Press for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Manner mode.
G Microphone
H Headphone Connector
Connect supplied Multi Stereo Headphones, etc.
I Charger Terminal
J External Device Connector
Connect Charger here.
K Infrared Port
Use for infrared transmissions.
L Strap Eyelet
Attach straps as shown.
M Memory Card Slot
Insert SD Memory Card here.
N Small Light
Illuminates red while charging.
1
Getting Started
1 Display
2 Left Soft Key
1-9
1
O Shutter Key
Getting Started
In Viewer position, press to open selected menu items or
execute functions. Press for 1+ seconds to activate mobile
camera (for more information, see P.6-4).
P Clear Key
Press for 1+ seconds to activate Pen Light. In Viewer
position, press to cancel the current operation or return to the
previous window, etc. For mobile camera keys, see P.6-4.
Q Zoom/Select Key
^ In Viewer position, press to select menu items or to move
cursor. For mobile camera keys, see P.6-4.
a Move cursor down or right.
b Move cursor up or left.
R Internal Antenna
S Speaker
T External Camera; lens cover
Capture still and video images.
U Portrait/Macro Selector
V Mobile Light
Flashes for incoming calls/mail. Serves as a strobe or Pen Light.
W Battery Cover
1-10
Note H Internal Antenna
^ 802SH has no external antenna. Handset transmits and
receives signals via Internal Antenna.
^ Do not cover or place stickers, etc. over the area
containing Internal Antenna. Voice quality is affected
depending on how and where handset is used.
^ For better signal in Standby, close handset (clamshell
closed: see P.1-13). For better voice quality, talk with
handset open (clamshell open: see P.1-13).
1
Display
2 c SD Memory Card Status
W Incoming Voice Call
g Voice Call in Progress
S TV Call in Progress
b Line Active (Server or Web Transmission)
3 X Call Forwarding or Voice Mail
X SSL
X appears when Call Forwarding or Voice Mail is set for all
Getting Started
NgX67 1KsgJ
j ehCGkkld
Voice Calls.
1 2 345
678 9 A
NgX67 1KsgJ
j ehCGkkld
B C D E F G H IJ
1 N Signal Strength (N Strong O Moderate P Low
Q Weak S Out-of-Range)
e Off Line Mode
3 3G
4 GSM (GPRS Available)
j appears red in 3G and grey in GSM.
4 6 SMS
5 7 MMS
3 Receiving Mail
d Sending Mail
Y Memory Full
6 1 USB Transmission Ready
d (red) Infrared Connection in Progress
0 Infrared Transmission in Progress
2 Bluetooth Transmission Ready
B Bluetooth Transmission in Progress
C Bluetooth Talk in Progress
7 K Active V-application
K (grey) Paused V-application
I Music Player Active
1-11
1
Getting Started
8 s Meeting Mode
r Activity Mode
b Car Mode
V Headset Mode
k Manner Mode
9 g Silent
h Increasing Volume
f Vibration
G Silent & Vibration
m Loudspeaker
w Microphone Mute
A J Battery Strength
g Pen Light
g and J flash when Pen Light is in use.
B j Message Recorder Active
l Message
l (green) Message Recorder Active
l (black) Message Recorder Cancelled
C e Alarm Set
D h Schedule (Reminder On)
i Schedule (Reminder Off)
E C Message Delivery Failure
F G Auto Delivery Info
G k New Voice Mail
H k Secret Mode Active
I l Phone Lock Active
b Keypad Lock Active
J d (grey) Infrared Transmission Ready
1-12
1
802SH features a rotating Display. Select from four positions.
In this manual, most operations are described with handset open (clamshell open). However, mobile camera operations (see P.6-2)
are described with Display in Viewer position.
Display Positions
Getting Started
Display Positions & Keys
Hold handset with both hands when changing Display position.
Clamshell Closed
1
Clamshell Open
3
Open handset
2
Handset is closed with Display facing inward.
Keep this position when not in use.
Handset is open with Display facing inward.
Place or answer calls, or enter text.
Tip H Place or answer calls with handset open (clamshell open)
or in Viewer position.
1-13
1
Self Portrait Position
Getting Started
4
Rotate Display 180
degrees clockwise
Viewer Position
5
Close handset
7
Handset is open with Display facing outward.
Handset is closed with Display facing outward.
Capture a self portrait.
^ Use this position for mobile camera (see P.6-2) or checking
Note H ^ Place or answer calls with handset open (clamshell
open) or in Viewer position.
^ Do not rotate Display anticlockwise when changing to
Self Portrait position.
1-14
6
images on Display (see P.6-18).
^ Use h, c, M or L to perform basic operations as with
clamshell open.
Note H Do not carry handset with Display in Viewer position.
Damage may result.
1
Key Press Methods
Press
Press once softly
Long Press
Press for 1+ seconds
Side Key Assignments (Viewer)
Getting Started
Multiple functions are assigned to some keys, distinguished by the following ways to press.
When handset is in Viewer position, use h, c, M or L.
In Standby
During Operations
LM
h
c
The keys correspond as follows. (Not applicable during calls or
incoming calls, or while mobile camera or V-application is active.)
Viewer Position
e
Press
b
Long Press
g
Press
d
M
Press
C or B*
L
Press
D or A*
h
Long Press
Activate mobile camera
Press
Open Main Menu
c
Long Press
Illuminate Pen Light
L
M
Press
Adjust Earpiece Volume
h
Clamshell Open
Long Press
c
*Depends on content.
Tip H Use the corresponding keys in Viewer position.
1-15
1
Getting Started
Battery & Charger
Getting Started
Charge a new battery before use or after a period of disuse.
Battery Life
^ Do not use or store battery at extreme temperatures. May
shorten battery life.
B Ideal working temperature is between 5]C - 35]C.
^ Use specified Charger only. Battery may deteriorate, overheat
or ignite.
^ Replace battery if operating time is noticeably shorter than normal.
Charging
^ Do not use Charger for other purposes.
^ Battery may short-circuit, overheat or burst from contact with
metal objects.
^ Small Light illuminates red while charging. (It may take a while
for the light to illuminate when handset power is off.)
^ Charging takes approximately 135 minutes (with handset
power off).
B Charging time may vary by ambient temperature.
^ Charger and battery may become warm during charging.
^ Move Charger away from home TVs or radios if interference occurs.
1-16
Precautions
^ Use a dry cotton swab to clean handset, battery and Charger
terminals.
^ Avoid:
B Extreme temperatures
B Humidity, dust and vibration
B Direct sunlight
^ Do not leave battery uncharged. Charge at least once every
six months.
^ Use a case when carrying battery separately.
Tip H ^ Battery must be inside handset to charge.
^ Handset will charge with power on. J flashes and
stays on when complete.
^ Handset will charge while open.
Estimated Hours of Use (fully charged battery)
150 minutes (3G) or 240 minutes
(GSM)
Continuous Standby Time
240 hours (3G) or 250 hours (GSM)
Continuous Operating Time 4.5 hours
Continuous Playback Time
7 hours
Continuous TV Call Time
90 minutes
Above values are calculated with Backlight Brightness set to
Level: 2 (default).
^ Continuous Call Time is an average measured with a new,
fully charged battery, with stable signals.
^ Continuous Standby Time is an average measured with a
new, fully charged battery, with handset closed (clamshell
closed) without calls or operations, in Standby with stable
signals. Standby Time may be less than half this value if
handset is out-of-range or signal is weak. Standby Time may
vary by environment (battery status, temperature, etc.).
^ Continuous Operating Time is measured with handset being
operated without calls.
^ Continuous Playback Time is measured with sound/music
being played back in Off Line Mode.
^ The above values (Battery Time) are nominal values,
measured under stable signal conditions.
1
Getting Started
Continuous Call Time
Battery Time
Battery Time may shorten when handset is used in poor
conditions:
^ Poor Usage Conditions
B Extreme temperatures (use within a range of 5]C - 35]C)
B Dirty handset, battery or Charger terminals (charging may
be hampered)
B Weak signals or out-of-range
^ Operation
B V-application is active
B Repeated mobile camera use or barcode scanning
B Frequent use of Mobile Light
B Playing video images
B Frequent use of Pen Light
B Continuous Keypad use (Backlight stays on for long periods)
B Use of Music Player/Voice Recorder
B Frequent infrared transfers
B Frequent opening/closing of handset
^ Setting
B Display Saving start time or Backlight time is set longer
B Backlight is set brighter
1-17
1
Extend Battery Time
Getting Started
Adjust Display Backlight settings to reduce power
consumption (see P.10-6).
When Battery Runs Out
A message appears and short beeps sound. Handset shuts
down after 20 seconds unless charged. Press g to stop short
beeps. (Short beeps do not sound in Manner mode.) If battery
runs out while talking, short beeps sound every five seconds.
After 20 seconds, the call ends and handset shuts down.
Battery Disposal
Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary refuse.
Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or bring them
to a Vodafone shop. Follow local regulations regarding
battery disposal.
Battery Strength
Strength Level
N
J
When battery runs out (M), Recharge battery. appears and
short beeps sound. Handset shuts down after 20 seconds.
1-18
Small Light & Battery Strength Indicator
CHandset Power On
Battery Voltage
Recharge battery. appears.
Charge or replace battery immediately.
Minimum Operating
Voltage
J
K
L
M
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
Approx. 70%
Approx. 20% Approx. 10%
Hours of Use
Remaining Strength (at 25]C)
CBattery Strength & Environment
At low temperatures, battery is consumed faster.
At high temperatures, battery lasts longer.
Note H ^ Battery Strength indicator is for reference only.
^ At Level 1, some functions including Music Player,
Voice Recorder, Video Camera, etc. do not operate
(see P.7-3, P.11-9, P.6-10).
Indicator (J)
Conditions
Off
Flashes
Ambient temperature is outside
the range of 5]C - 35]C, or
battery has run out
Flashes red
Flashes
Battery life has ended, or battery
defect
Small Light
Illuminates red
Flashes
Off
Illuminates
1
Getting Started
CIndicator
Battery Strength indicator varies as shown.
Charge or replace when level is low.
Charging
Charging completed/Standby
CHandset Power Off
Indicator (J)
Conditions
Off
Off
Ambient temperature is outside
the range of 5]C - 35]C, or
battery has run out
Flashes red
Off
Battery life has ended, or battery
defect
Small Light
Illuminates red
Off
Charging
Off
Off
Charging completed
1-19
1
Installing & Removing Battery
Getting Started
Inserting
1
Press down and slide cover as shown
3
e
Insert battery
f
e
f
2
Lift and remove cover as shown
4
Tip H Lithium-ion battery is used for this product.
Lithium-ion battery is a recyclable resource.
^ To recycle a used battery, take it to any shop
displaying the symbol shown to the right.
^ To avoid fire or electric shock, do not:
B Short-circuit batteries
B Disassemble batteries
1-20
^ With printed side up, fit tabs into battery cavity slots.
Close cover
^ Position and slide cover as shown until it stops.
1
Removing
3
Remove battery
e
Getting Started
1
Press down and slide cover as shown
f
2
Lift and remove cover as shown
^ Remove battery as shown.
Note H ^ Turn handset power off before removing battery.
^ Do not remove battery immediately after saving files,
sending messages, etc.
1-21
1
AC Charger
Getting Started
3
2
100 VAC
Blade
1
Printed Side Up
AC Charger
Release Tab
4
Use specified Charger only.
1-22
Small Light
Charger Connector
1
Open Terminal Cover and insert Charger
connector until it clicks
2
Plug in Charger
^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-19).
^ Extend blades. Fold back when not in use.
Terminal Cover
External Device Connector
3
4
Charging is complete when light goes out
^ Charging takes approximately 135 minutes.
After Charging
Unplug Charger from outlet, then handset
^ Squeeze release tabs and pull connector straight out.
^ Cap Terminal Cover.
Note H ^ Do not pull, bend or twist AC Charger cord.
^ AC Charger is compatible with 100 - 240 VAC
household currents.
^ Vodafone is not liable for problems caused by charging
handset abroad.
1
Desktop Holder
4
1
2
1
2
100 VAC
Release Tab
AC
Charger
Slot
Tab
Connection Terminal
Getting Started
Small Light
3
Blade
5
Printed
Side Down Mobile Light Indicator
Activate Mobile Light (see
P.10-3). Mobile Light
illuminates for incoming calls,
mail and Web info.
Insert cord
into the groove.
Use specified Charger and Desktop Holder only.
1
Gently insert handset into Desktop Holder
4
5
Charging is complete when light goes out
Insert Charger connector into Desktop Holder
until it clicks
^ Connection Terminal is on the back of Desktop Holder.
2
3
Plug in Charger
^ Extend blades. Fold back when not in use.
^ Fit tabs into slots as shown in 1 and push handset as
indicated in 2 until it clicks.
^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-19).
^ Charging takes approximately 135 minutes.
After Charging
Unplug Charger from outlet and remove handset
1-23
1
In-Car Charger
Getting Started
Cigarette Lighter Socket
Small Light
2
1
Release Tab
4
Terminal Cover
3
External Device Connector
5 Plug
1
Open Terminal Cover and insert Charger
connector until it clicks
2
3
4
5
Plug in Charger
Start car engine
^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-19).
Charging is complete when light goes out
^ Charging takes approximately 145 minutes.
After Charging
Unplug Charger from socket, then handset
^ Squeeze release tabs and pull connector straight out.
^ Cap Terminal Cover.
1-24
Printed Side Up
Note H ^ Use In-Car Charger inside vehicles with a negative
earth only.
^ Disconnect Charger before leaving vehicle to prevent
charging with engine off.
^ Do not use In-Car Charger with Desktop Holder.
^ Avoid charging battery inside extremely hot vehicles.
Tip H ^ For more information, see In-Car Charger manual.
^ Use optional In-Car Holder to secure handset.
1
^ An SD Memory Card is not included. Purchase SD Memory Card separately to use Memory Card-related functions.
^ Format a new SD Memory Card for use with 802SH (see P.10-13).
^ To learn how to save a particular file to an SD Memory Card, refer to that section of the manual.
Precautions
^ 802SH is compatible with SD Memory Card and SD-ROM Card.
^ The manufacturer recommends the use of 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
^ Never disassemble or modify an SD Memory Card.
^ Do not expose SD Memory Card to strong impacts, pressure
256 or 512 MB or 1 GB cards.
^ For optimum use of Memory Card-related functions, SD
or liquids.
^ Do not touch SD Memory Card terminals or expose them to
Memory Cards with 16 MB or more capacity are recommended.
^ To lower the chance of handset malfunction please use only
metal objects.
^ Do not expose SD Memory Card to direct sunlight or
recommended SD Memory Card sizes.
^ Turn handset power off before inserting or removing an SD
Memory Card.
^ Do not peel off the label on SD Memory Card. Doing so may
damage the card or result in lost information.
^ Do not place new labels or stickers on SD Memory Card. These
items may affect card performance or result in lost information.
^ Use an oil-based felt pen to write on SD Memory Card. Using a pencil
or ballpoint pen may damage the card or result in lost information.
Getting Started
Memory Card
^
^
^
^
excessive heat (e.g. inside vehicles, etc.).
Keep an SD Memory Card away from dust or high humidity.
Do not use in the presence of corrosive gases.
Avoid heat sources and do not dispose of in fire.
An SD Memory Card is a consumable item. Card performance
deteriorates with usage, eventually becoming unusable and
needs to be replaced.
Note H Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from
accidental loss/alteration of information. Please keep a
separate record of Phone Book contents, etc.
1-25
1
Inserting & Removing SD Memory Card
Getting Started
Inserting
Turn handset power off.
1
Open cover
3
2
Insert card until it clicks
Close cover
Write Protection Switch
Set Write Protection Switch to LOCK to prevent accidental
erasure or overwriting. For more information, see SD Memory
Card manual.
Note H Do not insert other objects into Memory Card Slot.
Damage may result.
Labelled Side Down
1-26
1
Removing
1
Open cover and lightly push down on card
^ With a light push, the card pops out.
2
Remove card
Getting Started
Turn handset power off.
^ Slide the card straight out and close cover.
Note H Never remove SD Memory Card or battery while files are being accessed.
Damage to handset/card may result.
Tip H Insert an SD Memory Card and turn handset power on. Standby appears. Memory Card load times vary depending on card size
and the amount of information saved.
Memory Card Indicator
When an SD Memory Card is inserted into handset, Memory Card indicator appears at the top of Display. Memory Card
indicator lights/flashes when in use, etc.
c
SD Memory Card inserted
S
Accessing files
P
Write protection enabled
1-27
1
Getting Started
Handset Power On/Off
1
32
Open handset (clamshell open)
Press g for 2+ seconds
3
After graphics, handset is in Standby.
4
1
2
4
Backlight illuminates and Power
On Graphics appear
Turning Off
Press g for 2+ seconds
Power Off Graphics appear and handset shuts
down.
Handset Clock Settings
If date and time have not been set, Time & Date is not set. Set now? appears after Power On Graphics.
Press e i A Set Time Zone (see P.10-7) A Set date and time (see P.10-7)
Press d c A Standby appears without date and time
Note H ^ Set the current date and time before using handset functions (see P.10-7).
^ USIM Card data is read after turning power on. Signal strength indicator may take some time
to appear. It may take longer when turning power on for the first time.
^ If handset is dropped or subjected to shocks, USIM Card may not be recognised. In such
cases, handset may automatically restart. This is not a malfunction.
^ Insert SIM Card appears when USIM Card is not inserted.
^ If Insert SIM Card appears even if USIM Card is inserted, check that the card is properly
inserted and that the IC chip is clean, then restart handset.
Tip H ^ Handset receives incoming mail or Web information while closed.
^ Display shuts down after a period of inactivity.
1-28
1
Keypad Lock
1
Activate
Cancel
Press ; for 1+ seconds
In Standby, press ; for 1+ seconds
b appears and Keypad Lock is set.
1
b disappears.
Getting Started
Use Keypad Lock to lock handset keys and prevent accidental activation of functions or operations.
Tip H When Keypad Lock is Active
^ Incoming calls temporarily cancel Keypad Lock. To answer calls, press keys for Any Key
Answer (see P.2-5). Keypad Lock reactivates after the calls end.
^ Handset power does not turn off even if g is pressed for 2+ seconds.
Pen Light
1
Use handset as a flashlight.
Pen Light On/Off
Turn Pen Light on and off
In Standby, press c (Long Press) A Pen Light illuminates
C To change illumination colour, press L or M while on.
C Press c to turn off.
Note H Do not point Pen Light at people's faces or look into the light yourself.
1-29
1
Getting Started
Handset Menus
Main Menu
Access functions/operations from Main Menu.
1
2
3
1
Press b
2
Use G to select an item
Main Menu opens.
C In Viewer position, press h.
3
Press b
Sub Menu opens (see P.16-2).
C In Viewer position, press h.
C In Viewer position, press L or M.
CMain Menu Items
N
J
Camera
Mail Messages
V-applications
Vodafone live! (Mobile Internet sites)
Media Player
Mobile Camera
Data Folder
Select
1-30
Exit
Barcode/Text Scanner
Phone Book
Settings
Call Log
Connectivity (Infrared, Bluetooth, etc.)
Tools (Calendar, Alarm, World Clock, etc.)
1
Soft Keys
N
J
Soft Key Assignments (Viewer)
Soft Key functions appear at the top of Display when mobile
camera is active.
Camera
Mobile Camera
Options
Select
Exit
Press d to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
Press b to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
Press e to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
Other Windows
Press c to select or
execute the assigned
function or operation.
N
Press h to select or
execute the assigned
function or operation.
NF IQ
cKA
Press c to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
Select
Press h to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
Press LM to select or execute
the assigned function or operation.
LM
Getting Started
Soft Key functions appear at the bottom of Display.
J
Camera
Exit
h
c
1-31
1
User Shortcuts
Getting Started
Create shortcuts to functions and files.
Default shortcuts:
B Dialled Numbers, Received Calls, Calendar, Calculator and Voice Recorder
Using Shortcuts
1
Press k
Assign
2
Select a function and press b
Change default shortcuts
Press k A Select an item A Press e P A Select Assign A Press b A
Select new item A Press b
1
2
Move
Change the order of items
Press k A Select an item A Press e P A Select Move A Press b A
Use E to move position A Press b
Set to Default
Return to default shortcuts
Press k A Press e P A Select Set to Default A Press b A
Press e i
1-32
1
Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password are needed for handset use.
Handset Code
9999 or the 4-digit number selected at initial subscription.
Handset Code is required to use/change some handset
functions.
^ U appears when Handset Code is entered.
^ If incorrect, Handset code is incorrect! appears. Enter
correct Handset Code.
Network Password
The 4-digit number selected at initial subscription, required
to restrict handset services. If Network Password is
incorrectly entered three times, Call Barring settings are
locked. To resolve, Network Password and Centre Access
Code must be changed. For details, contact Vodafone
Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
Getting Started
Security Codes
Centre Access Code
The 4-digit number in the contract, required to access Voice
Mail via landlines, and to subscribe to fee-based information.
Note H ^ Write down Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password. If lost, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General
Information (see P.16-32).
^ Do not reveal Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password. Vodafone is not liable for misuse or damages.
Tip H ^ Change Handset Code and Network Password as needed (see P.10-12, P.12-10).
^ Do not attempt to change Centre Access Code.
Contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32) for details.
1-33
Basic Handset Operations
2-1
Initiating a Voice Call (in Japan)
2
See P.2-15 for Voice Call from outside Japan and P.5-3 for TV Call.
Basic Handset Operations
1
1
Confirm handset is on
2
Enter a phone number
^ Check signal.
^ Handset will not transmit when S, e, b or
l appears (see P.16-4).
N
J
Enter Number
3
4
2
2-2
3
4
090392XXXX1
Options
Back
^ Include the dialling code even for local numbers.
Sending/Blocking Caller ID
^ Press the following keys when placing a call.
B Send
......186 or
;31:
B Block
......184 or
:31:
Alternatively, press e P A Select
Show My ID or Hide My ID A Press b
Confirm the number and press f
Correcting Wrong Numbers
^ Use B or A to move cursor and press
i to delete the digit above the cursor.
Press i for 1+ seconds to delete the
entire number and return to Standby.
If you misdial, press g to hang up and try
again.
Busy Numbers
^ Press g to end the call and try again later.
Press g to end call
^ Alternatively, close handset (clamshell
closed).
Tip H ^ Check Call Timers (see P.2-12) and
Call Costs (see P.2-13).
^ Use Loudspeaker when placing calls
(see P.2-9).
Supported Network Systems
Making an International Call
In Standby, enter a phone number A Press e
P A Select Country Code A Press b A
Select a country A Press b twice A Select Japan
A Press b A Press f
When calling Vodafone handsets, country code is not required.
Note H ^ Do not cover handset microphone while talking.
Microphone
(Viewer position)
Viewer Position
Place calls with Display in Viewer position
C Save the number to Phone Book first (see P.4-2).
Press h A Select Phone Book A Press h A Select
Phone Book List A Press h
A Open a Phone Book entry (see P.4-9) A Press h P
A Select Call A Press h
C Press c to end the call.
^ In Viewer position, hold handset with
Viewer in and Earpiece up.
2
Basic Handset Operations
802SH is compatible with 3G and GSM network systems. See
P.2-14 to change system.
^ Side Key Assignments during Calls:
h
Open Options menu
M
Increase volume
c
End call
L
Decrease volume
Hold tone sounds and each other's voice is not
heard
C Subscribe to Call Waiting (see P.12-5) or Conference Call (see P.12-6).
Hold
Microphone
(handset open)
^ Avoid covering area over Internal Antenna (see P.1-10 R).
^ Voice quality is affected depending on how and where
handset is used.
^ For better voice quality, talk with handset open
(clamshell open).
During a call, press e P A Select Hold A
Press b
C To cancel, press b A Select Retrieve A Press b
Mute
Microphone
Mute your handset microphone
Other party's voice can be heard
During a call, press e P A Select Mute
Microphone A Press b
C To cancel, press e P A Select Unmute Mic. A
Press b
2-3
Redial
2
Up to 10 recently dialled numbers are saved in Dialled Numbers. Place calls from Dialled Numbers.
Basic Handset Operations
1
Press B
N
J
Dialled Numbers
2
3
Select a record and press b
Press b
Number is dialled.
03123XXXX1
04/12/16 16:50
mikio ueda
1
3
2
04/12/13 14:15
03123XXXX1
16-11-2004
Options
04:50PM
Back
Dialled numbers appear with date and time.
Name appears if saved in Phone Book.
^ Press D or C to see more.
^ Press F to see Missed Calls, Received
Calls or All Calls.
Tip H ^ When the same number is dialled more than once, only the last record appears.
^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.
^ When there are 10 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. Alternatively, delete
records manually (see P.2-11).
2-4
Incoming Voice Call
2
See P.5-3 for incoming TV Call.
When a call arrives, open handset
N7
J
Voice Call...
1
2
2
3
Press f
Press g to end call
^ Alternatively, close handset (clamshell closed).
03123XXXX1
Answer
3
Basic Handset Operations
1
Busy
^ Number appears when Caller ID is sent.
(Caller's name appears if the number is
saved in Phone Book.)
Tip H When Any Key Answer is active (see P.10-3), press any of the following keys (besides f) to
answer calls:
0 - 9 , ; , : , G, k , j , L , M
Viewer Position
Answer calls with Display in Viewer position
When a call arrives, press h
C Press c to end the call.
^ Side Key Assignments for Incoming Calls:
h
Answer call
c*
Forward call
c (Long Press)
Reject call
*Available if When Busy (forwarding condition) is set for Call Forwarding or Voice Mail. Calls are
rejected when Off (see P.12-3 - 12-4).
^ For operations during calls in Viewer position, see P.2-3.
2-5
Rejecting or Forwarding Incoming Calls
2
Basic Handset Operations
While handset is ringing/vibrating, use the keys below to reject
or forward an incoming call.
g
Reject a call (see P.2-8)
d
Forward a call to a preset number.
Available if When Busy (forwarding condition) is set
for Call Forwarding or Voice Mail. Calls are rejected if
Off (see P.12-3 - 12-4).
^ Alternatively, activate Message Recorder (see P.2-20).
^ For operations in Viewer position, see P.2-5.
When Message Recorder is Active
Outgoing message plays and recording starts (see P.2-20). When
Message Recorder is not active, use Quick Recorder (see P.2-21).
^ Caller incurs charges in either case.
Caller ID
C Phone numbers do not appear when Caller ID is not sent.
Unset ID appears instead.
C Up to 10 incoming calls details are saved (see P.2-7).
2-6
Tip H Change Ringtone volumes, patterns, or Mobile Light
colours (see P.10-2 - 10-3).
Information
Information window opens for missed
calls or Message Recorder messages.
Select Call and press b to see details
(see P.2-11).
N
J
Information
1Call
1Voice Msg.
Select
Exit
Calling from Received Calls
1
Press A
N7X67k1KsgJ
Received Calls
2
1
3
2
3
Select a record and press b
Press b
Number is dialled.
mikio ueda
04/12/15 20:50
2
Basic Handset Operations
When Caller ID is sent, numbers appear.
Up to 10 received calls are saved in Received Calls (see P.2-11). Place calls to those
numbers.
03123XXXX1
16-11-2004
Options
04:50PM
Back
Received numbers appear with date and time.
Name appears if saved in Phone Book.
^ Press D or C to see more.
^ Press F to see Dialled Numbers, Missed
Calls or All Calls.
Tip H ^ Names in Secret mode entries appear only when handset is in Secret mode.
^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.
^ When there are 10 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. Alternatively, delete
records manually (see P.2-11).
2-7
Rejecting Incoming Calls
2
Basic Handset Operations
Rejecting a Call
Calls are rejected and saved in Missed Calls.
1
1
When a call arrives, open handset
2
While handset is ringing/vibrating,
press g or c for 1+ seconds
Voice Mail
Unanswered calls are forwarded to Voice Mail (see P.12-4).
2
Message Recorder
When Message Recorder is not active, use Quick Recorder (see P.2-21).
2-8
Engaged Call Operations
2
Adjust Earpiece Volume (5 levels). Earpiece Volume is Level:3 by default.
1
During a call, press L or M
2
Press L (up) or M (down) to
adjust volume level
Each press changes volume.
^ Volume level remains as set even after
handset power is turned off.
Loudspeaker
Basic Handset Operations
Earpiece Volume
Use Loudspeaker for handsfree conversations.
1
2
During a call, press e P A Select Loudspeaker On A Press b
B To cancel, press e P A Select Loudspeaker Off A Press b
Touch Tone
During a call, press Keypad (0 - 9, ; or :) to send individual Touch Tone.
2-9
Voice Memo
2
Basic Handset Operations
1
2
During a call, press e P
Select Record and press b
Recording starts.
Play
1
3
2
3
Press b to stop
^ Alternatively, end call to stop.
^ Recordings remain even after handset power
is turned off.
Play Voice Memos
Main Menu H Call Log A Message Recorder
Select Play A Press b
C To delete, press e P while message is playing A Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
Other Engaged Call Operations
During a call, press e P.
2-10
Phone Book List
Call another number saved in Phone Book
Messages
Create a new message or check received/sent/draft messages
Dial New Number
Call another number
Disable/Enable DTMF
Disable/enable sending Touch Tones during a call
Call History
2
Open the following records:
All received, missed or dialled calls
Dialled Numbers
All outgoing calls
Missed Calls
Unanswered calls
Received Calls
Answered calls
Make calls or send messages from call history.
1
1
2
Press f
2
All Calls appears.
C Press F to see others.
Delete
Select a record and press b
Record details appear.
C To initiate a Voice Call, press f.
C To initiate a TV Call, press e P A
Select TV Call A Press b
Basic Handset Operations
All Calls
Delete selected call history records
Select a record A Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
Call History Options
Open call history and press e P.
Save Number
Save the number to Phone Book
Create Message Compose a new message
2-11
Call Time
2
Basic Handset Operations
Check estimated call time of the most recent call (Last Call Time) and the total call time (All Calls Time).
Check call time for Dialled Calls or Received Calls.
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Timers
1
Clear Timers
2
Press g to exit
Reset Call Timers
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Timers
1
2-12
Select Received Calls or Dialled
Calls and press b
2
Select Clear Timers A Press b A Enter Handset Code A Press e K A
Press e i
Tip H ^ Last Call Time and All Calls Time remain even if handset power is turned off.
^ Ring time for incoming or outgoing calls is not counted. On hold time is counted.
Call Charge
2
Basic Handset Operations
Check estimated call charge of the most recent call (Last Call Cost) and total charges (All Calls Costs).
Set a limit of total charges.
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs
1
Select Last Call or All Calls and
press b
Clear Costs
2
Press g to exit
Reset call charge records
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs
Select Clear Costs A Press b A Enter PIN2 A Press b A Press e i
1
2
Max Cost
Set a limit of total charges
When the limit is exceeded, outgoing calls are blocked
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs
Select Max Cost A Press b A Select Set Limit A Press b A Enter PIN2 A Press b
A Enter the amount A Press b
C To check the set limit, select Max Cost A Press b A Select Read Limit A Press b
C To check the remaining amount, select Residual Credit A Press b
Cost Units
Set conversion rate to calculate call charges
KYEN 1
Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs
Select Cost Units A Press b A Select Set Units A Press b A Enter PIN2 A Press b
A Enter currency unit A Press b A Enter Cost per Unit A Press b twice
C To check Cost Unit, select Cost Units A Press b A Select Read Units A Press b
Tip H ^ Last Call Cost and All Calls Costs remain even if handset power is turned off.
^ Sum of charges appears for Conference Call (Optional Service).
2-13
Outside Japan (International Roaming)
2
Basic Handset Operations
Changing System Settings
802SH is compatible with 3G and GSM network systems.
3G
Use in Japan or in 3G service area abroad
GSM
Use only in GSM service area outside Japan
Auto
Mode changes automatically depending on the current location (network status)
Auto is set by default.
1
2
Main Menu
1
2
H Connectivity A Network
Settings
Select System Settings and press b
Select 3G or GSM and press b
^ Selected system is activated.
C To change system automatically, select
Auto A Press b
Select Network
Note H ^ For information on international
roaming (available countries, areas,
costs, functions or restrictions),
contact Vodafone Customer Centre,
General Information (see P.16-32).
^ A separate subscription is required for
international roaming.
Select a Network to connect
KAutomatic
Main Menu H Connectivity A Network Settings A Network Settings A Select Network
Select Manual A Press b A Select a Network A Press b
C To change Network automatically, select Automatic A Press b
C To change priorities of Network selection for Automatic, see P.9-15.
C Adding Network: see P.9-14
^ Use in default setting (Automatic). Set Manual to connect to a specific Network.
2-14
Calling from Outside Japan
2
7
1
3
4
5 2
6 3
Enter a phone number
^ Include the dialling code for landline phone
numbers.
C When calling landlines or handsets within
the country, proceed to Step 7.
C To enter numbers directly, press 0 for
1+ seconds (W appears) A Enter a country
code A Enter a phone number (omit the
first 0) A Proceed to Step 7
B When calling numbers in Italy (country
code: 39) or Russia (country code: 7),
include first 0.
4
Select a country and press b
Country code appears.
Calling Unlisted Countries
^ Select Enter Code, press b and enter a
country code.
Calling Vodafone Handsets
^ Always select 日本 (JPN) (country code: 81).
5
6
Press b
7
Press f
Press e P
Select Country Code and press b
Select Abroad and press b
^ W and country code are inserted before the
phone number. The first 0 is omitted unless
the country selected is Italy (39) or Russia (7).
(W indicates international calls.)
2
Basic Handset Operations
1
Note H Other party's voice may not be heard or handset microphone may be muted in some areas after
placing a call on hold and cancelling it (see P.2-3).
Tip H Adding Country Codes
To add country codes frequently used, see P.10-9 "Country Codes".
2-15
Manner Mode
2
Basic Handset Operations
Minding Mobile Manners
Please use your handset responsibly. Use these basic tips as a guide. Inappropriate handset use can be both dangerous and
bothersome. Please take care not to disturb others when using your handset. Adjust handset use according to your surroundings.
^ Turn it off in theatres, museums and other places where silence is the norm.
^ Refrain from using it in restaurants, hotel lobbies, lifts, etc.
^ Observe signs and instructions regarding handset use aboard trains, etc.
^ Refrain from use that interrupts the flow of pedestrian or car traffic.
Manner-Related Features
CManner Mode (see P.2-17)
Press a single key to automatically mute all Ringtones and
activate Vibration mode for incoming calls and mail.
CVibration Mode (see P.10-3)
Activate Vibration mode to use handset vibration to alert
you to incoming calls, mail, etc. in public places.
CVolume Settings (see P.10-2)
Decrease or mute Ringtone volume for incoming calls/mail
as well as tones for Web or V-applications when carrying
handset in public places.
2-16
COff Line Mode (see P.2-18)
Use Off Line Mode to suspend all handset transmissions.
When Off Line Mode is active, incoming and outgoing calls/
mail as well as Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.
CMessage Recorder (see P.2-20)
Use Message Recorder to handle incoming calls when it is
inappropriate or unsafe to answer.
Activating/Cancelling Manner Mode
1
Cancel
Press : for 1+ seconds
k and Manner mode selected. appear.
j (Message Recorder), f (Vibration),
g (Silent) and h (Increasing Volume) appear
as set in Manner settings.
1
In Standby, press : for 1+ seconds
k disappears and Manner mode is cancelled.
When Manner Mode is Active
1
C Keypad Tones, Power On/Off, error and barcode recognition tones are muted, but a beep for Switch Line
still sounds (see P.12-6).
C Shutter click sounds even in Manner mode.
C Manner mode active. Output sound? appears when Media Player is activated.
C Message Recorder, Ringtone, Vibration and Mobile Light operate according to Manner settings.
2
Basic Handset Operations
Activate
Tip H ^ When Message Recorder is recording messages, the other party's voice is heard through Earpiece.
^ To change Manner settings, see P.10-2.
To turn on/off Message Recorder in Manner mode, follow these steps.
Press b A Select Settings A Press b A Select Mode Settings A Press b A
Select Manner A Press e P A Select Personalise A Press b A Select
Message Recorder A Press b A Choose On or Off A Press b
2-17
Activating/Cancelling Off Line Mode
2
Basic Handset Operations
2-18
Use Off Line Mode to suspend all handset transmissions.
^ In Off Line Mode, incoming and outgoing calls as well as Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.
^ Off Line Mode is Off by default.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Network Settings A Network Settings
1
1
2
Select Off Line Mode and press b
2
Choose On or Off and press b
When On is set, e appears.
Tip H When Off Line Mode is set while a Network V-application (see P.15-2) is paused, confirmation
appears. Press e i to enter Off Line Mode. (Network connection is disabled until Off Line
Mode is cancelled.)
Multi Stereo Headphones
Use Call Button on Multi Stereo Headphones to call the
number saved in Speed Dial l (see P.4-12).
1
2
3
Plug Headphones into handset
Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds
^ The number is dialled.
Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds
^ Call ends. Alternatively, press g to disconnect call.
Answering Calls
1
2
Plug Headphones into handset
Ringer sounds from Headphones and handset speaker.
Press Call Button for 1+ seconds
^ Perform Step 3 on the left to end the call.
2
Basic Handset Operations
Initiating Calls
Note H If Speed Dial l is a Secret mode entry, activate Secret
mode to call it (see P.10-12).
Tip H ^ Cancel Phone Lock and Phone Book Lock to place
calls (see P.10-11).
^ Do not wrap cord around handset or Internal Antenna.
Electronic noise from cord may cause malfunction or
interference.
^ Plug in Headphones firmly. If not, sounds may not be heard.
2-19
Message Recorder
2
Basic Handset Operations
Record caller messages on handset. Message Recorder cannot be used when handset is off, out-of-range or in Off Line
Mode. Use Voice Mail to record caller messages when Message Recorder is not available (see P.12-4).
Record up to 90 seconds or 20 messages between Message Recorder and Voice Memo (see P.2-10).
Activate/Deactivate
Playing Messages
Main Menu H Call Log A Message Recorder
Main Menu H Call Log A Message Recorder
1
Select Recorder Settings and
press b
2
Select On/Off Setting and press b
1
2
3
3
2-20
C To sample outgoing message, select
Guidance Message A Press b
C To activate or mute Earpiece for outgoing
message/caller message recordings, select
Volume A Press b A Select
Link to Profile or Silent A Press b
Choose On and press b
^ Press g to return to Standby (j appears).
(l appears in green when messages are
recorded.)
C To cancel, choose Off A Press b
1
Select Play and press b
Number of recordings appears and playback
starts from the most recent message. After all
messages have played, playback ends
automatically.
C Press d W to stop playback.
C To skip a message, press A during
playback.
C To play the previous message, press B
during playback.
C To delete a message, press
e P during playback A Select
Delete A Press b A Press e i
Tip H Incoming Calls
Message playback stops for incoming calls.
Press f to answer the call.
Answer Time
Press b A Select Call Log A Press b A Select
Message Recorder A Press b A Select Recorder
Settings A Press b A Select Answer Time A
Press b A Enter time (00 - 59) A Press b
B To start recording immediately after a call arrives, enter
00 A Press b
C When Message Recorder and Voice Mail or Call Forwarding
are both active, response priority changes depending on ring
time settings.
Example: Ring time for Message Recorder: 9 seconds
Ring time for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding: 10 seconds
In this example, Message Recorder responds first. (Priority
may change depending on signal conditions.)
^ If Message Recorder is full or handset is in Off Line Mode
or out-of-range, incoming calls are handled by Voice Mail
or Call Forwarding.
Message Recorder Disabled
When less than 12 seconds remain or 20 messages are
recorded, Message Recorder is disabled. Delete messages
(see P.2-20) to activate Message Recorder.
When Message Recorder is Active
C For incoming calls, outgoing message plays and recording starts.
^ Recording continues even if handset is closed.
^ To answer calls, press f during recording (no message
will be recorded).
^ When recording ends, l appears.
C If recording capacity became full after the recording,
Message Recorder is deactivated and l (black) appears.
2
Basic Handset Operations
C Adjust ring time between 0 and 59 seconds (Message
Recorder waits to answer calls). Answer Time is 09 seconds
by default.
Quick Recorder
Use Quick Recorder to record caller messages on handset
when Message Recorder is inactive. When a call arrives, follow
the steps below. Outgoing message plays and caller's message
is recorded.
Press b A Select Recording A Press b
2-21
Text Entry
3-1
Characters
3
Upper & Lower Case
Text Entry
Use Kana and Pager (see P.3-9) to enter alphanumerics,
Symbols, hiragana, kanji, katakana and Pictographs.
Operations are described for Kana Mode except in "Pager
Code" on P.3-9.
In double- or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k to
toggle between upper case and lower case. For Pager Mode (see
P.3-9), in double- or single-byte character mode, press k to
toggle between upper and lower case.
N
Entry Modes
Press j to toggle between character types as follows:
I%J%@%A%D%E%G%I…
Alternatively, press F to toggle between character types.
N
J
Message
A D E G I J @
Current Entry
Mode
Options
3-2
N
J
Back
J
Message
A D E F IJ @
Message
A D E G IJ @
k
Available Modes
Options
A
Kanji (hiragana)
D
Double-byte katakana
E
Single-byte katakana
F
Double-byte alphanumerics
(upper/lower case)
G
Double-byte alphanumerics
(lower/upper case)
H
Single-byte alphanumerics
(upper/lower case)
I
Single-byte alphanumerics
(lower/upper case)
J
Single-byte number
@
Pictograph Code
B
Character Code
Back
Double-byte Alphanumerics
(Lower Case)
Options
Back
Double-byte Alphanumerics
(Upper Case)
Pictograph & Character Codes
Press e to toggle as follows:
Pictograph Code 1 % Pictograph Code 2 %
Pictograph Code 3 % Pictograph Code 4 %
Pictograph Code 5 % Pictograph Code 6 %
Character Code % Pictograph Code 1
^ Current Pictograph Code page number appears at the
bottom.
Tip H ^ Handset Character Codes correspond to 6,355 kanji.
^ Some characters are not available for mail addresses, etc.
Key Assignments
Key
Kanji (Hiragana)
[Double-byte]
Numbers
[Single-byte]
Pictograph Code 1 - 6
& Character Codes
1
あいうえお
ぁぃぅぇぉ
アイウエオ
ァィゥェォ
@./_―1
X (space)
1
1
2
かきくけこ
3
さしすせそ
カキクケコ
ABCabc2
2
2
サシスセソ
DEFdef3
3
4
3
たちつてとっ
タチツテトッ
GHIghi4
4
4
5
なにぬねの
ナニヌネノ
JKLjkl5
5
5
6
はひふへほ
ハヒフヘホ
MNOmno6
6
6
7
まみむめも
マミムメモ
PQRSpqrs7
7
7
8
やゆよゃゅょ
ヤユヨャュョ
TUVtuv8
8
8
9
らりるれろ
ラリルレロ
WXYZwxyz9
9
9
0
わをんー、。
X (Line Break)
ワヲンー、。
X (Line Break)
,.0X
.0 (Line Break)
0 +1
0
;
゛゜
゛゜-2
Single-byte Mail/
Web Extensions3
U P (Pause) ? -4
-----------------
#
-----------------
:
C
Katakana
Alphanumerics
[Double & Single-byte] [Double & Single-byte]
Log, Double-byte Symbol5/Pictograph Code
Conversion (Up)
3
Text Entry
Multiple characters are assigned to each key. Press a key to toggle between character options for that key.
Example: In katakana entry, press 1 three times for ウ.
When entering characters, press f to toggle between character options in reverse. (Not available for entering single-byte
number, Pictographs and Character Codes.)
Example: Enter い, then press f to return to あ.
Cursor Up
1+ is for phone number entry. Press for 1+ seconds.
2- is available only in single-byte katakana entry.
3Extensions are listed for easy entry.
4P (Pause), ? and - are for phone number entry.
5Single-byte for single-byte katakana/alphanumeric entry.
3-3
3
Key
Kanji (Hiragana)
[Double-byte]
D
Conversion (Down)
Katakana
Alphanumerics
[Double & Single-byte] [Double & Single-byte]
B
Cursor Down X (Line Break)
Text Entry
A
Cursor Right
Change Character Type
i
Press
Pictograph Code 1 - 6
& Character Codes
Cursor Left
j
k
Numbers
[Single-byte]
Toggle case (for some characters)
Delete One Character/
Cancel Conversion
Toggle case + Toggle
mode (upper & lower/
lower case)
Delete One Character
i
Long
Press
Delete before or after cursor
f
Recover up to 64 deleted characters6
b
OK
-----------------
-----------------
Delete Code/
One Character
e
Phonetic Conversion
-----------------
Switch Pictograph Code
1 - 6/Character Codes
d
Hiragana to Katakana/
Alphanumerics
Conversion
-----------------
Pictograph Code 1 - 6/
Log List
6Press f once for each character to recover immediately after deleting. [Not available after deleting text with i (Long Press).]
3-4
Entering Characters
4
Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana
Press 2 twice
To enter hiragana without converting to
kanji, skip to Step 6.
1
Press 3 three times
Word suggestions change as hiragana are
entered.
N
A
5
す
98すぐに
97すぐ
96する
95スケジュール
94すべて
Kanji
kana
2
Press A
^ When the next character is on the same
key, press A first.
N
Press 3 three times and
press ;
C To see other suggestions, press e W
or d J.
C To exit the list, press i.
C To change segment, see P.3-6.
J
Message
0(30KB)
A
6
す
98すぐに
97すぐ
96する
95スケジュール
94すべて
Kanji
kana
3
Press D (convert) and use E to
select a word
N
J
Message
0(30KB)
A
すず
61涼しい
60鈴
59鈴木
58珠洲
57錫
Kanji
Press b
A
すずき
07鈴木
06スズキ
05鱸
04鈴木京香
03鈴木田
Kanji
J
Message
0(30KB)
J
Message
0(30KB)
3
kana
N
Text Entry
Example: To enter 鈴木 in kanji (hiragana) entry mode
N
J
Message
0(30KB)
A
鈴木
07鈴木
06スズキ
05鱸
04鈴木京香
03鈴木田
Back
Next
N
J
Message
2(29KB)
A
鈴木
21さん
20くん
19ちゃん
18君
17様
Options
Back
Tip H Switch to double-byte or single-byte katakana mode to
enter katakana. Alternatively, enter hiragana and then
select katakana from the word suggestion list.
kana
3-5
Learning Function
The most recently used word appears first in the list.
3
Predictive & Previous Usage
Text Entry
Use Predictive and Previous Usage to convert hiragana to
kanji more quickly.
Predictive
Word suggestions change as up to 5
hiragana are entered
Previous
Usage
Suggests words/characters likely to follow
entry based on previous entries
^ Both functions are active by default (see P.3-13).
CSegmenting Phrases
If the word is not in the list, press i after Step 5 on P.3-5 to
exit. Then use F to segment hiragana to convert separately.
Example: Segment みち into み and ち.
B
みち
DEb
三ち
三智
CSelecting Multiple Converted Words
Press j.
Example: To enter 西山大輔
D
にしやまだいすけ
User Dictionary
Save frequently used words/phrases to select from the word
suggestion list (see P.10-8).
DEb
みち
j
西山大輔
西山大輔
Small Kana (っ , ッ , etc.)
Enter small hiragana あ, い, う, え, お, つ, や, ゆ and よ as
well as small katakana.
1
Enter a character and press k つ
k
っ
3-6
Adding ゛ or ゜
1
Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons
Enter a character and press ;
Symbols & Pictographs
は
;
1
ば
Recently used Symbols/Pictographs appear.
^ -- appears by default or when Log List is deleted (see P.3-8).
;
ぱ
2
Tip H In Single-byte Katakana Entry:
^ Press the key once to add ゛ and twice for ゜.
Symbols are single-byte.
^ Press i to remove ゛ or ゜.
Entering Alphanumerics
Enter alphanumerics in double-byte alphanumerics (upper &
lower case) or single-byte alphanumerics (upper & lower case)
mode. Alternatively, enter numbers in single-byte number mode.
3
3
Press : to open Log List
(Log List is available in some entry modes)
3
Use G to select one and press b
^ Repeat Step 2 to enter more.
C To see more lists, press e or :.
The list toggles as follows: Log List %
Symbol List (1 - 3) % Pictograph List (1 - 6)
B Press D to scroll down.
Press d W to end
N
Text Entry
^ In kanji (hiragana)/double-byte katakana
entry, press the key once to add ゛ to か
(Ka) row, さ (Sa) row and た (Ta) row
characters, and press twice to remove.
For は (Ha) row characters, press once
to add ゛, twice to add ゜ and three
times to remove.
J
Message
1(29KB)
A
@
Symbol 2
Back
Tip H ^ Single-byte Symbols do not appear in Log List.
^ Symbols are double or single-byte according to the
character type. (Pictographs are all double-byte.)
^ Alternatively, enter きごう and press D (convert).
Some Symbols can be selected.
a
ad
^ When the next character is on the same key (example:
entering a then b), press A first to move cursor.
^ In double-byte or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k
to toggle between upper and lower case.
3-7
Emoticons
Deleting Log List
3
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Input/Conversion A Press b A Select Clear
Symbols A Press b A Press e i
Text Entry
^ Press i twice to return to the text entry window.
^ Log List cannot be deleted in Pictograph Code mode.
1
2
3
Pictograph Code Mode
C To enter from Pictograph Codes, enter two digits (see P.16-15)
in Pictograph Code mode.
^ To edit a code mid-entry, press i to clear first digit then
enter correct digits.
C To enter from Pictograph List, press d a A Select a
Pictograph A Press b
^ To toggle through list 1 - 6 and Log List, press e.
In a text entry window, press e P
Select Emoticons and press b
Select an emoticon and press b
^ Alternatively, enter a descriptive word such as わーい orうーん
and press D (convert). Corresponding emoticons can be
selected.
^ Enter two digits (01 - 50) to jump to the emoticon assigned to
the number.
Tip H ^ Emoticons cannot be entered in Pictograph Code (1 - 6).
^ For other emoticons, enter かお and press D (convert).
Space
1
In a text entry window, press A
Ueda
^ Alternatively in alphanumeric entries,
press 1 seven times to enter a
space.
Ueda
A
Line Break
Insert line breaks in mail message text, Text Templates, etc.
1
3-8
Press D at the end of text
Contact me at
^ To insert line breaks in text, press 0
until X appears, then press b. Line
break is inserted at the cursor position.
Keystroke count varies by character
entry mode (see P.3-3).
Contact me atX
D
Mail & Web Extensions
In alphanumeric entry, press ;
Select an extension and press b
^ Mail addresses and URLs are single-byte.
N
J
Quick Address List
.co.jp
.ne.jp
.ac.jp
.or.jp
http://
www.
.com
1
2
3
4
In a text entry window, press e P
5
Enter two digits (see P.3-10)
Select Input/Conversion and press b
3
Select Input Method and press b
Text Entry
1
2
Pager Code
Select Pager Code and press b
Pager Code entry window opens.
C To switch to Kana Mode, select Kana A Press b
▼
Select
Back
Character Code
1
In Character Code entry mode, enter four digits
(see P.16-9)
^ Pager Mode is active until switched to Kana Mode.
Character Entry Modes
C For text entry in Pager Mode, press j to toggle between
character modes as follows:
Single-byte lower case (N) % Pictograph Code 1 - 6 (@)/
Character Code (B) % Double-byte lower case (L)
^ Press e to toggle between Pictograph Code 1 - 6 and
Character Code mode.
C Press k to toggle between upper and lower case.
Tip H ^ Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion is
disabled in Pager Mode.
^ To enter ゛ or ゜, see Pager Code List on P.3-10.
3-9
2
い
き
し
ち
に
ひ
み
(
り
を
Second digit (Press secondly)
3
4
5
6
7
8
う え お A B C
く け こ F G H
す せ そ K L M
つ て と P Q R
ぬ ね の U V W
ふ へ ほ Z ? !
む め も ¥ &
ゆ
)
よ U # space
る れ ろ 1
2
3
ん ゛ ゜ 6
7
8
9
D
I
N
S
X
−
Z
Y
4
9
0
E
J
O
T
Y
/
*1
*2
5
0
First digit (Press first)
Double-byte lower case
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
ぁ
ゃ
2
ぃ
First digit (Press first)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
あ
か
さ
た
な
は
ま
や
ら
わ
Second digit (Press secondly)
3
4
5
6
7
8
ぅ ぇ ぉ a b c
f g h
k l m
っ
p q r
u v w
z
ゅ
ょ
、
9
d
i
n
s
x
0
e
j
o
t
y
*1
*2
。
*1Press 70 to insert line breaks (in mail message text, Text Templates, etc.).
*2Press 80 to toggle between upper and lower case.
^ Y and Z are double-byte.
3-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
ア
カ
サ
タ
ナ
ハ
マ
ヤ
ラ
ワ
2
イ
キ
シ
チ
ニ
ヒ
ミ
(
リ
ヲ
Second digit (Press secondly)
3
4
5
6
7
8
ウ
エ
オ
A
B
C
ク
ケ
コ
F
G
H
ス
セ
ソ
K
L
M
ツ
テ
ト
P
Q
R
ヌ
ネ
ノ
U
V
W
フ
ヘ
ホ
Z
?
!
ム
メ
モ
¥
&
U
ユ
)
ヨ
# space
ル
レ
ロ
1
2
3
ン
゛
゜
6
7
8
9
D
I
N
S
X
Z
Y
4
9
0
E
J
O
T
Y
/
*1
*2
5
0
Single-byte lower case
First digit (Press first)
Text Entry
First digit (Press first)
3
CPager Code List
^ Blanks indicate no entry.
^ Upper and lower case are available for characters with grey background. Press k to switch.
Double-byte upper case
Single-byte upper case
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
ァ
ャ
2
ィ
Second digit (Press secondly)
3
4
5
6
7
8
ゥ
ェ
ォ
a
b
c
f
g
h
k
l
m
ッ
p
q
r
u
v
w
z
ュ
ョ
,
.
9
d
i
n
s
x
0
e
j
o
t
y
*1
*2
Conversion Methods (Japanese Only)
Enter the first hiragana to access previously selected words.
Example: To enter 鈴木
Phonetic Conversion
Enter reading in hiragana
3
Select a kanji and press b to enter
Press e _ to see
suggestions
DE
b
す
鈴木
鈴木
^ One-Hiragana Conversion and User Dictionary (see P.10-8) share
N
J
[かい]
001 介会解回塊
壊廻快怪悔
011 恢懐戒拐改
魁晦械海灰
021 界皆絵芥蟹
開階貝凱蓋
031 街鎧骸會偕
Select
memory. Selected words may not be saved if User Dictionary is full.
3
Text Entry
Enter alternate readings to search for kanji.
1
2
One-Hiragana Conversion
^ Up to 20 word selections are saved per hiragana.
When memory is full, the oldest entry is deleted to make room
for a new entry, however, User Dictionary remains unchanged.
Back
3-11
Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion
Enter katakana and alphanumerics in kanji (hiragana) entry mode.
3
Text Entry
1
2
Enter hiragana and press d S
^ To enter AM, press 26, and then press d S.
Use E to select a word and press b to enter
^ Hiragana to Roman Letter Conversion (hiragana with ゛ or ゜
is converted to the same characters/Symbols):
あ
@
い
.
う
/
え
_
お
Space
か
A
き
B
く
C
け
Space
こ
Space
さ
D
し
E
す
F
せ
Space
そ
Space
た
G
ち
H
つ
I
て
Space
と
Space
な
J
に
K
ぬ
L
ね
Space
の
Space
は
M
ひ
N
ふ
O
へ
Space
ほ
Space
ま
P
み
Q
む
R
め
S
も
Space
や
T
ゆ
U
よ
V
-----
-----
-----
-----
ら
W
り
X
る
Y
れ
Z
ろ
Space
わ
,
を
.
ん
Space
ー (Long Sound)、。
Line Break
Space
^ Hiragana to Number Conversion (hiragana with ゛ or ゜ is
converted to the same numbers):
B あ (A) row...1
B か (Ka) row...2 B さ (Sa) row...3
B た (Ta) row...4 B な (Na) row...5 B は (Ha) row...6
B ま (Ma) row...7 B や (Ya) row...8 B ら (Ra) row...9
B わをんー (Long Sound)、。Line Break...0
3-12
Quick Conversion (for Hiragana)
Quick Conversion helps reduce keystrokes needed to enter
frequently used words.
A list of word suggestions appears based on the key pressed.
Example: To enter 微妙
Normal
Conversion
66; (び) 77 (み)
888888 (ょ )
111 (う) D (convert)
Quick
Conversion
(for Hiragana)
6; (ば) 7 (ま) 8 (や) 1 (あ)
C (convert)
1
Enter hiragana and press C
2
Use E to select a word and press b
Cursor turns green.
^ While cursor is green, use F to segment entered hiragana
and then convert one segment at a time.
C To cancel Quick Conversion, press i A Press D for
normal conversion
Note H Use Quick Conversion in kanji (hiragana) mode only.
Tip H The most recently used word (mostly nouns) appears first.
One Hiragana Predictive Entry
Conversion Settings
朝一番
朝帰り
行ってきます
いってらっしゃい
あちぃ∼
後でね
いただきま∼す♪
移動中
…
…
17:00 - 22:59
遊ぼう
明日
急いで行くよ
今どこ?
23:00 - 4:59
アウチ!!
ありがとう
いぇーい!!!
行こうね
…
11:00 - 16:59
…
5:00 - 10:59
^ Words in the list are preset by time blocks.
^ If Clock is not set, only words for 11:00 - 16:59 are available.
Disable Predictive/
Previous Usage
Disable Predictive or Previous Usage
(see P.3-6)
KOn
In a text entry window, press e P A Select Input/
Conversion A Press b A Select Predictive or
Previous Usage A Press b A Choose Off A Press b
Clear
Conversion Log
3
Text Entry
Enter hiragana and initiate Quick Conversion. Words
starting with a hiragana in the same row (あ, い, う, え, お
for あ) appear. Word suggestions vary by time of day.
Example: When あ is entered
Delete words selected in kanji conversion,
Predictive, etc.
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Input/Conversion A Press b A Select Reset
Learning A Press b A Press e i
^ Words saved in User Dictionary remain.
One Hiragana Word Call
Enter the first hiragana of entries you used Quick Conversion
for. The most recently selected word appears first.
Example: You entered あたあさわ and selected お父さん
last time.
C
あ
お父さん
3-13
Editing Characters
3
3
Deleting
Text Entry
1
Use G to select a character and
press i
^ The highlighted character is deleted.
^ Place cursor at the end of text and press
i for 1+ seconds to delete all text.
When cursor is located amidst a block of
text, characters on and after cursor are
deleted.
Kinnoshita
Replacing
1
2
Press i to delete a character
i
Mikko
Mikiko
When Options appears, copy or cut and paste text into the
same window or another.
3-14
Start point is set. (End appears.)
C To change the start point, press i.
Mr. Kimura is organising
the reunion. Call at ho
me after 10 PM.
Move cursor to the end of text
and press b
5
Open text paste target window
6
Press e P, select Paste
and press b
J
Cut
63(29KB)
End
I
Back
Ex am ple
N
J
Note:
75/256
I
Manager of alumni. E
mployee of A trading
company. Call at ho
me after 10 PM.
Mikako
Enter another character
Copy/Cut & Paste
1
2
N
4
i
Kinoshita
Move cursor to the first
character of text and press b
In a text entry window, press e P
Select Copy or Cut (to move) and press b
Options
Back
Deleting Text After Cursor
1
2
3
4
Move cursor to target location
Press e P
Select Delete Posterior and press b
Using Phone Book
Insert Phone Book entry items into text entry windows.
Select from phone numbers, mail addresses, postal
addresses or Note.
1
2
3
4
In a text entry window, press e P
5
Use E to select an item and
press b
Select a file and press b
Text is inserted.
3
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Text Templates A Press b A Select Save Text
Memo A Press b A Move cursor to the first
character of text A Press b A Move cursor to the
end of text A Press b
Select Phone Book and press b
Item is inserted following the Phone Book
entry name.
Select Call Text Memo and press b
Saving from Message or Phone Book
Select Advanced and press b
^ Open My Details to insert Owner Profile
contents.
Select Text Templates and press b
Save text to Text Templates.
Move cursor to target location beforehand.
Open a Phone Book entry
In a text entry window, press e P
Text Entry
1
2
3
Using Text Templates
^ Save up to 256 characters.
N
J
mikio
ueda
03123XXXX3
090392XXXX1
bbb@xxx.yyy
Japan
his favorite
Select
Back
3-15
Phone Book
4-1
Saving to Phone Book
Phone Book Entry Items
4
Phone Book
Save up to 500 entries to handset Phone Book. On USIM Card, the number of entries you can save in Phone Book depends
on the card specification. Depending on the USIM Card in use, mail addresses may not be supported or character entry
limits for mail address may be lower. Also, the number of phone numbers or mail addresses per entry and entry character
limits may be lower.
Item
Last Name:
First Name:
4-2
Description
Enter up to 16 characters. (Select Name: when saving to USIM Card.)
Save to
Handset
USIM Card
Available
Available
Reading:
Enter up to 32 characters
Available
Available
Add Telephone:
Enter up to three numbers to handset and two numbers to USIM Card (32 digits each)
Available
Available
Add Email Address:
Enter up to three addresses to handset (128 single-byte characters each), and one
address to USIM Card (80 single-byte characters)
Available
Available
Group:
Sort entries into 16 Groups (handset) and 11 Groups (USIM Card). Group names
can be changed. Set Ringtone by Group (handset only).
Available
Available
Postcode:
Enter up to 20 characters
Available
N/A
Country Name:
Enter up to 32 characters
Available
N/A
State Name:
Enter up to 64 characters
Available
N/A
City Name:
Enter up to 64 characters
Available
N/A
Street Name:
Enter up to 64 characters
Available
N/A
Note:
Add personal details. Enter up to 256 characters.
Available
N/A
Birthday:
Enter birth date
Available
N/A
Picture:
Set an image to appear for incoming calls/mail
Available
N/A
Assign Tone/Video:
Set Ringtone or Ringvideo by caller
Available
N/A
Secret:
Restrict access to Phone Book entries by saving them as Secret
Available
N/A
Note H Back-up Important Information
Keep a separate copy of important information. When
battery is exhausted or removed for long periods, Phone
Book entries may be lost. Handset damage may also
affect information recovery. Vodafone is not liable for any
damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration.
New Phone Book Entries
Enter a name, reading, phone number and mail address.
^ Select storage media (handset or USIM Card) for new entries.
^ Storage media is Handset by default.
Storage Media
Main Menu H Phone Book A Phone Book List
1
2
3
4
5
^ For Choice, select Storage media for each new entry.
N
Phone Book Details opens.
Last Name:
Select Last Name: and press b
First Name:
Enter last name and press b
Select First Name: and press b
Enter first name and press b
J
New Entry
4
Reading:
Add Telephone:
▼
Options
Back
Phone Book
Details
Phone Number
Main Menu
Set default storage media for new entries.
Press b A Select Phone Book A Press b A
Select Advanced A Press b A Select Save New
Entry A Press b A Select Handset, SIM or Choice
A Press b
Select Add New Entry and press b
Phone Book
Tip H Use Phone Book Lock to protect entries from accidental
alteration and to restrict access to Phone Book
information (see P.10-11).
Name
1
2
3
4
H Phone Book A Phone Book List A Add New
Entry
Select Add Telephone: and press b
Enter a phone number
^ Include the dialling code for landline phone numbers.
Press b
Select an icon and press b
C To save additional phone numbers, select Add Telephone:
A Press b A Repeat Steps 2 - 4
4-3
Mail Address
Main Menu
4
Phone Book
1
2
3
4
Additional Settings
H Phone Book A Phone Book List A Add New
Entry
Select Add Email Address: and press b
Enter a mail address
Press b
Select an icon and press b
C To save additional mail addresses, select Add Email Address:
A Press b A Repeat Steps 2 - 4
Call Arrives while Creating Entry
Contents are temporarily saved for later entry.
Personal Ringtone/Ringvideo
Select incoming Ringtones or Ringvideos for numbers or
mail addresses saved in Phone Book.
Select from preset patterns or use the following sound or
video files in Data Folder.
B Files in Sounds & Ringtones folder (file name: 51 characters or less)
B Files in Videos folder (file name: 51 characters or less)
Main Menu
1
2
Select Assign Tone/Video: and press b
3
Ringtone
1 Select Assign Tone and press b
Saving
1
Press d q
CWarning Message
On Display
Mandatory field is
empty.
Cause
Required item is
not entered
Operation
Enter first/last name,
phone number, or mail
address and retry
Tip H Via Bluetooth or infrared, exchange Phone Book entries
with other Vodafone handsets, PCs and other devices
(see P.9-2).
H Phone Book A Phone Book List A Add New
Entry
For Voice Calls
1 Select For Voice Call and press b
For TV Calls
1 Select For TV Call and press b
For Mail Messages
1 Select For New Message and press b
C To cancel, select Remove Tone/Video A Press b A
Press e i
2 Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds and
press b
Ringvideo
1 Select Assign Video and press b
C To cancel, select Remove Tone/Video A Press b A
Press e i
4-4
4
Select sound or video and press b
Preset Ringtones play when selected. Press e U to set.
^ Files on SD Memory Card cannot be selected.
Reading
Select Reading: A Press b A Enter reading
A Press b
Group
Select Group: A Press b A Select group A
Press b
Postcode
Select Postcode: A Press b A Enter
postcode A Press b
Country Name
Select Country Name: A Press b A Enter
name A Press b
State Name
Select State Name: A Press b A Enter name
A Press b
City Name
Select City Name: A Press b A Enter name
A Press b
Select Picture: and press b
Street Name
Select Street Name: A Press b A Enter
name A Press b
Select Assign Picture and press b
Note
Select Note: A Press b A Enter text A Press b
C To cancel, select Remove Picture A Press b A Press
ei
Birthday
Select Birthday: A Press b A Enter date A
Press b
Select an image and press b
Secret
Select Secret: A Press b A Choose On or Off
A Press b
Personal Picture
Set saved photos to appear for incoming calls/mail.
Select from image files smaller than 40 KB.
Main Menu
1
2
3
H Phone Book A Phone Book List A Add New
Entry
^ Files on SD Memory Card and some other files cannot be
selected.
4
Phone Book
Note H ^ When source file in Data Folder is deleted, renamed or
moved to SD Memory Card, Ibiza Party is set for Voice/
TV Calls, and Sound Effect 1 is set for mail messages.
B This also applies if source file is copyrighted and the
license expires.
^ To apply the setting to Secret mode entries, activate
Secret mode first.
COther Phone Book Entry Items
To enter the following, open Phone Book Details (see P.4-3).
For details, refer to "Phone Book Entry Items" on P.4-2.
Note H Setting is cancelled when source file in Data Folder is
deleted, renamed or moved to SD Memory Card.
4-5
Saving from Dialled Numbers/Received Calls
4
Phone Book
1
Press F to open Dialled Numbers or Received
Calls
2
3
4
Select a phone number with E and press e P
Select Save Number and press b
New Entry
1 Select As New Entry and press b
Main Menu H Phone Book A Advanced
1
Select Memory Status and press b
Numbers of entries on handset and USIM
Card appear.
C Press g to exit.
N7X67k1KsgJ
Memory Status
Handset
25/500 Entries
SIM
25/ 50 Entries
Phone number is entered automatically. Complete other
fields and save the Phone Book entry.
Add to Existing Entry
1 Select a Phone Book entry and press b
Phone number is entered automatically. Complete other
fields and save the Phone Book entry.
Note H Received calls without Caller ID cannot be saved to
Phone Book.
4-6
Phone Book Memory Status
Back
Group Settings
Rename Groups and customise Ringtone settings by Group.
Changing Group Name
Main Menu H Phone Book A Manage Group
Select a Group and press b
Enter a name
^ Enter up to 16 characters.
Press b
Press e i
C Repeat Steps 1 - 4 for other Groups.
Set Ringtone or Ringvideo (incoming calls/mail) by Group.
^ Personal Ringtone/Ringvideo settings (see P.4-4 - 4-5) take
priority over.
^ Group Ringtone/Ringvideo setting is not available for Phone
Book entries on USIM Card.
Main Menu H Phone Book A Manage Group
1
2
3
Select a Group and press e P
4
Ringtone
1 Select Assign Tone and press b
Select Assign Ringtone and press b
4
Phone Book
1
2
3
4
Group Ringtone/Ringvideo
Select For Voice Call, For TV Call or For New
Message and press b
C To cancel, select Remove Tone/Video A Press b A
Press e i
2 Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds and
press b
Ringvideo
1 Select Assign Video and press b
C To cancel, select Remove Tone/Video A Press b A
Press e i
Ring Time for Mail
1 Select Duration and press b
2 Enter time (01 - 15 seconds) and press b
5
Select sound or video and press b
Preset Ringtones play when selected. Press e U to set.
^ Files on SD Memory Card cannot be selected.
4-7
Selecting Phone Book Location
Customise Group settings for handset or USIM Card Phone
Book entries separately. To select a Phone Book, follow these
steps.
4
Phone Book
Press b A Select Phone Book A Press b A
Select Advanced A Press b A Select Ph.Book
Location A Press b A Select Handset or SIM A
Press b
Using Phone Book
Dialling from Phone Book
Display
1
2
N
J
mikio
ueda
N
J
mikio
ueda
▲
3
4
5
6
03123XXXX3
090392XXXX1
bbb@xxx.yyy
private
Japan
his favourite ...
his favourite ...
1980/12/24
04-12-15_12-0...
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
7
8
9
A
▼
Options
Back
Options
Back
1 Name
2 Image set for Picture
3 Phone Number
4 Mail Address
5 Group Name
6 Postal Address
Postcode, country name, state name, city name and street
name are separated by commas and line breaks.
7 Note
8 Birthday
9 Tone/video set for incoming calls/mail
A Secret On
Tip H To dial numbers saved in Secret mode entries, activate
Secret mode first (see P.10-12).
4-8
Phone Book Search
Search method is By Reading Order by default.
Shows entries that start with specified Reading
By Group
Opens entries in the specified Group
By Katakana
Shows entries with Readings that start with
katakana in the specified row
Main Menu H Phone Book A Advanced A View Phone Book
By Reading
Order
Search by reading to dial
C Set search method to By Reading Order (see left).
Press D A Enter reading A Select a name A Press b
A Press f
C Entry Modes: see P.3-2
By Group
Search by Group to dial
C Set search method to By Group (see left).
1
Select By Reading Order, By Group or By
Katakana and press b
Phone Book Search on USIM Card
Open Phone Book on USIM Card as follows:
Press b A Select Phone Book A Press b A
Select Advanced A Press b A Select Ph.Book
Location A Press b A Select SIM A Press b
4
Phone Book
By Reading
Order
Dialling from Phone Book Search
Press D A Select a Group A Press b A Select a
name A Press b A Press f
By Katakana
Search by katakana row including the first
character of Reading to dial
C Set search method to By Katakana (see left).
Press D A Specify a row A Select a name A Press b
A Press f
C Press F to switch katakana rows.
^ Start entry search.
4-9
Speed Dial
Editing Phone Book
Use Speed Dial List (see P.4-12) to call phone numbers quickly.
1
4
Phone Book
4-10
Press a key (2 - 9) for 1+ seconds
Name and phone number appear and the number is dialled.
^ Alternatively, select a name from Speed Dial List (see P.4-12)
and press f.
Note H To dial numbers saved in Secret mode entries, activate
Secret mode first (see P.10-12).
Correction/Change
Main Menu H Phone Book A Phone Book List
1
2
3
Open a Phone Book entry and press e P
4
Press b when finished
5
Press d q
Select Edit/Add Details and press b
Select an item and press b
Edit contents.
^ Procedure is the same as when saving to Phone Book.
C To edit other items, repeat Steps 3 - 4.
C To cancel, press g A Press e i
The entry is overwritten.
Handset to USIM Card
1 Press e i three times
Copying Phone Book Entries
Exchange entries between handset and USIM Card.
Some Phone Book entry items cannot be saved to USIM
Card (see P.4-2). Those items are deleted when Phone
Book entries are copied from handset.
H Phone Book A Phone Book List A Select a name
Main Menu
A Options (e) A Advanced
1
Handset to USIM Card
1 Select Copy to SIM and press b
Some Phone Book entry items cannot be copied to USIM
Card. (Some data may be lost. OK? appears.)
2 Press e i
USIM Card to Handset
1 Select Copy to Handset and press b
All Entries
Copy all Phone Book entries at once. If handset or USIM
Card memory is low, entries cannot be copied all at once.
Main Menu H Phone Book A Advanced A Copy All Entries
1
Select SIM to Handset or Handset to SIM and
press b
2
USIM Card to Handset
1 Press e i twice
One Entry
Main Menu H Phone Book A Phone Book List
1
2
3
Open a Phone Book entry and press e P
Select Delete and press b
4
Phone Book
One Entry
Copy Phone Book entries one by one.
Deleting Phone Book Entries
Press e i
Note H The source files remain in Data Folder, even if you delete
entries containing sound files or images set for incoming
calls/mail or Picture.
All Entries
Delete all Phone Book entries on handset or USIM Card.
Main Menu H Phone Book A Advanced A Del. All Entries
1
2
3
4
Select Handset Entries or SIM Entries and press b
Press e i twice
Enter Handset Code
Press b
4-11
Speed Dial List
Deleting Phone Numbers
One by One
Saving Phone Numbers
4
Save phone numbers to Speed Dial List for easy dialling
(see P.4-10).
Phone Book
Main Menu H Phone Book
1
2
3
4
Select Speed Dial List and press b
Speed Dial List opens.
1
2
3
Select a Phone Book entry
Press b
Select a number and press e P
Select Delete and press b
Press e i
All at Once
Select a key (l - m) and press b
Return Speed Dial List to the default state.
Main Menu
^ When multiple numbers are saved, select one and press b.
Saving from Phone Book
Open a Phone Book entry, select a phone number
and press e P A Select Add Speed Dial A
Press b A Select from l to m A Press b
Tip H Use Call Button on Multi Stereo Headphones to call the
number saved in l (see P.2-19).
4-12
Main Menu H Phone Book A Speed Dial List
1
H Phone Book A Speed Dial List A
Options (e) A Clear All
Press e i
Owner Profile
Confirm handset number (phone number on USIM Card).
Save name, reading, phone number, mail address, personal
data, etc.
1
2
Select My Details and press b
Press g to exit
^ Owner Profile contents are similar to those of Phone Book
(see P.4-8).
^ Via Bluetooth or infrared, exchange Owner Profile with
compatible devices (see P.9-2).
Edit
4
Phone Book
Main Menu H Phone Book
Edit Owner Profile
Main Menu H Phone Book A My Details A Options (e)
Select Edit/Add Details A Press b A Select an item
A Press b
^ For more, see P.4-3 - 4-5.
Delete
Delete Owner Profile
Main Menu H Phone Book A My Details A Options (e)
Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
Note H Tel 1: cannot be changed or deleted.
4-13
TV Call
5-1
Getting Started
Important TV Call Usage Notes
Communicate with another party with live video images.
^ Send your image via Internal Camera.
^ For a higher quality image, use
^ TV Call is available only between compatible handsets.
^ TV Call may be interrupted if the other party is using a
different TV Call system. (Charges apply until the call ends.)
^ Depending on the other party's handset specifications or
External Camera.
settings, received image may appear small or not at all.
5
^ If subjects are moving, received image may appear frame by
TV Call
^ Conversations may be hampered by ambient noise. Use Multi
frame or block noise may occur.
Stereo Headphones in this case.
^ Conversations through Loudspeaker (see P.5-5) may be
Internal Camera
Window Description
NS
TV Call
J
0:00:06
Other Party's Image1
Options
090392XXXX2
Mute
Your Image1
Other Party's Name/Number 2
1Switch image positions.
2Name appears if saved in Phone Book.
5-2
difficult when Earpiece Volume is set too high. Keep the
volume moderate or use Multi Stereo Headphones.
^ Handset heats up during TV Calls or while charging battery.
This is normal.
Initiating a TV Call
Answering a TV Call
1
1
4
^ Enter a number directly or from Phone Book, Dialled Numbers
or Received Calls.
When the call is answered, the other
party's image appears.
^ For basic operations (adjusting
Earpiece Volume, placing calls on hold,
etc.), refer to procedures for Voice Call.
C Operations during a TV Call: see P.5-4
Press g to end call
NS
TV Call
J
5
090392XXXX2
Voice
2
Options
090392XXXX2
Mute
Press h A Select Phone Book A Press h A Open
an entry (see P.4-9) A Press h A Select TV Call A
Press h
Answer with Video Image
1 Press f
Busy
NS
J
TV Call
0:00:06
Image is sent via Internal Camera.
C Operations during a TV Call:
see P.5-4
Answer with Voice Only
1 Press e K
Place TV Calls with Display in Viewer position
C Press c to end call.
TV Call...
0:00:06
^ Alternatively, close handset.
Viewer Position
N7X67k1KsgJ
TV Call... appears.
^ Answer, forward or reject the call
(see P.2-5 - 2-6).
Press e P
Select TV Call and press b
When a TV Call arrives, open
handset
TV Call
2
3
Turn handset power on and enter a phone number
C Operations during a TV Call:
see P.5-4
3
Options
090392XXXX2
Mute
Press g to end call
^ Alternatively, close handset.
Viewer Position
Answer TV Calls with Display in Viewer position
Answer with Video Image
When a TV Call arrives, press h
C Press c to end call.
Answer with Voice Only
When a TV Call arrives, press h (Long Press)
C Press c to end call.
5-3
Switch Cameras
5
Toggle between Internal Camera and External
Camera
KInternal Camera
During a call, press F to toggle between Internal
Camera and External Camera
TV Call
Note H When External Camera is used and handset becomes too
hot, Temperature is high. Switch cameras. appears. If
camera is not switched to Internal Camera, Handset is
hot. Switch to Alternative Image. appears and
alternative image appears. When you attempt to switch to
External Camera while handset is too hot, Handset is
hot. Cannot switch to external camera. appears and
Internal Camera or alternative image returns.
Swap Images
Switch locations of each other's images
Press b during a call
NS
J
TV Call
NS
0:00:06
TV Call
J
0:00:06
b
Options
090392XXXX2
Mute
Send Alternative
Image
Options
090392XXXX2
Mute
Send a saved image instead of live video image
During a call, press e P A Select Camera Picture
A Press b A Select Alt. Image A Press b
^ To set an alternative image, see P.5-5.
5-4
Mute
Mute your voice and replace your image with a
preset image
During a call, press d N
C To cancel, press d M.
Additional Engaged TV Call Operations
C Mobile Light: Press : for 1+ seconds to illuminate.
(Available only for External Camera.)
C Digital Zoom: Press C (zoom in) or D (zoom out)
B External Camera: Up to 9-level Zoom
B Internal Camera: Up to 2-level Zoom
C Press e P to access the following:
Loudspeaker On/Off Activate or deactivate Loudspeaker
Settings
Engaged TV Call Operations
Picture Quality
Select quality of incoming images
Backlight
Set Backlight status
Exposure
Select brightness of outgoing
images from five levels (-2 to +2)
Bluetooth
Headset
Activate or deactivate Bluetooth
Headset
Hold/Retrieve
Hold or resume TV Calls
Open Phone Book
Open a Phone Book entry
TV Call Settings
Default Image
Picture Quality
Send live video image or alternative image
when initiating TV Calls
KInternal Camera
H Settings A TV Call Settings A Camera Picture A
Main Menu
Default Image
^ Ext. Camera (External Camera) can only be selected during a
call.
Setting
Alternative Image
Main Menu
Select an image to send as an alternative image
Select Normal, Quality Prior (prioritise quality) or
Frame Rate Prior (prioritise frame rate) A Press b
^ Setting is also available during a call.
Backlight
5
Select Backlight status for TV Calls
KOn
Main Menu H Settings A TV Call Settings A Backlight
Select On, Normal Setting or Off A Press b
H Settings A TV Call Settings A Camera Picture A
Alternative Image
Select Substitute Image
Press b A Select Preset Picture or My Pictures A
Press b A Select an image A Press b
Loudspeaker
KNormal
Main Menu H Settings A TV Call Settings A Picture Quality
TV Call
Select Internal Camera or Alternative Image A Press b
Select quality of incoming images
Activate Loudspeaker when initiating TV Calls
KLoudspeaker On
Main Menu H Settings A TV Call Settings
Select Loudspeaker On or Loudspeaker Off A
Press b
^ Setting is also available during a call.
^ For Normal Setting, Backlight illuminates as set in Display
Settings (see P.10-6).
^ Setting is also available during a call.
Mute
Microphone
Mute your voice when initiating TV Calls
KUnmute Microphone
Main Menu H Settings A TV Call Settings
Select Mute Microphone or Unmute Microphone A
Press b
^ Setting is also available during a call.
Hold Guidance
Pict
Main Menu
Select an image to send while placing calls on
hold
H Settings A TV Call Settings A Hold Guidance
Pict
Select Preset Pictures or My Pictures A Press b A
Select an image A Press b
5-5
Camera
6-1
Getting Started
6
802SH features a 1.3 megapixel CCD camera. Capture still
images and record video.
^ Still Images: see P.6-5
^ Video: see P.6-10
^ Key Assignments: see P.6-4 ^ Shooting Options: see P.6-13
Use a soft cloth to wipe fingerprints and oil off lens cover
(see P.1-10).
Some key operations are indicated for Viewer position and clamshell
open.
Example: Press h or b
^ If handset moves while shooting, images may blur. Hold
CFile Formats & Save Locations
Camera
Mode
File Format
Photo Camera JPEG (.jpg)
MPEG-4 (.3gp)
Video Camera
MPEG-4 (.ASF)
6-2
Precaution
Save Location
Handset Data Folder (Pictures)
or SD Memory Card Data
Folder (Pictures/DCIM)
See P.8-2.
Handset or SD Memory Card
Data Folder (Videos)
See P.8-2.
SD Memory Card Data Folder
(SD VIDEO)
Mobile Camera Basics
handset firmly or place it on a stable surface and use Timer
(see P.6-14).
^ Mobile camera is a precision instrument; however, some
pixels may appear brighter or darker.
^ Shooting/saving images while handset is hot may affect image
quality.
^ Subjecting the lens to direct sunlight will damage the camera's
colour filter.
Auto Shut-off
C Mobile camera automatically ends if handset becomes too
hot. To reactivate, wait until handset cools down.
C Before image capture, mobile camera ends after five minutes
of inactivity and Standby returns.
Indicators
1 Timer (see P.6-14) & Continuous Shoot (see P.6-8)
^ Picture Count
選択
1
2
3
cKAAJ
Viewer Position
2
3
1
4
5
F
IQ
cKAAJ
7
6
b - c: Captured/Total
^ Continuous Shoot
Q: 4 Pictures, R: 9 Pictures
e: Bracket, d: Overlapped
2 Mobile Light (see P.6-14)
I: On, K: Auto, I: Low Light
3 Capacity (see P.6-5)
Number of images savable
^ F: More than 100
^ Red background: 3 or less
4 Picture Size (see P.6-15)
5 Picture Quality (see P.6-16)
K: Normal, L: Fine, M: High Quality
6 Exposure (see P.6-15)
E
D
A
B
6
Camera
NF IA
4
5
6
7
C
Dark A Standard A Bright
7 Save Location (see P.6-17)
b: Handset, c: SD Memory Card, D: Choice
選択
Clamshell Open
6-3
Viewfinder & Key Assignments
1 Viewfinder
1
2
6
Camera
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
A
Clamshell Open
3
B
Viewer Position
6-4
C
In Viewer position, images appear with a longer horizontal
and shorter vertical.
2 Portrait/Macro Selector
Slide to Macro to capture images as close as 10 cm. Allow at
least 40 cm for Portrait.
3 Zoom
M or C: Zoom in, L or D: Zoom out
4 Options
5 Cancel
Press to start over.
6 Toggle Preview & Picture Size (see P.6-13)
Press to toggle as follows:
^ Toggle Preview (for Photo Camera mode):
Full Viewfinder ( Normal Finder
^ Picture Size (for Video Camera mode):
Large(QCIF) ( Small(SubQCIF)
7 Shutter
8 Toggle Mode
B: Photo Camera mode, A: Video Camera mode
9 End
A Mobile Light (see P.6-14)
The mode toggles as follows: On (I) % Auto (K) % Low
Light (I) % Off.
Press 5 to change the light colour.
B Camera Startup & Shutter
In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to activate the mode used
last. Press to capture images, open selected menu items or
execute functions.
C Options & End
Press for 1+ seconds to return to Standby.
Tip H ^ In Viewer position, open Options menu to use
functions. See the corresponding pages for details.
^ Accessible functions vary by mode. Refer to "Still
Image Functions" on P.6-7 and "Video Recording
Operations" on P.6-12.
^ View a summary of key assignments while using
camera (see P.6-17).
Still Images
Photo Camera Mode
Capture images to send via MMS, save as Wallpaper, etc.
Various settings and functions are available for camera use.
Picture Size
Picture Quality
Digital Zoom
Attach to MMS
Format
Memory Capacity
Handset Data Folder (Pictures) or SD
Memory Card Data Folder (Pictures/DCIM1)
6
Camera
Save Location
W 960 x H 1280 dots (Quad-VGA)
W 768 x H 1024 dots (XGA)
W 480 x H 640 dots (VGA)
W 240 x H 320 dots (QVGA)
W 120 x H 160 dots (QQVGA)
W 120 x H 128 dots
Normal/Fine/High Quality
W 960 x H 1280 dots: None
W 768 x H 1024 dots: 1x - 1.25x
W 480 x H 640 dots: 1x - 2x
W 240 x H 320 dots: 1x - 8x
W 120 x H 160 dots: 1x - 16x
W 120 x H 128 dots: 1x - 16x
OK
JPEG (.jpg)2
Approximately 1,000 files3
1Available for W 480 x H 640 dots (VGA) or larger images.
2Default file name is also the captured date and time. (Example:
2004-12-15_12-34.jpg indicates the image was captured at 12:34,
15 December 2004.)
3Approximate value for handset Data Folder, with default image size
and quality.
6-5
Tip H ^ Saving video, sounds or V-applications reduces
memory for still images.
^ To check memory status, see P.10-13.
Capturing Still Images
View a summary of key assignments while using camera
(see P.6-17).
6
Viewer Position
Camera
Main Menu H Camera
1
2
6-6
3
Press h to save image
4
Press c for 1+ seconds to exit
Saving appears and the image is saved. Viewfinder returns for
another shot.
^ When Save Pictures to is set to Choice, select a save
location and press h.
Tip H ^ Change shutter click sound (see P.6-13). Volume is
fixed.
^ Set handset to save captured images automatically
(see P.6-18 "Auto Save").
Clamshell Open & Self Portrait
Frame image on Display
C When in Video Camera mode,
press c P A Select to
Photo Camera A Press h
C Key Assignments: see P.6-4
C Shooting Options: see P.6-13
Press h
Shutter clicks and the captured
image appears.
^ Shutter click sounds even in
Manner mode.
C To start over, press c.
Options
Main Menu H Camera
1
NF
cKA
Cancel
Frame image on Display
F
Options
NF
cKA
cKA
C When in Video Camera mode, press
e P A Select to Photo Camera
A Press b
C Key Assignments: see P.6-4
C Shooting Options: see P.6-13
Back
cKA
Press c or e P to use the following functions:
Press e q to save image
Save
Saving appears and the image is saved.
Viewfinder returns for another shot.
^ When Save Pictures to is set to Choice, select a save
location and press b.
Still Image Functions
Cancel
Press g to exit
Note H Self Portrait
Your image appears on Display as a mirror image. After
shutter is released, preview image appears reversed.
Tip H ^ Change shutter click sound (see P.6-13). Volume is fixed.
^ Set handset to save captured images automatically
(see P.6-18 "Auto Save").
Picture Size
Select image size (see P.6-15)
Exposure
Adjust light metering (see P.6-15)
Mobile Light
Select mode and colour (see P.6-14)
Scene
Select according to lighting or subject
(see P.6-15)
Picture Quality
Select Normal, Fine or High Quality
(see P.6-16)
Continuous Shoot Select mode and speed (see P.6-8)
Photo Frame
Timer
6
Camera
4
F
Shutter clicks and image appears.
^ Shutter click sounds even in Manner
mode.
C To start over, press d 3.
C To send images, press b.
Picture Settings
3
Press h or b
Camera
Modes
2
Add Frames (see P.6-10)
Set Timer (see P.6-14)
My Pictures
View files in Data Folder (see P.6-18)
to Video Camera
Switch to Video Camera mode (see
P.6-18)
6-7
Activating Continuous Shoot
Continuous Shoot
Use Continuous Shoot to capture images sequentially.
6
4 Pictures1
Capture four separate images
9 Pictures2
Capture nine separate images
Bracket2
Capture nine separate images. Exposure and
Mobile Light colour vary slightly for each shot.
Overlapped2
Capture five images to create a composite image
Camera
1Available when Picture Size is 480x640, 240x320, 120x160 or
120x128.
2Available when Picture Size is 240x320, 120x160 or 120x128.
^ In 4 Pictures, 9 Pictures or Bracket mode, Index Image is created
separately (not available when Picture Size is 480x640).
^ In Overlapped mode, a composite image is created in addition
to five images.
^ Press h or b for the first shot. Handset captures the rest
automatically.
In 4 Pictures or 9 Pictures mode, select Manual to release
shutter manually, or select a shutter speed from five levels.
Tip H From a Continuous Shoot file, select an image to send as
an MMS attachment (see P.6-19).
6-8
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Main Menu Options (c or e) A Camera Modes A Continuous
Shoot
1
Select from 4 Pictures to Overlapped and press
h or b
C To cancel, choose Off A Press h or b
2
Select a speed and press h or b
The corresponding indicator appears (see P.6-3) and
Viewfinder returns.
^ Manual is not available for Timer.
Note H In low light or while Mobile Light is on, shooting speed
may slow down.
4
Capturing Continuous Shoot Images
Main Menu H Camera A Activate Continuous Shoot
1
Frame image on Display and press h or b
2
Index Image or a composite image appears
3
To save, press h or e q
Viewfinder returns.
^ When Save Pictures to is set to Choice, select a save
location and press h or b.
Saving a Single Image
1 Select Selected Picture and press h or b
Viewfinder returns.
^ When Save Pictures to is set to Choice, select a save
location and press h or b.
6
Camera
The first frame is captured with subsequent frames captured at
interval determined by Shooting Speed setting.
^ For manual shutter control, repeat Step 1 for each frame.
C To cancel, press c or d C.
B Press h or e q to save captured images.
C To cancel during manual shutter control, press c or d
C A Press c or d 3 (Captured images are
deleted.)
Saving All Images
1 Select All Pictures and press h or b
C Use L, M or F to toggle between images.
B To save images individually, select an image and proceed
to Step 3.
C To attach images to MMS Mail, press b.
F
Save
YKAAJ
Cancel
6-9
Adding Frames
Video
^ In addition to Preset Frames, use transparent PNG files
obtained via Web or MMS.
^ In Continuous Shoot, Frame is added to each image.
^ Available when Picture Size is 240x320, 120x160 or 120x128.
6
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Main Menu Options (c or e) A Camera Modes A Photo
Frame
Camera
1
Preset Frames
1 Select Preset Frames and press h or b
2 Select a Frame and press h or b
Video Camera Mode
Record short video clips to send via MMS. Use SD Memory
Cards to save longer recordings (recording time depends on
the card capacity.)
Tip H For best results, record within 1.5 meters.
Picture Size
C To change image (Frame), press c or d W.
3 Press h or b
Save Location
Original Frames
1 Select My Pictures and press h or b
^ Some images may not be used as a Frame.
2 Select a Frame and press h or b
C To change image (Frame), press c or d W.
3 Press h or b
Cancelling
1 Choose Off and press h or b
For
Recording
Message
Time
(per shot)
Extended
Video
Picture Quality
Digital Zoom
Attach to MMS
File Format
W 176 x H 144 dots
(QCIF)
W 128 x H 96 dots
(SubQCIF)
Handset or SD
Memory Card Data
Folder (Videos)
60 seconds (Normal)
50 seconds (Fine)
30 seconds
(High Quality)
30 minutes
W 240 x H 320 dots
(QVGA)
SD Memory Card
Data Folder
(SD VIDEO)
-
Capacity-based
Normal/Fine/High Quality
SubQCIF 3.72x/QCIF 2.72x/QVGA 2x
OK
MPEG-4 (.3gp)1
MPEG-4 (.ASF)2
1Default file name is also the captured date and time. (Example:
2004-12-15_12-34 indicates the image was captured at 12:34, 15
December 2004.)
File name may change if the same name already exists.
2Default file name starts from MOL001.ASF then MOL002.ASF, and so on.
6-10
Tip H ^ Saving still images, sounds or V-applications reduces
memory for video.
^ To check memory status, see P.10-13.
3
Recording Video
Main Menu H Camera
1
Frame image on Display
2
Press h or b
4
N
hLA
To save, select Save and press
h or b
hLAAJ
N
Record Video
Preview
Save
Save and Send
Select
Back
Video is saved and Viewfinder returns for another shot.
^ When Save Videos to is set to Choice, select storage media
and press h or b.
5
C When in Photo Camera mode, press c
or e P A Select to Video
Camera A Press h or b
C Key Assignments: see P.6-4
C Shooting Options: see P.6-13
Recording stops with a tone.
C To play the video, select Preview A
Press h or b
C To start over, press c or d W.
Press c for 1+ seconds or g to exit
6
Camera
Make sure battery is adequately charged and there is
enough free memory before recording video. When battery
is low (L), Video Camera mode is not available. If battery
becomes low (L) or memory becomes full while recording
video, a warning appears and recording stops.
To stop, press h or b
Tip H Actual recording time may differ from that shown on
Display.
Options
Back
Recording begins after a tone.
^ Start and end tones sound even in Manner mode (volume is fixed).
6-11
Video Recording Operations
Before Recording
6
Record Time
Select a format based on recording time
and image size (see P.6-16)
Exposure
Adjust amount of light (see P.6-15)
Mobile Light
Select mode and colour (see P.6-14)
Microphone
Set to On to record sounds (see P.6-17)
Video Quality
Select Normal, Fine or High Quality
(see P.6-16)
My Videos
View files in Data Folder (see P.6-18)
To Photo Camera
Switch to Photo Camera mode (see P.6-18)
Advanced
Camera
Video Settings
Press c or e P to use the following functions:
Select handset or SD Memory Card
Save Videos to
(see P.6-17)
Picture Size
Select image size (see P.6-13)
Video Encode
Select a video encoding format
(see P.6-17)
Help
6-12
View a summary of key assignments
(see P.6-17)
Before Saving
The following menu items appear after recording:
Preview
Play video (see P.6-11)
Save
Save video to handset or SD Memory Card
(see P.6-11)
Save and Send Attach images to MMS Mail (see P.6-19)
Camera Settings
Picture Size
Photo Camera
Shooting Options
Select video image size
N/A
Video Camera
Available
KLarge(QCIF)
Toggle Preview
Photo Camera
H Camera A Activate Video Camera mode A
Main Menu
Options (c or e) A Advanced A Picture Size
Switch Viewfinder size
Available Video Camera
N/A
KNormal Finder
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Options (c or e) A Advanced
Select Full Viewfinder or Normal Finder A Press h
or b
^ Large(QCIF): W 176 x H 144 dots
Small(SubQCIF): W 128 x H 96 dots
Shutter Sound
Photo Camera
Change shutter click sound
Available Video Camera
6
Camera
Main Menu
Select Large(QCIF) or Small(SubQCIF) A Press h
or b
N/A
KPattern 1
Main Menu
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Options (c or e) A Advanced A Shutter Sound
Select a pattern A Press h or b
Note H ^ Volume does not change.
^ Shutter click sound for Continuous Shoot is unique and
fixed.
6-13
Timer
Release shutter automatically
Photo Camera
Available Video Camera
Mobile Light
N/A
Photo Camera
Select mode and colour
Available Video Camera
KOff
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Main Menu
Options (c or e) A Camera Modes A Timer
Activating Timer
6
Choose On A Press h or b
Camera
^ Viewfinder returns (A appears).
Timer Shooting
Press h or b
^ Tone sounds and shutter is released after 10 seconds.
C To save images, press h or e q.
KOff/White
Main Menu H Camera A Options (c or e)
Mobile Light (Still Image)
Select Picture Settings A Press h or b A Select
Mobile Light A Press h or b A Select Switch On/
Off A Press h or b A Select On, Auto, Low Light
or Off A Press h or b
^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.
On
Auto
Timer Details
C To cancel Timer during countdown, press c, d 3 or i.
^ Viewfinder returns (Timer setting remains).
C To release shutter manually while Timer is active, press h or
b. Image is captured and Timer is cancelled.
C Incoming calls and Alarm interrupt image capture.
C While Timer is active, the following settings are not available:
Exposure, Mobile Light and to Video Camera.
Available
Low Light
Mobile Light activates and brightens for image capture
Mobile Light activates when light is low and brightens
for image capture
Mobile Light activates and exposure is constant
Mobile Light (Video)
Select Video Settings A Press h or b A Select
Mobile Light A Press h or b A Select Switch On/
Off A Press h or b A Select On, Auto or Off A
Press h or b
Colour (Still Image)
Note H Timer is not available when Continuous Shoot is set to
Manual.
Select Picture Settings A Press h or b A Select
Mobile Light A Press h or b A Select Light Colour
A Press h or b A Select a colour A Press h or b
Colour (Video)
Select Video Settings A Press h or b A Select
Mobile Light A Press h or b A Select Light Colour
A Press h or b A Select a colour A Press h or b
6-14
Note H Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces or look into
the light yourself.
Photo Camera
Image Settings
Exposure
Photo Camera
Picture Size
Select still image size
Available Video Camera
N/A
K240x320
Adjust light sensitivity for still images and video
Available Video Camera
Available
KA (standard)
Select Picture Settings A Press h or b A Select
Exposure A Press h or b A Press M/C (brighter)
or L/D (darker) A Press h or b
^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.
Video
Select Video Settings A Press h or b A Select
Exposure A Press h or b A Press M/C (brighter)
or L/D (darker) A Press h or b
^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.
Select a size A Press h or b
^ To change video image size, see P.6-13.
6
Select a mode according to lighting or subject
Scene
Photo Camera
Available Video Camera
N/A
Camera
Main Menu H Camera A Options (c or e)
Still Image
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Main Menu
Options (c or e) A Picture Settings A Picture Size
KAuto
Main Menu
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Options (c or e) A Picture Settings A Scene
Select a mode A Press h or b
^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.
Auto
Night
Sports
Characters
Automatic adjustment
Use in low light conditions
Best suited for action sports or fast-moving subjects
Most suitable for high contrast black and white subjects
6-15
Picture Quality
Select image or video quality
Record Time
Photo Camera
Available Video Camera
Available
KPhoto Camera: Normal, Video Camera: Fine
Select For Message to record short video to
send via MMS
For longer video recording, select Extended
Video
Photo Camera
N/A
Video Camera
Main Menu H Camera A Options (c or e)
Still Image Quality
6
Camera
Select Picture Settings A Press h or b A Select
Picture Quality A Press h or b A Select quality A
Press h or b
Video Quality
Select Video Settings A Press h or b A Select
Video Quality A Press h or b A Select quality A
Press h or b
^ Picture Quality setting is not available when Record Time is set
to QVGA(MPEG4).
Tip H The image quality increases in the order: Normal, Fine,
High Quality. Saving higher quality images requires
more space in memory and shortens recording time.
Available
KFor Message
Main Menu
H Camera A Activate Video Camera mode A
Options (c or e) A Video Settings A Record Time
Long Recording
Select Extended Video A Press h or b A Select
QCIF/SubQCIF or QVGA(MPEG4) A Press h or b
twice
^ Extended Video can only be selected when an SD Memory
Card is inserted.
QCIF/SubQCIF
Record video in the 3GPP format (extension: .3gp)
QVGA (MPEG4)
Record video in the MPEG-4 format
(extension: .ASF)
Image size is W 240 x H 320 dots
Short Video Clip
Select For Message A Press h or b
^ Record up to 295 KB.
Note H To select storage media, insert SD Memory Card.
6-16
Microphone
Photo Camera
Additional Settings
Record sounds when recording video
N/A
Video Camera
Available
View a summary of key assignments for
operations with handset open (clamshell open)
Help
KOn
H Camera A Activate Video Camera mode A
Main Menu
Options (c or e) A Video Settings A Microphone
Choose On or Off A Press h or b
Video Encode
Available
Main Menu H Camera A Options (c or e)
Select Help A Press h or b
Select a video encoding format
N/A
Available Video Camera
Video Camera
Available
6
Select a save location for image files
Save to
Photo Camera
Available Video Camera
Available
KMPEG4 (Japan)
Main Menu
H Camera A Activate Video Camera mode A
Options (c or e) A Advanced A Video Encode
Select H.263(Europe) or MPEG4(Japan) A Press h
or b
^ Video Encode setting is not available when Record Time is set
to QVGA(MPEG4).
Main Menu
Camera
Photo Camera
Photo Camera
H Camera A Options (c or e) A Advanced A
Save Videos to/Save Pictures to
Select Handset Memory, Memory Card or Choice A
Press h or b
For Images Larger than W 480 x H 640 Dots
Select Handset Memory, SD(Pictures), SD(DCIM) or
Choice A Press h or b
^ For Choice, select a save location each time you save.
^ To select storage media for video, set Record Time to For
Message.
Note H To select storage media, insert SD Memory Card.
6-17
Select Mode
Photo Camera
Switch between Photo Camera and Video
Camera modes
Available Video Camera
Available
Opening Images & Playing Video
Opening Still Images
Main Menu H Camera A Options (c or e)
Select to Video Camera or to Photo Camera A Press
h or b
6
Auto Save
Camera
Photo Camera
Set handset to save captured images
automatically
Available Video Camera
N/A
KOff
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Main Menu
Options (c or e) A Advanced A Auto Save
Choose On or Off A Press h or b
Main Menu
H Camera A Activate Photo Camera mode A
Options (c or e)
1
Select My Pictures and press h or b
2
Select an image and press h or b
C When SD Memory Card is inserted, select Pictures or
Camera Images A Press h or b
C To open other files, press c or d W.
C To open images on SD Memory Card, press A.
Tip H Open a file and press h for 1+ seconds or e P to
use available functions.
Playing Video
Main Menu
1
2
H Camera A Activate Video Camera mode A
Options (c or e)
Select My Videos and press h or b
Select a file and press h or b
C To play other files, press c or d W.
C To play files on SD Memory Card, press A.
QVGA Size
Images
Play QVGA size video
(W 240 x H 320 dots)
Main Menu H Media Player
Press h (Long Press) or e P A Select Open
Video A Press h or b A Select SD VIDEO A Press
h or b A Select a file A Press h or b
6-18
Sending Still Images & Video
Still Images
Capture and send images as MMS attachments.
^ To attach Continuous Shoot images, use F to select a frame
or Index Image.
^ To attach images in Data Folder, see P.8-4.
Before saving image (see P.6-6 - P.6-7),
press b
2
Select a save location and press b
3
Image is saved to Data Folder and New Message window
opens with image attached.
^ New Message window may open directly after Step 1
depending on the settings.
Complete other fields and send MMS Mail
(see P.14-6)
Send video clips via MMS.
To attach video files in Data Folder, see P.8-4.
1
Before saving video (see P.6-11), select Save
and Send and press b
Video is saved to Data Folder and New Message window opens
with image attached.
^ When Save Videos to is set to Choice, select storage media
and press b.
2
Complete other fields and send MMS (see P.14-6)
Note H ^ Send video clips to MMS/VGS compatible Vodafone
Handsets that support MPEG-4 video playback.
6
Camera
1
Video Clips
Tip H For information about Messaging service and
compatibility with other handset models, contact
Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information.
Tip H For information about Messaging service and compatibility
with other handset models, contact Vodafone Customer
Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
6-19
Media Player
7-1
Media Player
Playlist
Use Media Player to listen to music (Music Player) or play
video (Video Player). Save video/music files to handset or
SD Memory Card (including SD VIDEO and SD AUDIO). To
open files, specify the location first.
Select and open video/music files from Video Playlist or
Music Playlist. In Video/Music Playlist, all files in one
location appear in All Videos/All Music. Create original
Playlist to organise them.
All Videos/All Music
Video (Video Player)
Music (Music Player)
Handset
Handset
SD Memory Card
SD Memory Card
SD VIDEO
(SD Memory Card)
SD AUDIO
(SD Memory Card)
7
Media Player
When Manner Mode is Active
Manner mode active. Output sound? appears when starting
Media Player.
^ Press e i to cancel Manner mode temporarily.
Handset speaker outputs sound at the volume set for
Media Player.
^ Press d c to stay in Manner mode. Enjoy sound
discretely with Multi Stereo Headphones, etc.
Tip H Play video/music while downloading them (Streaming:
see P.13-14).
7-2
Classic_music_01
Classic_music_02
Classic_music_03
Pops_music_01
Pops_music_02
Pops_music_03
Playlist
Classic_music_01
Pops_music_01
Rock_music_02
Rock_music_03
Select files and
add to Playlist.
Rock_music_01
Rock_music_02
Rock_music_03
All files appear.
^ Once video/music is played, the Playlist used last will open
next time.
^ Playlist stores only file locations. The source files are in the
original locations.
^ Create new Playlists (see P.7-11).
^ Three video/music Playlists are set by default.
Playing Music
Precautions
Record tracks in Secure MP3 format from CD players, PC
hard disks, etc. to SD Memory Card. Music Player is not
compatible with some recording/playback formats. Music
may not play depending on the SD Memory Card status.
^ Play downloaded music.
^ Connect Headphones as shown below.
^ Alternatively, use handset speaker.
Right
^ Hold Handsfree Microphone Unit when connecting or
disconnecting Headset. Do not handle Headphones roughly to
avoid damaging Headphone Connecter or cord.
^ Use only the supplied Headphones. Other devices may not
function properly and damage may result.
^ When battery is low (L), Music Player does not play. If
battery becomes low (L) during playback, Music Player
shuts down and Standby returns automatically.
^ Turn down the volume if handset speaker sound is distorted.
7
Media Player
Tip H To answer calls during playback with Headphones, press
Call Button for 1+ seconds.
Left
2
Headset
1
Handsfree
Microphone Unit
7-3
Playback Window (Music Player)
1
2
3
4
7
Media Player
7-4
Playback
NgX67k1IsAJ
8
All Music
Main Menu H Media Player A Options (e) A Open Music
1
No Artist Name
5
9
6
7
A
B
Options
Back
1 Playback in Progress
2 Playlist Name
3 Title
4 Artist Name
^ No Artist Name appears if not available.
5 Track Number
6 Status
1: Play, 0: Stop, 3: FF, 4: FR
7 Playback Pattern (see P.7-6)
5: Repeat, 6: Repeat All, J: Random
^ No indicator: Playback Pattern Normal
8 Track Location
9 Elapsed Time
A Volume
B Sound Effect (Tone Control: see P.7-5)
i: Bass (increase bass), l: Surround
k: Surround Bass
^ No indicator: Tone Control Normal
Select Handset Memory,
Memory Card or SD AUDIO and
press b
2
Select Playlist and press b
3
Select a track and press b
NgX67k1
sAJ
Music Playlist
All Music
Playlist 1
Playlist 2
Playlist 3
C For Music Playlist, see P.7-11.
C To search tracks, press e P A
Select Search A Press b A Enter
Options
Back
search text A Press b
C To sort tracks, press e P A Select Sort A Press b
A Select a sort option A Press b
B Tracks in SD AUDIO cannot be sorted.
C To check track properties, select a track A Press e P
A Select Information A Press b
^ Playback stops after the last track when Playback Pattern is
set to Normal (see P.7-6).
C To pause playback, press b.
C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.
C To mute, press D for 1+ seconds.
Incoming Calls/Mail during Playback
C Playback stops for incoming calls or Alarm.
^ An icon appears for incoming mail without interrupting
playback.
^ When playback stops while Streaming, the URL is saved to
Access History.
Tip H If sound is distorted, decrease volume or adjust other
Tone Control options.
Playback Operations
Press B
Press repeatedly to play previous tracks.1
Skip
Press A
Press repeatedly to skip more.2
Fast Forward
Press and hold A
Release for playback.
Fast Reverse
Press and hold B
Release for playback.
Pause
Press b
Press again to resume playback.
1In Random Play, B only replays the current track.
2Unavailable for the last track when Playback Pattern is set to
Normal.
Tip H Stop music? appears when g is pressed in Standby.
Playback Settings
Tone Control
Main Menu
Increase bass for dynamic sound or enjoy
surround sound
KNormal
H Media Player A Open Playback window A
Options (e) A Tone Control
Select an effect A Press b
Normal
No sound effects
Bass
Increase bass
Surround
Surround effect
7
Media Player
Replay
Additional Operations
Create mail messages and use Phone Book, etc. during
playback; however, some functions are not available.
Surround Bass Surround with increased bass
Note H Bass effect is not available for handset speaker sound.
7-5
Playback
Repeat tracks or play them in random order
Pattern
C Set to Repeat (one track repeat) while track information is on Display.
KNormal
Main Menu
H Media Player A Open Playback window A
Options (e) A Playback Pattern
Select a pattern A Press b
Normal
Play in order until the last track ends
Repeat
Repeat one track
7
Repeat All
Repeat all tracks
Media Player
Random
Play in random order
Playing Video
Play video recorded with mobile camera or files downloaded
via Web or Mail. Sounds play from the handset speaker.
Alternatively, use Headphones to listen (see P.7-3).
Playback Window (Video Player)
1
N
X67k1KsAJ
All Videos
2
3
4
5
6
7
Back
1 Clip Location
2 Video Image/Subtitles
3 Clip Number
4 Status
1: Play, 0: Pause, 3: FF, 4: FR
5 Playback Pattern (see P.7-7)
5: Repeat, 6: Repeat All, J: Random
^ No indicator: Playback Pattern Normal
6 Elapsed Time
7 Volume
7-6
Playback
Playback Settings
Main Menu H Media Player A Options (e) A Open Video
1
2
Select Playlist and press b
Repeat clips or play them in random order
KNormal
N7X67k1KsAJ
Video Playlist
All Videos
Playlist 1
Playlist 2
Playlist 3
C For Video Playlist, see P.7-11.
C To search video clips, press e P
A Select Search A Press b A Enter Options
Back
search text A Press b
C To sort video clips, press e P A Select Sort A Press
b A Select a sort option A Press b
C To check clip properties, select a clip A Press e P A
Select Information A Press b
B Press d to return.
Main Menu
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
A Settings A Playback Pattern
Select a pattern A Press b
Backlight
Select a Backlight status for playback
KAlways On
Main Menu
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
A Settings A Backlight
Select a pattern A Press b
Always On
Backlight remains on during playback
Select a clip and press b
Always Off
Backlight does not turn on during playback
Playback window opens.
Playback stops after the last clip when Playback Pattern is set
to Normal (see right).
C To pause playback, press b.
C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.
C To mute, press D for 1+ seconds.
C Playback Operations: see P.7-5
Normal Settings
Backlight turns on/off depending on Backlight
setting (see P.10-6)
Tip H For frame advance, pause playback and press A for 1+
seconds.
Display Size
7
Media Player
3
Select Handset Memory,
Memory Card or SD VIDEO and
press b
Playback
Pattern
Change playback size
KEnlarge
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
Main Menu
A Settings A Display Size
Select a size A Press b
7-7
Editing Video
7
Select Two Points
Crop portion between two points to save as a
new file
Delete Before
Portion after a selected frame is saved as a
new file
Delete After
Portion before a selected frame is saved as
a new file
Edit Subtitle
Add subtitles (text) to video
Media Player
Note H ^ Some files may not be edited.
^ Edited video may not play properly if SD Memory Card
is not formatted for 802SH.
^ To save to SD Memory Card, a maximum of 320 KB of
free memory is required in addition to the file size.
Selecting Start and End Points
Main Menu
1
2
3
4
5
7-8
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
A Edit
Press e i
^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.
Select Crop and press b
Select Select Two Points and press b
Press e U at the start point
The start point is specified and playback resumes.
Press e E at the end point
The portion is saved.
Cropping Video Clips
Delete the portion before or after the selected frame to save
the rest as a new file.
Main Menu
1
2
3
4
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
A Edit
Press e i
^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.
Select Crop and press b
Select Delete Before or Delete After and press b
Press e { to select a frame
^ The portion before or after the selected frame is deleted.
C To cancel, press d W.
Editing Subtitles
Set subtitles to appear during video playback.
^ Select the timing, change the colour and size, or add effects.
^ Use Video Player to edit subtitles.
Entering Text
After entry, set timing and time period for subtitles. Save up
to ten subtitles of up to 48 single-byte alphanumerics per
entry.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
H Media Player A Pause playback A Options (e)
A Edit
Press e i
^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.
Select Subtitle and press b
Select Edit Subtitle and press b
Select a number and press b
Enter text and press b
After completing all the settings, press e j
and then e E
9
Select Overwrite or Create New and press b
Display Settings
Duration
Main Menu
Press e E at the end point
C To edit subtitles, select Edit Text A Edit A Press b
C For Display Settings and Text Effects, see right and P.7-10.
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Display Settings A Duration
Press e U at the start point A Press e E
at the end point
Display Position
Main Menu
Set position for subtitles to appear
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Display Settings A Display Position
7
Use G to select a position A Press b
Font Size
Change font size of subtitles
KHandset (20 x 20)
Playback starts.
Press e U at the start point
Set timing and time period for subtitles
Media Player
Main Menu
8
Main Menu
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Display Settings A Font Size
Select Handset (20 x 20) or PC (12 x 12) A Press b
7-9
Scrolling
Main Menu
Select direction and visual effect for subtitle
scroll
KDirection: Left to Right, Effect: Frame In
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Display Settings A Scrolling
Direction
Select Direction A Press b A Select Left to Right
or Right to Left A Press b
Media Player
Select Effect A Press b A Select an effect A
Press b
Frame In
Subtitle comes in from the frame end
Frame Out
Subtitle appears in the centre and scrolls out
Rolling
Subtitle scrolls from end to end
Change font colours
KWhite
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
Main Menu
subtitles A Text Effects A Font Colour
All
Select All A Press b A Select a colour A Press b
Main Menu
Select On-Screen Time A Press b A Enter time A
Press b
Background
Colour
Select from seven background colours
KBlack
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Display Settings A Background Colour
Select a colour A Press b
Select Select Text A Press b A Use F to select the
first character A Press b A Use F to select the last
character A Press b A Select a colour A Press b
Highlight
On-Screen Time
Main Menu
Font Colour
Select Portion
Effect
7
Adding Text Effects
Highlight subtitles
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Text Effects A Highlight
Use G to select the first character A Press b A
Use G to select the last character A Press b A
Select a colour A Press b
Set subtitles to flash
Blink
Main Menu
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Text Effects A Blink
Use G to select the first character A Press b A
Use G to select the last character A Press b
Reset Effects
Main Menu
Cancel all Text Effects
H Media Player A Pause playback A Enter
subtitles A Reset Effects
Press e i
7-10
Deleting All Subtitles
Main Menu
1
H Media Player A Pause playback A Open Subtitle
options A Delete All Subtitle
Press e i
Managing Video & Music Files
Create Playlists in Video Playlist or Music Playlist.
Playlists cannot be added into SD VIDEO.
Main Menu
1
H Media Player A Open Video/Music Playlist
window A Options (e) A Add New Playlist
Enter name and press b
The Playlist is added.
Deleting Playlist
Press b A Select Media Player A Press b A
Press e P A Select Open Music or Open
Video A Press b A Select Handset Memory,
Memory Card or SD AUDIO/SD VIDEO A Press b
A Select Playlist A Press e P A Select
Delete Playlist A Press b A Press e i
7
Media Player
Organise video/music files on handset in Video Playlist
and Music Playlist. Create original Playlists to group clips
or categorise tracks.
^ Access all video/music files from All Videos/All Music (preset
list).
^ To save to SD Memory Card, a maximum of 320 KB (video) or 96
KB (music) of free memory is required in addition to the file size.
Adding New Playlist
^ Source files in All Videos/All Music remain.
C The default Playlists can be deleted.
Editing List Name
Press b A Select Media Player A Press b A
Press e P A Select Open Music or Open
Video A Press b A Select Handset Memory,
Memory Card or SD AUDIO/SD VIDEO A Press b
A Select Playlist A Press e P A Select Edit
List Title A Press b A Enter new name A Press
b
C The default Playlist can be renamed.
7-11
Adding Clips/Tracks
Add video/music from All Videos/All Music to newly
created Playlist.
^ Playlist stores only file locations. The source files will not be
copied.
^ Video files in SD VIDEO cannot be added.
Main Menu H Media Player A Open All Videos/All Music
7
Media Player
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
Select Add to Playlist and press b
Select Playlist and press b
Deleting Clips/Tracks in Playlist
Open Video/Music Playlist window and follow these steps.
Select Playlist A Press b A Select a clip/track A
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Press e i
^ Source files in All Videos/All Music remain.
Changing Order
Follow these steps to rearrange the order in Playlist.
Select Playlist A Press b A Select a clip/track A
Press e P A Select Change Order A Press
b A Use E to select a location A Press b
7-12
Deleting Files in SD VIDEO & SD AUDIO
Delete files in SD VIDEO or SD AUDIO. (Source files will be
deleted.)
Main Menu H Media Player A Open All Videos/All Music
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
Select Delete or Delete Track and press b
Press e i
Managing Files
8-1
Data Folder
Window Description
To open Data Folder, press b in Standby, select Data
Folder and press b.
File Organisation
NcX67k1KsgJ
Data Folder Contents
Data Folder
Saved files are organised in separate folders according to
file format.
Data Folder
Pictures
8
DCIM
Managing Files
Videos
Sounds&Ringtones
V-appli
Bookmarks
My Saved Page
Text Templates
Other Documents
Still Images
Large Still Images
Video Images
Downloaded Melodies and
other Sound Files
Shortcut to V-appli Library
(see P.15-4)
Shortcut to Bookmarks
(see P.13-12)
Shortcut to My Saved Pages
(see P.13-12)
Text Templates created in
vNote Format (see P.8-13)
Other Files such as vFiles,
Dictionary Files, etc.
8-2
Pictures
DCIM
Videos
Sounds&Ringtones
V-appli
Bookmarks
My Saved Page
▼
Select
Back
Default Folders
Major Icons
Memory Card
CStill Image & Animation Files
Icon
y
D
Format & Extension
JPEG (.jpg)
Description
JPEG image
PNG (.png)
PNG image
E-Animation (NEVA) (.nva)
Animation
(may include sound)
CVideo Files
Icon
Description
MPEG-4 (.3gp)
3GPP video image
MPEG-4 or H.263
(.3gp or .mp4)
3GPP video image
r
Format & Extension
Sort by name, date, size or type.
Main Menu
CSound Files
Icon
Sorting Files
Description
SMAF (.mmf)
Melody via Web or MMS
(may include images)
Audio (.mp4)
Downloaded Chaku-Uta
Voice (.amr)
Voice/sound recorded on
Voice Recorder
1
H Data Folder A Select a folder A Options (e) A
Advanced A Sort
Select an item and press b
Note H It may take a while to sort many files.
8
Managing Files
q
Format & Extension
Save files directly to SD Memory Card. Exchange files
between handset and Memory Card, or back-up handset
files by type.
Tip H s appears for copyright protected files. u appears for
files in the public domain.
8-3
Opening Files
Activating Mobile Camera
Main Menu H Data Folder
1
Select from Pictures to Other
Documents and press b
File list appears.
^ To select a file in a created sub folder,
select the sub folder and press b.
^ To sort files by date, name, size or type,
see P.8-3.
C To open SD Memory Card Data Folder,
press A.
8
Managing Files
2
3
Nc
J
Pictures
Press e P A Select Take Picture or Record
Video A Press b
Get new
04-12-1...
16/12/04 12:10
04-12-1...
16/12/04 12:13
04-12-1...
16/12/04 12:17
Options
B If Get new is highlighted, press D first.
4 KB
4 KB
Activating Voice Recorder
Open file list in Sounds & Ringtones folder and follow these steps:
Press e P A Select Record Sound A Press b
33 KB
Back
B If Get new is highlighted, press D first.
Select a file and press b
The content plays or appears.
^ For files in Pictures folder, press b to zoom in on image.
Alternatively, press e P, select Zoom and press b.
Press b repeatedly to zoom in more.
C To return to original scale, press e P A Select Zoom
Out A Press b
Press i to return to file list
Tip H Exchange files via Bluetooth or infrared with compatible
Vodafone handsets (see P.9-2).
8-4
Open file list in Pictures, DCIM, or Videos folder and follow the
steps below. Mobile camera activates in Photo Camera mode
from Pictures and DCIM folders, or in Video Camera mode from
Videos folder.
MMS Mail Attachments
Attach files to MMS Mail from Data Folder.
Main Menu H Data Folder A Select a folder
1
2
Select a file and press e P
3
4
Select As Message and press b
Select Send and press b
^ For files in Text Templates folder, select Send Template and
press b. Skip ahead to Step 4.
Enter text, recipient, etc., and send MMS Mail
(see P.14-6)
Properties
Main Menu H Data Folder A Select a folder
1
2
Select a file and press e P
Select Details and press b
Press D to scroll down.
^ The following information appears:
File name, type, size, last modified date, vendor, copy/forward
protection and other restrictions (number of times to open,
expiry date/term).
802SH supports SVG-T (Scalable Vector Graphics-Tiny).
View graphics in SVG files, including tables and maps.
For more information on SVG-T, visit
http://www.sharp.co.jp/j/ (Japanese only).
Scroll
2 (Up), 4 (Left), 6 (Right), 8 (Down)
Zoom
1 (Zoom Out), 3 (Zoom In), 5 (100%)
Rotate
7 (Anticlockwise), 9 (Clockwise)
Key Action
Mode
0
Tip H Some features may not be available depending on the
SVG file.
Use Data Folder files as Wallpaper, Phone Book Picture,
Ringtone and Ringvideo.
^ Set as Wallpaper, Add to Ph.Book, as Ring Video and Set
as Ringtone can be selected only for compatible files.
^ Some files may not be used depending on the size.
Wallpaper
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
8
Select Set As Wallpaper and press b
Managing Files
SVG Files
Using Files
Press b
Wallpaper is set.
Phone Book Picture
Main Menu H Data Folder A Select a folder
1
2
Select a file and press e P
Select Add to Ph.Book and press b
C For more, see Step 4 in "Saving from Dialled Numbers/
Received Calls" on P.4-6.
8-5
Ringvideo & Ringtone
Ringvideo
Main Menu H Data Folder A Videos
1
2
Select a file and press e P
Select as Ring Video and press b
Ringtone
Main Menu H Data Folder A Sounds&Ringtones
8
Managing Files
8-6
1
2
Select a file and press e P
Select Set as Ringtone and press b
Editing Images
Edit images in Pictures folder. Change size, add effects or
combine images.
Changing Image Size
Resize images in Pictures folder to use for Wallpaper,
Alarm, etc.
^ Alternatively, crop image for size.
^ File size changes when images are resized.
^ Images may not appear depending on the size.
^ Resize can be selected only for compatible files.
Resize to Preset Size
Cropping Images
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
2
3
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
Select a file and press e P
Select Resize and press b
Select from To Wallpaper to
Alarm and press b
Image appears with a rectangle indicating
display size, except for Power On/Off.
^ Use G to specify display area. (Display
area may not be specified depending on
image size.)
Power On/Off
W 240 x H 320 dots
Incoming Call
W 176 x H 144 dots
Alarm
W 240 x H 104 dots
5
Use G to move W to the lower right corner of
the portion to crop and press b
Select Resize and press b
Select Cut and press b
Use G to move W to the upper left corner of the
portion to crop and press b
Back
6
7
Press b
Press b
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
date and time of entry.
8
Managing Files
W 240 x H 290 dots
Select a file and press e P
C To start over, press e P A Select Size A Press b
Options
Wallpaper
1
2
3
4
C To enlarge or reduce image, press e P A Select
Resize A Press b A Press C (enlarge) or D (reduce) A
Press b
C To start over from selecting preset size, press d W.
4
5
Press b
Press b
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
date and time of entry.
8-7
Enlarging/Reducing Image
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
2
3
4
Select Picture Editor and press b
Select Enlarge/Reduce and press b
Press and hold C to enlarge and D to reduce
the size
To stop resizing, release the key (stops automatically when the
limit is reached).
C To centre the point to enlarge, press e P A Select
Move A Press b A Use G to move the point to the middle
of Display
B To return to enlarge or reduce image, press e P A
Select Resize A Press b
C To soften image, press e P A Select Soft A
Press b
8
Managing Files
5
8-8
Select a file and press e P
Visual Effects
Dress up images with pre-loaded visual effects.
^ Apply to JPEG images including Continuous Shoot images.
^ Retouch can be selected only for compatible files.
^ Use images between W 52 x H 52 and W 240 x H 320 dots.
Images larger than W 240 x H 320 dots are automatically
cropped and centred.
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
2
3
4
Select a file and press e P
Select Picture Editor and press b
Select Retouch and press b
Select an effect and press b
Sepia
Sepia tone
Sparkling
Bright parts sparkle
Press b
Ripples
Widening rings
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
date and time of entry.
Tile
Brick frame
Emboss
Embossing effects in metallic silver
Oil Painting
Unique blurring
Clear Frame
3D transparent frame
Round Frame
Translucent white frame (round)
Soft Frame
Translucent white frame (square)
Zigzag Frame
Randomly torn frame
5
Press b
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
date and time of entry.
4
Mirror: Right-half Right side of face
Face Arrange
Make smiley, angry or sad faces.
^ Apply to JPEG images.
^ Face Arrange can be selected only for compatible files.
^ Face Arrange may not fit all images. Adjust position and size
as required (see P.8-10).
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
Select a file and press e P
Select Picture Editor and press b
Select Face Arrange and press b
5
Mirror: Left-half
Left side of face
Grin
Eyes and mouth of a smiling face
Mad
Eyes and mouth of an angry face
Sad
Eyes and mouth of a sad face
Big Eyes
Add graphic eyes
Burning Eyes
Add flames in the eyes
Crying
Add tears
Aristocrat
Add a monocle and moustache
Angry Mark
Add a stress mark
8
C To check current positions of targets, select Positioning A
Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To start over, press d W.
Managing Files
Note H Decorated images may be too large to save or send via
MMS.
1
2
3
Select a type and press b
Press b
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
date and time of entry.
Note H When using Face Arrange, take care not to create
images that may embarrass or offend others. Always
obtain permission before photographing others.
8-9
4
Adjusting Face Arrange Position
Change the default positions and sizes of targets to fit the
image. Changes apply to the current image only.
8
1
In Step 4 on P.8-9, select Positioning and
press b
2
3
Press e u
J
N
Set Right Eye Lower
Set
Set the face line
N7X67k1KsgJ
N7X67k1KsgJ
Set Upper Face Line
Set Lower Face Line
Set Right Eye Upper
Managing Files
b
Back
Back
Use G to move W to
the lower right corner
C To start over, press d W.
Set
Back
Face line is set
N
J
Set Mouth Bottom
b
Set
Back
Set
Left Eye
5
Press b or e j when finished
6
7
Press b
b
Set
J
Set Left Eye Lower
Right Eye
N7X67k1KsgJ
Use G to move W to
the upper left corner
8-10
N
b
A rectangle appears with W in the upper left corner.
Set
Set the eyes and then mouth in the same way
Back
Mouth
All the targets appear.
C To start over from the face line, return to Step 2.
C To restore the default positions, press d W.
Press e i
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.
^ Face Arrange is applied to the adjusted positions.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Panorama Images
Combine two images into one.
Select two images
Merge Panorama
Panorama Image Effects:
Applicable to all kinds of shots
Near View
Best suited for close-up shots with parallax correction
Document Use for images with text
^ Use JPEG images between W 48 x H 64 and W 120 x H 160
dots/W 160 x H 120 dots.
^ Some portions may be cropped to adjust two images to the
same size.
^ The result may not be satisfactory if colour tones are different
between two images.
^ Merge Panorama can be selected only for compatible files.
Select Merge Panorama and press b
Select Second Image and press b
Select another image and press b
Press b, select Select Effect and press b
Select from Standard to
Document and press b
^ If the image is too large or too small,
change it.
C To check images, select either A
Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To change images, select either A
Press b A Press e P A Select
Change A Press b A Select an image
N7X67k1KsgJ
Merge Panorama
First Image
04-12-10_10-30.jpg
Second Image
04-12-10_10-32.jpg
Select Effect
8
Standard
Options
Back
8 Press e P when finished
9 Select Save and press b
b
10 Press
Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry. File name is the
Managing Files
Standard
Select Picture Editor and press b
date and time of entry.
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
Select the first image and press e P
^ This image appears on the left when combined.
8-11
Split Screen
Combine up to four reduced images into
one.
^ Apply to JPEG and PNG images.
^ Make sure there is enough free memory.
^ The four images are placed in the
following order: upper left, upper right,
lower left and lower right.
N
J
Picture Viewer
Options
Back
Split Picture
8
Managing Files
8-12
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
1
2
3
4
Select the first image and press e P
5
6
7
Enter name and press b
Select Picture Editor and press b
Select Split Picture and press b
Select Create 120x160 or Create 240x320 and
press b
^ Enter up to 24 characters.
Select Second Image and press b
Select an image and press b
Image opens (compatible ones only).
C To change image after Step 7, press e P A Select
Change A Press b A Select an image
8
9
Press b
Repeat Steps 6 - 8 to add images
^ In Step 6, select Third Image or Fourth
Image and press b.
C To preview Split Image, press e
P A Select View A Press b
C To change images, select one A Press
e P A Select Replace A Press
b A Start over from Step 7 - 8
C To delete images, select one A
Press e P A Select Remove A
Press b A Press e i
e P when finished
10 Press
C To cancel, press d W
11 Select Save and press b
N7X67k1KsgJ
Split Picture
First Image
04-12-10_10-30.jpg
Second Image
04-12-11_10-25.jpg
Third Image
04-12-12_10-19.jpg
Fourth Image
04-12-14_10-38.jpg
Options
Back
Additional Picture Effects
Some menu items can only be selected for compatible files.
Reformat file
Convert JPEG to PNG, and vice versa
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
Select a file A Press e P A Select Picture
Editor A Press b A Select Reformat file A Press b
A Select a format A Press b
^ The original format cannot be selected.
Tip H Changing file format may affect image size/quality.
Add Frame to JPEG images
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
Select a file A Press e P A Select Picture
Editor A Press b A Select Add Frame A Press b
A Select a Frame A Press b twice
C Press d W to return to Frame list.
Save frequently used phrases for use in mail message.
Save up to 50 entries of up to 256 characters each. (Maximum
number of entries may be less depending on contents.)
New Entry
Main Menu
1
H Data Folder A Text Templates A Add New
Template
Enter text and press b
Editing Templates
Main Menu H Data Folder A Text Templates
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
Select Edit and press b
Edit text and press b
8
Managing Files
Add Frame
Text Templates
Deleting Templates
Delete single Text Templates.
Rotate
Rotate images
Main Menu H Data Folder A Pictures
Select a file A Press e P A Select Picture
Editor A Press b A Select Rotate A Press b* A
Press b
Main Menu H Data Folder A Text Templates
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
Select Delete and press b
Press e i
*To rotate further, press e z. Each press rotates image by
90 degrees.
8-13
Editing Files & Folders
Adding Folders
Assign different names to folders within a layer.
Main Menu H Data Folder
1
Select from Pictures to Other Documents and
press b
^ Folders cannot be added to DCIM, V-appli, My Saved Page
and Text Templates folders.
8
2
Managing Files
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
Press e K
^ Delete folder contents before deleting folders.
^ Files in V-appli, Bookmarks, My Saved Page and Text
Templates folders can only be deleted one at a time.
Main Menu H Data Folder
Select any file and press e P
1
^ Shortcut: In Pictures, Videos or Sounds & Ringtones folder,
select Get new and skip ahead to Step 4.
C For Bookmarks folder, after Step 2, select New A Press b
A Select Folder A Press b A Skip ahead to Step 5
Select from Pictures to Other Documents and
press b
2
Deleting Folders
1 Select a folder and press e P
Deleting Single Files
1 Select a file and press e P
Deleting Multiple Files
1 Press e P
2 Select Advanced and press b
3 Select Multiple Select and press b
4 Select a file and press b
Select Advanced and press b
Select Create Folder and press b
Enter name and press b
Press e K
^ File extensions do not change.
^ Assign different names to files within a layer.
B Single-byte Symbols V, /, :, ;, ., <, >, |, ?, U, ", and
Pictographs are not supported.
^ Make sure there is enough free memory.
Main Menu H Data Folder A Select a folder
8-14
Enter name and press b
Deleting Files & Folders
Changing File Names
1
Select Rename and press b
Select a file and press e P
^ 4 appears. To cancel, press b again.
5 Repeat Step 4
C To check or uncheck all files at once, see P.8-15.
6 Press e P
3
4
Select Delete and press b
Press e i
All Files
Files in use for V-application cannot be copied, moved or deleted.
To check all, press e P A Select Select All
A Press b
To uncheck all, press e P A Select Unselect
All A Press b
Copying/Moving Files
Copy or move files to other folders in Data Folder.
^ Copy/forward protected files cannot be copied.
^ Default folders support corresponding file formats (see P.8-2).
^ Some files may not be copied or moved.
Note H ^ Disable write protection of SD Memory Card before
copying or moving files to SD Memory Card.
^ Files copied or moved to SD Memory Card may not be
used on other Vodafone handsets, PCs and other devices.
^ If a copy/forward protected file is included in the
selected files, the protected file and the succeeding
files are not copied.
Copying/Moving Single Files
Main Menu H Data Folder A Select a folder
1
2
3
Select a file and press e P
4
Press b
Managing Files
Tip H Name of copied or moved file may change when the
same name already exists in the folder.
8
Select Advanced and press b
Select Copy or Move and press b
C To copy or move to SD Memory Card Data Folder, press A.
C To copy or move to created sub folders, select a folder A
Press b
8-15
Copying/Moving Multiple Files
Files in V-appli, Bookmarks, My Saved Page and Text
Templates folders can only be copied or moved one at a time.
Main Menu
8
Managing Files
8-16
H Data Folder A Select a folder A Options (e) A
Advanced A Multiple Select
1
2
3
4
Select a file and press b
5
Press b
^ 4 appears. To cancel, press b again.
Repeat Step 1
C To check or uncheck all files at once, see P.8-15.
Press e P
Select Copy or Move and press b
C To copy or move to SD Memory Card Data Folder, press A.
C To copy or move to created sub folders, select a folder A
Press b
Connectivity
9-1
Getting Started
Exchange files and information between handset and other
devices via Bluetooth or infrared. Use Bluetooth to connect
to other handsfree devices or use handset as a modem.
Transfer Options
One File transfer
9
Transfer files/entries one by one.
Received files/entries are saved to
corresponding functions.
All File transfer
Transfer all files/entries by function
Receive folder
Receive a folder and its contents. Folders
are saved to Data Folder. (802SH does
not support sending folders.)
Connectivity
Note H ^ During infrared transfers or Bluetooth transmissions,
handset automatically enters Off Line Mode. Thus
transfers are disabled while receiving calls/messages,
during calls, while using Vodafone live! services or
Media Player, while editing mail or data, etc. Off Line
Mode is cancelled after transfers.
^ Some entries in Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks, Text
Templates and Bookmarks may not be saved in whole
or part.
Available Files
Function
One
File
All
Files
Note
Phone Book
In One File transfers, the
following settings are lost:
Available Available Group, Secret and Ringtone.
All File transfer includes
Owner Profile.
Calendar
Available
*1
In One File transfers, Secret
mode settings are lost
Tasks
Available
*1
In One File transfers, Secret
mode settings are lost
*2
Available
Data Folder
Available
*3
Files or sub folders in DCIM
folder and copy protected
files cannot be transferred
Bookmarks
*2
Available
In One File transfers,
received entries are saved to
Other Documents folder as
an unknown file
Text
Templates
*1 In All File transfers, Calendar and Tasks are sent together from
Appointments/Tasks.
*2 Only receiving files/entries is supported.
*3 Receive folders one by one via infrared.
Tip H ^ Handset stores up to 300 entries between Calendar
and Tasks. If the limit is reached during a transfer, the
remaining entries will not be received.
^ Transfer files in SD Memory Card Data Folder one by
one. Files in DCIM folder cannot be transferred.
9-2
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Connection
Getting Started
Bluetooth is a wireless technology that allows 802SH to
communicate with other compatible devices (PCs, mobile
phones, handsfree devices, etc.).
Sender
Recipient
Search for devices
Precautions
Handset Bluetooth Specifications:
Bluetooth specification Ver. 1.1
Bluetooth profiles supported
Headset Profile
Hands-Free Profile
Dial-up Networking Profile
ObjectPush Profile
Activate Bluetooth
Select device
Request connection
Accept
Bluetooth Power Class 2
Enter the same passcode
^ Bluetooth connections are available with compatible devices
Connection completes
supporting the same profile.
9
Connectivity
Communication system
Output
Activate Bluetooth (see P.9-4) on recipient device.
Connection starts when a request is received from the other
device. (Passcode may be required.)
^ Bring handsets to within 10 m. Bluetooth connection/transfer
rate is affected by distance between handsets, obstructions,
signal conditions, handset status, etc.
^ Bluetooth operates in the 2.4 GHz unlicensed frequency band.
Depending on the status of other devices used in the
spectrum, Bluetooth connection may slow down/terminate, or
the range may decrease.
^ Connect handset to one device at a time via Bluetooth.
Send
Receive
Passcodes are not necessary for paired devices.
Passcode
Passcodes (4 to 16 digits) are specific for Bluetooth
connection. Pairing is possible when Passcodes of both
devices match. Passcode is unset by default.
9-3
Bluetooth Indicators
E
Bluetooth transmission ready
B
Bluetooth transmission in progress
C
Bluetooth talk in progress
Activating Bluetooth
Activate Bluetooth before receiving files/entries or
connecting handset to handsfree devices.
Bluetooth is Off by default.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Switch On/Off
9
1
Choose On and press b
Connectivity
Standby returns (E).
C To cancel, choose Off A Press b
B When transmission is in progress, press e i.
Visibility
Allow other Bluetooth devices to find 802SH during device
search.
^ Set Visibility to Hide My Phone to hide 802SH from other
Bluetooth devices.
^ Visibility is set to Show My Phone by default.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Visibility
1
9-4
Select Show My Phone and press b
C To stay invisible, select Hide My Phone A Press b
Device Search & Pairing
Search for Bluetooth devices for pairing.
^ Passcodes are not necessary for paired devices.
^ Search for up to 16 devices at a time.
^ Activate Bluetooth on devices to be paired with.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth
1
Select Search for Devices and press b
2
3
Select a device and press b
Found devices are listed after search.
C When transmission is in progress, press e i.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
Enter the same passcode (4 to 16 digits) for
handset and the other device and press b
When pairing is complete, Pairing is successful. appears and
Standby returns.
^ Enter numbers (0 - 9) for passcodes.
^ For handsfree devices, enter specified passcodes.
^ Complete code entry within 30 seconds.
Device Indicator
9
PC
7
Wireless headset
@
PDA
6
Handsfree device
A
Mobile phone
8
Others
Renaming Paired Devices
Press b A Select Connectivity A Press b A
Select Bluetooth A Press b A Select Paired
Devices A Press b A Select a device A Press b
A Enter a name A Press b
^ Enter up to 16 characters.
Deleting Paired Devices
Bluetooth Operations
One File Transfer
CSending
Send one file or entry from Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks or
Data Folder (see P.9-2).
Open file or entry list, select a file or entry and
press e P
2
Select Send, Send Entry or Send My Card and
press b
3
Select Via Bluetooth and press b
4
5
6
Select a device and press b
Press b A Select Connectivity A Press b A
Select Bluetooth A Press b A Select Paired
Devices A Press b A Select a device A Press e
P A Select Delete A Press b A Press e
i
Pairing with Handsfree Devices
Start device search with handsfree devices for pairing.
Handset receives a connection request A Press
e i A Enter passcode A Press b
^ Activate Bluetooth on handset and set Visibility to On
beforehand (see P.9-4).
^ When there is no entry in Paired Devices, device search
starts.
C To send files/entries to unpaired devices, select More
Devices A Press b A Device search starts
C When transmission is in progress, press e i.
9
Connectivity
1
Press e i
Off Line Mode is set.
Edit title and press b
^ Source file or entry name remains unchanged. To proceed
without changing the title, press b.
Note H Pair with up to 32 devices. When full, device search is not
available.
9-5
7
8
Prepare recipient device
Press e i
Connecting… appears and transfer starts.
C When requested, enter passcode A Press b
CReceiving
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Switch On/Off
1
2
Choose On and press b
When connection is requested, Calling not
available during operation, OK? appears
C To accept connection request from unpaired devices, press
e i A Enter passcode A Press b A Off Line Mode
confirmation appears.
3
4
Press e i
5
6
Confirmation appears when file or entry is received
9
Connectivity
9-6
Enter Handset Code and press b
Off Line Mode is set and transfer starts.
C Press d W to cancel.
C Press g to end.
Press e i
C To cancel transfer, press d c A Press e i
Note H Bluetooth connection may not be possible with some Bluetooth devices.
^ Handset shall be connected to certified Bluetooth devices that meet the specification standards developed by Bluetooth SIG.
^ Depending on characteristics or specifications of the certified Bluetooth devices, connection or data transfers may fail, or
operational procedures, display content and actual operations may differ from those described in this manual.
^ Noise may interfere with wireless or handsfree conversations depending on the status of connected devices or signal condition.
^ For details about headset/handsfree devices, refer to specific device manuals.
All File Transfer
2
CSending
C To accept connection request from unpaired devices, press
e i A Enter passcode A Press b A Off Line Mode
confirmation appears.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth
1
^ When there is no entry in Paired Devices, device search starts.
C To send files/entries to unpaired devices, select More
Devices A Press b A Device search starts
C When transmission is in progress, press e i.
Select a device and press b
Press e i
6
To Add Entries
1 Select As New Items and press b
Press e i
Off Line Mode is set.
Enter Handset Code and press b
Prepare recipient handset
Select an item and press b
Press e i
Connecting… appears and transfer starts.
C When requested, enter passcode A Press b
C Picture data in Phone Book transfer? appears for Phone
Book. Press e i or d c.
CReceiving
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Switch On/Off
1
3
4
5
Off Line Mode is set.
Enter Handset Code and press b
Transfer starts and confirmation appears.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
When transfer completes, Standby returns.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
To Overwrite Existing Entries
1 Select Delete All & Save and press b
2 Press e i
9
Connectivity
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select Send All and press b
When connection is requested, Calling not
available during operation, OK? appears
When transfer completes, Standby returns.
^ When Phone Book is overwritten, all Owner Profile
contents are deleted, except handset phone number.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
Choose On and press b
9-7
Connecting Handsfree Devices
Pair with handsfree devices beforehand (see P.9-4).
Main Menu H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Handsfree Devices
1
The device is connected and P (checked) appears.
C When transmission is in progress, press e i.
C To disconnect, select a device A Press b
C To rename, select a device A Press e P A Select
Change Name A Press b A Enter a name A Press b
C To delete, select a device A Press e P A Select
Delete A Press b A Press e i
If paired with handset, devices are connected automatically.
Connectivity
To connect unpaired devices, press e i A
Enter passcode A Press b
Sound Output
Switch sound output between handset and handsfree devices.
During a call, press e P A Select BT Headset
A Press b A Choose On or Off A Press b
^ Choose On to use handsfree devices, and Off to use
handset.
Note H ^ During handsfree Voice Calls, adjust Earpiece Volume
on handset.
^ When using handsfree devices, place calls in Standby.
9-8
Bluetooth Settings
Select a device and press b
Connection Requested by Handsfree Devices
9
Tip H Devices marked with P reconnect to handset when
placing or receiving calls.
Device Name
Specify a Bluetooth name for handset
K802SH
H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Bluetooth Settings
Main Menu
A Device Name
Enter a name A Press b
^ Enter up to 16 characters. (Pictographs are not available.)
Bluetooth
Timeout
Set idle time before Bluetooth is deactivated
KNo Timeout
Main Menu
H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Bluetooth Settings
A Bluetooth Timeout
Select time A Press b
C To cancel, select No Timeout A Press b
Handsfree
Setting
Main Menu
Select whether to talk handsfree when placing
calls with handset
KHandsfree mode
H Connectivity A Bluetooth A Bluetooth Settings
A Handsfree Setting
Select Private mode or Handsfree mode A Press b
^ When placing calls with handsfree devices, only handsfree
conversation is available regardless of the setting.
Infrared
Tip H When transfer fails, Device not found. Reconnect?
appears. Take the precautions on the left and press e
i to try again.
Getting Started
Infrared Indicators
Precautions
d (grey)
Infrared transmission ready
d (red)
Infrared connection in progress
0
Infrared transmission in progress
Activating Infrared
Within 20 cm
Activate Infrared when transferring files.
Infrared is Off by default.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Infrared A Switch On/Off
face-to-face. Do not place objects between handsets.
^ Keep the ports face-to-face during transfer.
^ Transfers may fail under direct sunlight or fluorescent lights, or
near infrared equipment.
^ Clean the ports with a soft cloth. Files may not transfer
properly when ports are not clean.
^ Infrared transfers are disabled whilst handset is connected to
the Network (receiving/sending mail or information) or whilst
using Vodafone live! services.
^ 802SH complies with IrMC 1.1, but some files may not be
exchanged.
1
Choose On and press b
Standby returns [d (grey)].
C To cancel, choose Off A Press b
Authorisation Code
9
Connectivity
^ Bring handsets to within 20 cm and place the ports
Authorisation codes (four digits) are specific for infrared
transfers. Transfers are possible when Authorisation codes of
both handsets match. Authorisation code is unset by default.
9-9
Transferring Files
One File Transfer
CSending
Send one file or entry from Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks or
Data Folder (see P.9-2).
9
Connectivity
9-10
1
Open file or entry list, select a file or entry and
press e P
2
Select Send, Send Entry or Send My Card and
press b
3
4
5
Select Via Infrared and press b
6
7
Prepare recipient handset
Press e i
Off Line Mode is set.
Edit title and press b
^ Source file or entry name remains unchanged. To proceed
without changing the title, press b.
Within 15 seconds, press e i
Transfer starts. When finished, file or entry list returns.
CReceiving
Main Menu H Connectivity A Infrared A Switch On/Off
1
Choose On and press b
2
When infrared transmission is acquired, Calling
not available during operation, OK? appears
3
Press e i
4
Confirmation appears when file or entry is
received
5
Press e i
Infrared is activated. appears and Standby returns. Acquire
infrared transmission within five minutes.
Off Line Mode is set and transfer starts.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
C To cancel transfer, press d c A Press e i
All File Transfer
Handset Code and Authorisation code are required to
transfer all files (see P.9-9).
CSending
Main Menu H Connectivity A Infrared
Select Send All and press b
Press e i
Select an item and press b
Prepare recipient handset
Enter Authorisation code and press b
Within 15 seconds, press e i
Transfer starts. When finished, Send All menu returns.
C Picture data in Phone Book transfer? appears for Phone
Book. Press e i or d c.
CReceiving
Main Menu H Connectivity A Infrared A Switch On/Off
1
Choose On and press b
2
Calling not available during operation, OK?
appears
Off Line Mode is set.
Enter Handset Code and press b
Enter Authorisation code and press b
^ Enter the same Authorisation code as sender's.
When infrared transmission is acquired, Calling
not available during operation, OK? appears
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
Off Line Mode is set.
Enter Handset Code and press b
Press e i
7
To Add Entries
1 Select As New Items and press b
When transfer completes, Standby returns.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
To Overwrite Existing Entries
1 Select Delete All & Save and press b
2 Press e i
When transfer completes, Standby returns.
^ When Phone Book is overwritten, all Owner Profile
contents are deleted, except handset phone number.
C Press d 3 to cancel.
C Press g to end.
9
Connectivity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
Infrared is activated. appears and Standby returns. Acquire
infrared transmission within five minutes.
9-11
Receiving Folders
Receive folders from compatible handsets and save to
handset Data Folder.
^ 802SH does not support sending folders.
^ 802SH receives folders when it can newly create a folder, or a
folder with the same name already exists in the same layer as
that of sender's.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Infrared A Switch On/Off
9
PC Transmissions
Features:
3G/GSM GPRS Modem
Use handset as a modem for packet
data communication (see P.9-13)
Handset Manager
Exchange files between handset
and PCs (see P.9-14)
Install 3G/GSM GPRS Modem and Handset Manager on
your PC from the supplied Utility Software (see P.9-13).
Connectivity
1
Choose On and press b
2
When infrared transmission is acquired, Calling
not available during operation, OK? appears
3
Press e i
Computer
Off Line Mode is set and transfer starts. When finished, Standby
returns.
C If a folder with the same name already exists, press e i
or d c.
Operating System Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000 or XP2
Infrared is activated. appears and Standby returns. Acquire
infrared transmission within five minutes.
System Requirements
System requirements for 3G/GSM GPRS Modem and
Handset Manager:
^ Personal computer with a CD-ROM drive
^ Bluetooth port, infrared port1 or USB port
CPU
Pentium 266 MHz or faster processor
Memory
64 MB or more (256 MB or more
recommended)
1Not supported by 3G/GSM GPRS Modem
2Service Pack 1a
3G/GSM GPRS Modem and Handset Manager are not
compatible with Mac OS.
9-12
Utility Software
Install 3G/GSM GPRS Modem and Handset Manager on
your PC from the supplied Utility Software CD-ROM.
1
Insert Utility Software to CD-ROM drive
2
Click on the software to install
Utility Software programme opens automatically.
^ If the programme does not open automatically, use Windows
Explorer or My Computer to browse to the CD-ROM drive and
double-click on Launcher.exe.
^ Follow onscreen instructions.
3G/GSM GPRS Modem
9
Connectivity
Connect handset to PC via Bluetooth or USB to transmit
packet data.
^ Install 3G/GSM GPRS Modem on your PC from the supplied
Utility Software CD-ROM.
^ 3G/GSM GPRS Modem does not support infrared
transmissions.
^ For network settings on your PC, refer to the information
provided by your Internet Service Provider or the instruction
manual of your PC.
CBluetooth Wireless Connection
Activate handset Bluetooth connectivity (see P.9-4).
CUSB Cable Connection
Install the USB driver on your PC from the supplied Utility
Software CD-ROM. Connect handset to PC via optional
USB cable Ⅱ (refer to the installation guide supplied with
the USB cable).
Note H ^ Use handset as a modem only when signal conditions
are stable.
^ 3G/GSM GPRS Modem and Handset Manager cannot
be used simultaneously.
^ Disconnect USB cable from PC when not in use, to
save battery power on your PC.
Tip H Use Desktop Holder to charge handset during data
transmissions.
9-13
Handset Manager
Exchange files and information between handset and PC
via Bluetooth, infrared or USB.
Compatible files and information:
Network Settings
See indicated pages for the following items:
System Settings See P.2-14
Off Line Mode
9
Data Folder Files
Files in Pictures, Videos, Sounds & Ringtones
and Other Documents folders
Phone Book
Phone Book entries
Calendar
Schedule entries
Connectivity
Install Handset Manager on your PC from the supplied
Utility Software CD-ROM (see P.9-13).
CBluetooth or Infrared Wireless Connection
Activate handset Bluetooth or infrared connectivity (see
P.9-4, P.9-9), then use Handset Manager on your PC to
establish connection and transfer files/information.
CUSB Cable Connection
Install the USB driver on your PC from the supplied Utility
Software CD-ROM. Connect handset to PC via optional
USB cable Ⅱ (refer to the installation guide supplied with
the USB cable), then use Handset Manager on your PC to
transfer files and information.
Note H If you have troubles with transmissions between handset
and Handset Manager, refer to the information on
Handset Manager in "Troubleshooting" on P.16-6.
Select Network
See P.2-14
See P.2-18
During setting operation, press d W to return to the
previous window.
Add, Edit &
Delete
Main Menu
Add, edit or delete Networks
H Connectivity A Network Settings A Network
Settings A Select Network A Add New Network
Adding Network
Select Add A Press b A Enter a country code A
Press b A Enter a Network code A Press b A
Enter name A Press b A Select Select network type
A Press b A Select a Network type A Press b
^ Add up to 5 Networks.
^ After selecting Add New Network and pressing b, Network
list appears if Network has already been added. In this case,
press b again and perform above operations.
^ Use up to 3 digits for country code and Network code, and up
to 25 single-byte alphanumerics for name.
Editing Network
Select a Network A Press b A Select Change A
Press b A Edit settings
^ Edit in the same way as in Adding Network.
Deleting Network
Select a Network A Press b A Select Delete A
Press b
9-14
Set Preferred
Main Menu
Set priority of Networks to be selected when
Auto is set in Select Network (see P.2-14)
H Connectivity A Network Settings A Network
Settings A Select Network A Set Preferred
Inserting Network
Select a place to insert A Press b A Select Insert
A Press b A Select a Network A Press b
^ Network is inserted above the selected entry.
Adding Network to the End
Press b A Select Add to end A Press b A Select
a Network A Press b
Deleting Network
Network
Information
Main Menu
Use default settings. Change settings when specific Proxy/
Access Point settings are required.
Profile Contents
Application
See P.9-17 for details.
CWeb Settings
Setting
Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics
Proxy
Select from the list
Select Network Information A Press b
9
CMMS Settings
Check Network Information
H Connectivity A Network Settings A Network
Settings
Note
Profile Name
Setting
Note
Profile Name
Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics
Proxy
Select from the list
Relay Server URL
Up to 128 single-byte characters
Connectivity
Select a Network A Press b A Select Delete A
Press b
Internet Setting
CStreaming Settings
Setting
Note
Profile Name
Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics
Proxy Address
Up to 64 digits
Proxy Port Number
1 - 65535
Access Point
Select from the list
9-15
Proxy
Access Point
See P.9-18 for details.
Setting
See P.9-18 for details.
Note
Connectivity
9-16
Note
Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics
Access Point Name
Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics
Proxy Address
Up to 64 digits
APN
Up to 64 digits
Access Point
Select from the list
Authentication Type NONE, PAP or CHAP
Home
Up to 128 single-byte characters
User Name
Up to 32 single-byte characters
Port Number
1 - 65535
Password
Up to 16 single-byte characters
DNS
Up to 15 digits
Linger Time
1 - 99999 seconds
Authentication Type HTTP-BASIC or HTTP-DIGEST
9
Setting
Proxy Name
User Name
Up to 16 single-byte characters
Password
Up to 16 single-byte characters
Settings
Copy
Application
See P.9-15 for each setting item.
Create New
Create new Profiles for Web, MMS or
Streaming connections
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A Application
Select Web Settings, MMS Settings or Streaming
Settings A Press b A Select Create New A Press
b A Select an item (see P.9-15) A Press b A Enter
or select item A Press b A Press e P A
Select Set A Press b
Select Profiles to be used for Web, MMS or
Streaming connections
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A Application
Select Web Settings, MMS Settings or Streaming
Settings A Press b A Select a Profile A Press b
Edit
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A Application
Select Web Settings, MMS Settings or Streaming
Settings A Press b A Select a Profile A Press e
P A Select Copy A Press b A Enter Profile
Name (see P.9-15) A Press b
Delete
Delete Profiles
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A Application
Select Web Settings, MMS Settings or Streaming
Settings A Press b A Select a Profile A Press e
P A Select Delete A Press b A Press e
i
9
Connectivity
Activate
Copy Profiles
Edit Profiles
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A Application
Select Web Settings, MMS Settings or Streaming
Settings A Press b A Select a Profile A Press e
P A Select Edit A Press b A Select an item
(see P.9-15) A Press b A Edit item A Press b A
Press e P A Select Set A Press b A Press
ei
9-17
Proxy & Access Point
Additional Settings
See P.9-16 for each setting item.
Re-Provisioning
Create New
Create new Proxy and Access Point
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting
Select Proxy or Access Point A Press b A Select
Create New A Press b A Select an item (see P.9-16)
A Press b A Enter or select item A Press b A
Press e P A Select Set A Press b
Edit
Edit Proxy and Access Point
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting
9
Connectivity
Select Proxy or Access Point A Press b A Select a
Proxy/Access Point A Press b A Select an item (see
P.9-16) A Press b A Edit item A Press b A Press
e P A Select Set A Press b A Press e i
Copy
Copy Proxy and Access Point
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting
Select Proxy or Access Point A Press b A Select a
Proxy/Access Point A Press e P A Select Copy
A Press b A Enter name (see P.9-16) A Press b
Delete
Delete Proxy and Access Point
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting
Select Proxy or Access Point A Press b A Select a
Proxy/Access Point A Press e P A Select
Delete A Press b A Press e i
9-18
Main Menu
When Profiles are changed, perform Retrieve
NW Info and update the settings
H Connectivity A Internet Setting A
Re-Provisioning
Retrieving Network Information
Select Retrieve NW Info A Press b A Press e i
Updating
Select Execute Pending A Press b A Select an item
A Press b twice A Enter Handset Code A Press b
Clear DNS
Cache
Clear Vodafone live! Sever addresses stored
on handset
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting
Select Clear DNS Cache A Press b
White List
Create/Delete White List
Main Menu H Connectivity A Internet Setting A White List
Creating White List
By changing, you might not be able to take any push
service. appears A Press e i A Enter
Handset Code A Press b twice A Select Create
New A Press b A Select SMSC Address or SM
Orig. Address A Press b A Enter address A Press
b A Press e P A Select Set A Press b
^ Enter up to 18 digits for SMSC Address or SM Orig. Address.
Deleting White List
By changing, you might not be able to take any push
service. appears A Press e i A Enter Handset
Code A Press b twice A Select a number A Press e
P A Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
Backup & Restore
Back-up entries to SD Memory Card by function, and
restore to handset whenever necessary.
Precautions
Tasks. If the limit is reached during a transfer, the remaining
entries will not be received.
^ Backup or Restore is useful to back-up files (for a newly
purchased handset) or exchange files with SD Memory Card
compatible handsets.
9
Connectivity
All files of the following functions can be transferred at once:
B Phone Book
B Calendar
B Tasks
B Text Templates
B Bookmarks
All contents are copied to SD Memory Card as a single file.
(File name is the date of transfer.)
Backup file contents can only be accessed when restored to
handset.
^ Backup or Restore is not available when the battery is low.
^ When a V-application is paused, Application is currently
suspended. End application? appears. Press e i to
start Backup.
^ When SD Memory Card memory is low, files may not transfer
correctly.
^ Some items may not be transferable. Some backup files may
not be used on other Vodafone handsets, PCs and other
devices.
^ Handset stores up to 300 entries between Calendar and
9-19
Handset to Memory Card
Read "Precautions" on P.9-19 beforehand.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Backup/Restore A Backup
9
1
2
Enter Handset Code and press b
3
Select an item and press b
Press e i
Off Line Mode is set.
C When handset is connected to the Network, press b.
C Save phone book pictures as well? appears for Select All
or Phone Book. Press e i or d c.
C To cancel, press d 3.
Memory Card to Handset
^ Handset data is overwritten after restoring.
^ Read "Precautions" on P.9-19 beforehand.
Main Menu H Connectivity A Backup/Restore A Restore
1
2
Enter Handset Code and press b
3
4
Select an item and press b
Off Line Mode is set.
C When handset is connected to the Network, press b.
^ Some items may not be selected.
Select a file and press b
^ If there is more than one file, use transfer date to select.
Connectivity
Example: 041215XX indicates the file was transferred
on 15 December 2004. (XX: 00 - 99 or aa - zz)
^ For Select All, repeat Step 4 for each item.
C To delete files on SD Memory Card, select one A Press e
P A Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
5
9-20
Press e i
Press e i
C To cancel, press d 3.
Additional Functions
10-1
Mode Settings
Ringtone/
Ringvideo
Activate Normal, Meeting, Activity, Car, Headset or Manner
mode to switch handset settings automatically. Most suitable
handset responses for each mode are set by default.
Mode Settings
Select from six modes
KNormal
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Select a mode A Press b
Set to Default
Reset Mode Settings
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
10
Additional Functions
Select a mode A Press e P A Select Set to
Default A Press b A Enter Handset Code A Press
b A Press e i
Customising Incoming Communication Settings
Volume
Set Ringtone volume
KNormal/Headset: Level:3, Activity: Level:5, Meeting/ Car/ Manner: Silent
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select Volume A Press
b A Select a level A Press b
^ Level:5 is maximum. When Increasing Volume is set, volume
increases in the order of Level:1 - Level:5 every three seconds.
10-2
Set Ringtones or Ringvideos for Voice Calls,
TV Calls and New Messages
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Ringtone
Select a mode A Press e P A Select Personalise
A Press b A Select Ringtone/Ringvideos A Press b
A Select a mode A Press b A Select Assign Tone A
Press b A Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds A
Press b A Select sound A Press e P A Select
Assign A Press b
C To play sound files, press e P A Select Play A
Press b
Ringvideo
Select a mode A Press e P A Select Personalise
A Press b A Select Ringtone/Ringvideos A Press b
A Select a mode A Press b A Select Assign Video A
Press b A Select video A Press b
Duration (New Message)
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select Ringtone/
Ringvideos A Press b A Select For New Message
A Press b A Select Duration A Press b A Enter
time (01 - 15) A Press b
Tip H ^ V-application set as Screensaver that also responds to
incoming communications may take priority over.
^ New Message includes incoming Web information.
Vibration
Handset vibrates for incoming communications
KMeeting/Activity/Headset/Manner: On, Normal/Car: Off
Customising System Sounds
Keypad Tones
A tone sounds when a key is pressed
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select Vibration A Press
b A Choose On, Off or Link to Sound A Press b
^ Link to Sound: Handset vibrates only when Ringtone is a
compatible SMAF file.
Note H Disable vibration when charging.
External Light
Change Mobile Light colour
KGreen
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
C To disable External Light, choose Off A Press b
Any Key
Answer
Activate or deactivate Any Key Answer (see P.2-5)
KNormal/Meeting/Activity/Manner: Off, Car/Headset: On
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select Any Key Answer
A Press b A Choose On or Off A Press b
Select a mode A Press e P A Select Personalise A
Press b A Select System Sounds A Press b A Select
Keypad Tones A Press b A Select a pattern A Press b
C To assign Pattern 1, Pattern 2 or Pattern 3, select pattern
and press e P A Select Assign A Press b
C To check patterns, press b.
C To mute, choose Off A Press b
Warning Tone &
Power On/Off Sound
A tone sounds for error (Warning Tone) or when
turning power on/off
KWarning Tone: Sound Effect 6 (0.5 seconds)
Power On Sound/Power Off Sound: Sound Effect 8 (03 seconds)
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
Sound Pattern
Select a mode A Press e P A Select Personalise A
Press b A Select System Sounds A Press b A Select
Warning Tone, Power On Sound or Power Off Sound
A Press b A Select Tone/Sound A Press b A Select
Preset Sounds or My Sounds A Press b A Select
sound A Press e P A Select Assign A Press b
10
Additional Functions
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select External Light A
Press b A Select a mode A Press b A Select a
colour A Press b
KTouch Tone
Main Menu H Settings A Mode Settings
C To check patterns, press e P A Select Play A Press b
C To mute, choose Off A Press b
Duration
Select a mode A Press e P A Select
Personalise A Press b A Select System Sounds A
Press b A Select Warning Tone, Power On Sound
or Power Off Sound A Press b A Select Duration
A Press b A Select or enter duration A Press b
10-3
Display
System
Graphics
KPower On/Power Off: Preset Animation, Alarm/Incoming Call: Pattern 1
Display Settings
Wallpaper
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A System Graphics
Use Wallpaper to show an image in Standby
KWindsurfer
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Wallpaper
Select Preset Pictures, My Pictures or Other
Documents A Press b A Select an image A Press
b twice
10
Additional Functions
10-4
Use images for Power On/Off, incoming calls
and Alarm windows
C To cancel, select Blank A Press b
^ Select My Pictures or Other Documents to use images in
Data Folder (Pictures or Other Documents). When the current
Wallpaper is an image in Data Folder, the image appears.
Press e X to select another image.
Tip H ^ When a V-application is set as Screensaver, Wallpaper
may not appear.
^ Using Wallpaper shortens Battery Time.
Power On/Power Off
Select Power On or Power Off A Press b A Select
Preset Animation, My Pictures or Other Documents
A Press b
C For My Pictures and Other Documents, select an image
A Press b twice
Alarm/Incoming Calls
Select Alarm or Incoming Call A Press b A Select
from Pattern 1 to Pattern 3, My Pictures or Other
Documents A Press b twice
C For My Pictures and Other Documents, select an image
A Press b twice
^ Select My Pictures or Other Documents to use images in
Data Folder (Pictures or Other Documents). When the current
Wallpaper is an image in Data Folder, the image appears.
Press e X to select another image. When the image is
too large, a rectangle appears. Use G to specify display area
and press b.
Note H ^ Ringtone and Ringvideo images for Mode Settings take
priority over System Graphics for incoming calls.
^ Ringtone, Ringvideo and Picture images for Phone
Book entries take priority over System Graphics for
incoming calls with caller ID.
Clock &
Calendar
Show or hide Clock/Calendar in Standby
Font Settings
Change the weight of handset fonts
KNormal
KClock: Large, Calendar: Off
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Clock & Calendar
Select a weight A Press b
Show Clock
Select Show Clock A Press b A Select Large,
Small, World Clock or Off A Press b
Calendar
Select Calendar A Press b A Select 1 month,
2 months or Off A Press b
CCalendar Contents
N
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Font Settings
J
Create a short text message to appear on
Display each time handset power is activated
KOff
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Greeting Message
Switch On/Off
Select Switch On/Off A Press b A Choose On or
Off A Press b
Edit Message
Select Edit Message A Press b A Enter a message
A Press b
^ Enter up to 10 characters.
Show Operator
Name
Show or hide the name of your service
provider in Standby
KOff
Tip H ^ Calendar appears on Wallpaper.
^ When a V-application is set as Screensaver, Calendar
may not appear.
H Settings A Display Settings A Show Operator
Main Menu
Name
Choose On or Off A Press b
Language
10
Additional Functions
Current Date
^ Highlighted
Scheduled Date
^ Underlined (see P.11-2 "Calendar"
for schedules)
Greeting
Message
Switch handset user interface between
Japanese and English
KAutomatic
Main Menu H Settings A 言語選択
Select Automatic, 日本語 or English A Press b
^ When Automatic is set, mode changes according to System
Settings (see P.2-14).
10-5
Sound Settings
Light Settings
Backlight
See indicated pages for the following items:
Select Backlight illumination time
K15 seconds
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Backlight
Select time A Press b
C To deactivate, choose Off A Press b
Brightness
Select Display Brightness from four levels
KLevel:2
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Brightness
Press C (Light) or D (Dark) A Press b
10
Additional Functions
10-6
Display Saving
Select a period of inactivity after which Display
shuts down
K2 minutes
Main Menu H Settings A Display Settings A Display Saving
Select a period A Press b
Volume
See P.10-2 Vibration
See P.10-3
Ringtone/
Ringvideo
See P.10-2 External Light
See P.10-3
System Sounds
See P.10-3
Clock Settings
Set Date/Time
Set the date and time (the day of the week is
set automatically)
Main Menu H Settings A Time & Date A Set Date/Time
Enter the year A Enter the month A Enter the day A
Press b A Enter the time (24-hour format) A Press b
Note H When removing the battery for replacement, etc., Clock
settings remain. However, should the handset go without
power for an extended period of time (approximately one
week), Clock will need to be reset.
Time/Date
Format
Change date/time format
KTime Format: 24 Hour, Date Format: Y/M/D
Main Menu H Settings A Time & Date
Change Time Zone or activate Daylight Saving
KTime Zone: Tokyo, Daylight Saving: Off
Main Menu H Settings A Time & Date
Time Zone
Select Set Time Zone A Press b A Use F to select
a Time Zone A Press b
C If your zone is not preset, press e P A Select Set
Custom Zone A Press b A Enter city name A Press b
A Enter time difference A Press b
Daylight Saving
Select Daylight Saving A Press b A Choose On or
Off A Press b
^ Activate Daylight Saving to advance the selected area's time
by one hour.
Calendar
Format
Select whether to start the week on Sunday or
Monday
KSunday-Saturday
Main Menu H Settings A Time & Date A Calendar Format
Select Sunday-Saturday or Monday-Sunday A
Press b
10
Additional Functions
Tip H ^ When Clock has not been set, --/--/-- --:-- appears for
date and time.
^ To correct numbers, use F to move cursor and
re-enter digits.
^ Choose a Clock type or use Calendar for Standby
(see P.10-5).
Time Zone/
Daylight Saving
Time Format
Select Time Format A Press b A Select 24 Hour or
12 Hour A Press b
Date Format
Select Date Format A Press b A Select D.M.Y,
M-D-Y or Y/M/D A Press b
10-7
User Dictionary
Entries (Partly Japanese Only)
Save up to 100 frequently used words/phrases. Assign a
reading (keyword) in hiragana to each entry.
In text entry windows, enter a reading and convert. Saved
words/phrases appear among word suggestions.
Save up to five words/phrases per reading.
New Entry
Save words/phrases to User Dictionary
Main Menu H Settings A User Dictionary A New Entry
10
Enter a word/phrase A Press b A Enter a reading
(keyword) A Press b
Additional Functions
^ Enter up to 15 characters per word/phrase and eight
characters in hiragana per reading.
Edit/Delete
Edit or delete entries
H Settings A User Dictionary A Edit Dictionary A
Main Menu
Select a word
Edit
Press e P A Select Edit A Press b A Edit
the word/phrase A Press b A Edit reading A Press
b A Press e i
Delete
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Press e i
10-8
802SH Download Dictionary (Japanese Only)
Download specialised 802SH Download Dictionaries from
Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site. Activate up to two
dictionaries at one time to improve handset character
conversion. Dictionary words appear among word suggestions.
For details, access Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet
site (see P.13-11).
Acquire
Dictionary
Activate downloaded dictionary
Main Menu H Settings A User Dictionary A Acquire Dictionary
Select a number A Press b A Select a dictionary A
Press b
C To replace current dictionary, press e P A Select
Change A Press b A Select a dictionary A Press b
Cancel
Cancel dictionary
Main Menu H Settings A User Dictionary A Acquire Dictionary
Select a number A Press e P A Select Cancel
A Press b
Call Settings
Additional Settings
See indicated pages for the following items:
Display Call Info
Diverts
See P.12-2,
P.12-4
Show Your
Number
See P.12-10
Call Waiting
See P.12-5
Call Barring
See P.12-7
Show or hide Call Cost and Call Time after each call
KOn
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Display Call Info
Choose On or Off A Press b
International Call
Minute Minder
Int'l Prefix
Remind with a beep every one minute during a call
KOff
Save frequently used international prefix
K0046010
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Int'l Calling
Select Int'l Prefix A Press b A Enter a prefix A
Press b
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Minute Minder
Choose On or Off A Press b
Display Call
Timer
Show or hide elapsed Call Time during a call
KOn
Main Menu
Change, add or delete Country Codes
H Settings A Call Settings A Int'l Calling A Country
Codes
Change
Select a country A Press b A Select Change A
Press b A Enter a country name A Press b A
Enter country code A Press b
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Display Call Timer
Choose On or Off A Press b
Additional Functions
Country Codes
10
Add
Select a blank entry A Press b A Enter a country
name A Press b A Enter country code A Press b
Delete
Select Delete A Press b A Press e i
10-9
Handset Security
Changing PIN1 or PIN2
Change PIN
PIN
Change PIN1 or PIN2
C Activate Initial PIN Entry first.
For more information on PIN, see P.1-7.
Activate Initial PIN Entry
Switch On/Off
Main Menu
Select whether to require PIN every time
handset is turned on (with USIM Card inserted)
KOff
H Settings A Security A PIN Entry A Switch On/
Off
Choose On or Off A Press b A Enter PIN1 A Press b
10
Additional Functions
10-10
PIN Lock
PIN1 Lock or PIN2 Lock is activated if PIN1 or PIN2 is
incorrectly entered three times consecutively. To cancel PIN1
Lock or PIN2 Lock, follow these steps.
Open a function requiring PIN1 or PIN2 A Enter
Personal Unblocking Key (PUK Code) A Press b A
Enter new PIN1 or PIN2 A Press b A Re-enter PIN1
or PIN2 A Press b
^ For information on Personal Unblocking Key (PUK Code),
contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information
(see P.16-32).
^ If PUK Code is incorrectly entered ten times, USIM Card is
locked. (Count continues even if handset power is turned off.)
^ For procedures required to unlock USIM Card, contact
Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
Main Menu H Settings A Security
PIN1
Select PIN Entry A Press b A Select Change PIN A
Press b A Enter current PIN1 A Press b A Enter
new PIN1 A Press b A Re-enter new PIN1 A Press b
PIN2
Select Change PIN2 A Press b A Enter current
PIN2 A Press b A Enter new PIN2 A Press b A
Re-enter new PIN2 A Press b
Handset Locks
Handset Lock
Activate Handset Lock to require Handset
Code each time handset power is turned on
KOff
Phone Lock
Restrict access to handset functions
Main Menu H Settings A Security A Handset Lock
KOff
Main Menu H Settings A Security A Phone Lock
Choose On or Off A Press b A Enter Handset Code
A Press b
Enter Handset Code A Press b
C To unlock, enter Handset Code in Standby or during a call
A Press b
^ Phone Lock remains active even if handset power is
deactivated, then reactivated.
When Phone Lock is Active
Protect Phone Book entries from accidental
alteration and restrict access to Phone Book
information
KOff
Main Menu H Settings A Security A Phone Book Lock
Choose On or Off A Press b A Enter Handset Code
A Press b
Note H When Phone Book Lock is active, the following Phone
Book operations are disabled:
B Searching, saving, editing and dialling, including
Speed Dial (see P.4-10).
B Creating QR Codes from Phone Book entries or
Owner Profile (see P.11-14).
10
Additional Functions
^ In Standby, press g for 2+ seconds to deactivate handset
power, ; for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Keypad
Lock, 0 - 9 to enter Handset Code or i to edit
Handset Code entry.
^ Emergency calls to Police (110), Fire (119) and Coast
Guard (118) are possible.
^ During a call, press g to end the call, e or b to show or
hide Options, d to mute Microphone, f to switch
between callers in Call Waiting or 0 - 9 to enter
Handset Code or i to edit Handset Code entry.
^ Answer calls by pressing f or keys for Any Key Answer
(see P.2-5), or reject calls by pressing g. Press d to
forward incoming calls (when When Busy is On).
Phone Book
Lock
10-11
Secret Mode
Changing Handset Code
Activate Secret mode to open Secret mode entries.
Show
Secret Data
Change
Handset Code
Activate or cancel Secret mode
K9999
KOff
Main Menu H Settings A Security A Show Secret Data
Choose On A Press b A Enter Handset Code A
Press b
C To exit Secret mode, choose Off A Press b
Note H Do not save confidential information in Phone Book. Handset
Code and thus Secret mode entries may be compromised.
When Secret Mode is Off
10
Additional Functions
10-12
Whenever necessary, change Handset Code
Phone Book Names/Picture images do not appear for incoming
calls/mail from numbers/addresses in Secret mode entries.
Personal Ringtones/Ringvideos are disabled. Names for
numbers in Secret mode entries do not appear in Dialled
Numbers, Received Calls or list of received messages. Names
saved in Dialled Numbers or Received Calls before an entry is
converted to a Secret mode entry appear even if handset is not
in Secret mode.
Main Menu H Settings A Security A Change Handset Code
Enter current Handset Code A Press b A Enter
new Handset Code A Press b A Re-enter new
Handset Code A Press b
Memory Settings
Memory Status
Check handset or SD Memory Card memory status
Main Menu H Settings A Memory Settings A Memory Status
Select Handset or Memory Card A Press b
Tip H A portion of SD Memory Card memory is reserved for
storing copyright information, etc.
Example: 64 MB SD Memory Card
Approximately 60.6 MB is available for use.
Format Card
Format SD Memory Card
LBS (Location Based Service) Settings
LBS URL
Setting
Use when accessing to a special URL
Main Menu H Settings A LBS Settings A LBS URL Setting
Select URL A Press b
Datum On/Off
Choose whether or not to send your location
info automatically upon request
KOn
Main Menu H Settings A LBS Settings A Datum On/Off
Choose On or Off A Press b A Enter Handset Code
A Press b
Main Menu H Settings A Memory Settings A Format Card
Enter Handset Code A Press b A Press e i
Additional Functions
Note H ^ When using a new SD Memory Card, format it for use
with 802SH before trying to save files, etc.
^ Before formatting an SD Memory Card, make sure
there is no important information saved on the card.
Format Card deletes all files from SD Memory Card.
^ Never remove SD Memory Card or battery while formatting.
^ An improperly formatted SD Memory Card may not
function as it should with 802SH.
10
10-13
Reset
Reset Settings
Cancel custom settings and return handset
functions to their default settings
Main Menu H Settings A Master Reset A Reset Settings
Enter Handset Code A Press b A Press e i
A Press b
^ Phone Book entries are unaffected.
Reset All
Clear all Phone Book entries, files in Data
Folder, etc.
Main Menu H Settings A Master Reset A Reset All
Enter Handset Code A Press b A Press e i
A Press b
10
Additional Functions
10-14
Note H Files removed using Reset All cannot be recovered.
Handset Code returns to the default setting.
Tools
11-1
Calendar
Saving Entries
Organise daily, weekly, monthly and yearly schedule.
Save up to 300 entries between Calendar and Tasks (see
P.11-18).
Opening Calendar
Main Menu H Tools
1
Tools
11
Select Calendar and press b
N
J
2004/12/15
Calendar of the current month opens.
C When Clock is unset, set Time Zone A
Press b A Enter the date A Press b
A Enter the time A Press b A
Calendar opens
Options
CKey Assignments
; Open the previous month
B
Cursor left
: Open the next month
A
Cursor right
0 Select the current date
e
Options
d
Exit (Back)
C
Cursor up
D
Cursor down
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select a day and press b
9
No Reminder
1 Select No Reminder and press b
Setting Reminder
1 Select from At Start time to 1 day before
and press b
Back
Select Add New Entry and press b
Enter subject and press b
^ Enter up to 16 characters.
Enter location and press b
^ Enter up to 16 characters.
Select a category and press b
Enter start date and press b
Enter start time and press b
Select duration and press b
C To set end date/time, select Other A Press b A Enter date
A Press b A Enter time A Press b
C For custom Reminder Time, select Other A Press b
A Enter date A Press b A Enter time A Press b
10 Select Description: and press b
11-2
schedule details and press b
11 Enter
^ Enter up to 128 characters.
^ See "Calendar Options" on the right and P.11-4 to customise
schedule related settings.
dq
12 Press
The entry is saved.
Note H When entries are transferred to other devices, date/time
or other information may appear different depending on
the recipient device.
Tip H h (Reminder set) or i (Reminder unset) appears on
scheduled day. (Indicator disappears after scheduled time.)
At Reminder Time
Stopping Reminder Tone
Press d 3, g, c or i.
Tip H If Reminder Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound.
Press g after the call to activate Reminder.
Assign Tone
Select tones for Reminder
KPattern 1
Preset Sounds
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/
Video: A Press b A Select Assign Tone A Press
b A Select Preset Sounds A Press b A Select a
tone A Press b A Press e U
My Sounds (Data Folder)
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/
Video: A Press b A Select Assign Tone A Press
b A Select My Sounds A Press b A Select a tone
A Press b
Assign Video
Set a video file to play with Reminder
Tools
Reminder operates according to the settings.
Calendar Options
Follow these steps after Step 11 on the left.
11
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/
Video: A Press b A Select Assign Video A Press
b A Select a video file A Press b
Duration
Set how long Reminder operates
K15 seconds
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Duration: A
Press b A Select time A Press b
C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter
time A Press b
11-3
Repeat
Assign schedule type (once only, daily,
weekly, monthly or yearly) for each event
KOnce Only
Once Only Schedule
Select Repeat: A Press b A Select Once Only A
Press b
Repetitive Schedule
Select Repeat: A Press b A Select from Day to
Every Year A Press b A Enter repeat time (00 - 99
times) A Press b
^ Start date and time are reflected in the items. For Month, if the
day is 29, 30 or 31, entries are saved for the valid months only.
^ Repeat time is not available for Every Year; the schedule is
repeated until deleted.
^ Set Repeat time to 00 to repeat until deleted.
Tools
Secret
Set Secret mode for entries
KOff
Select Secret: A Press b A Choose On or Off A
Press b
11
^ Secret mode entries appear only when handset is in Secret
mode (see P.10-12).
Opening Entries
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar
1
2
3
Select a date and press b
Select an entry and press b
Press d W to end
Memory Status
Open Calendar or an entry, and follow these steps.
Press e P A Select Memory Status A Press b
11-4
Editing Entries
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar A Select an entry
1
2
3
4
Press e P
Select Edit and press b
Select an item and press b
^ See "Saving Entries" on P.11-2 - 11-3 for more.
When finished editing, press d q
Deleting Entries
This
Appointment
Delete one entry
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar A Select an entry
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A Select
This Appointment A Press b A Press e i
All This Day
Delete all entries of the day
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar A Select a date
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Select All This Day A Press b A Press e i
All This Month
Delete all entries of the month
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar A Select a month
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Select All This Month A Press b A Press e i
^ All This Month appears only when there is an entry in the
month.
Up to Last
Month
Delete entries up to the end of the previous month
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A Select
Up to Last Month A Press b A Press e i
All
Appointments
Delete all entries
Main Menu H Tools A Calendar
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A Select
All Appointments A Press b A Press e i
Tip H Delete another Entry? appears when repetitive
schedules are included, except for All Appointments.
B To delete, press e i.
B To retain repetitive entries, press d c.
Setting Alarm
Set Alarm to sound at a specific time once, each day or on
specific days of the week.
^ Save up to 5 Alarm settings.
^ Customise Duration, Alarm Volume, Alarm Tone and Vibration.
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms
1
2
3
4
Select an entry and press b
Enter time and press b
Select Repeat: and press b
Every Day
1 Select Every Day and press b
Specified Day of the Week
1 Select Selected Days and press b
2 Select a day of the week and press b
Tools
^ Up to Last Month does not appear when there is no entry up
to the end of the previous month.
Alarm
11
The day is set and P appears.
^ To cancel, highlight the selected day and press b.
3 Repeat 2 to select more
4 Press d q when finished
Once Only
1 Select Once Only and press b
11-5
5
Press d q
6
Press g to exit
Alarm is set.
^ For more settings, repeat Steps 1 - 5.
Assign
Alarm Tone
Select tones for Alarm
KPattern 1
Standby returns and e appears.
H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Assign
Main Menu
Tone/Video:
At Alarm Time
Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related
settings. Image appears if System Graphics is set. However,
SMAF file images take priority over System Graphics.
Stopping Alarm Tone
Press d 3, g, c or i.
Tools
11
Alarm Options
Snooze
When Snooze (see right) is set, Alarm repeats at the set interval.
^ Press d 3 or c to cancel Snooze.
^ Accept incoming calls. After each call, press g to
reactivate Snooze.
^ Snooze is cancelled automatically 60 minutes after initial
Alarm Time.
Tip H If Alarm Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound.
Press g after the call to reactivate Alarm.
Preset Sounds
Select Assign Alarm Tone A Press b A Select
Preset Sounds A Press b A Select a tone A Press
b A Press e U
My Sounds (Data Folder)
Select Assign Alarm Tone A Press b A Select My
Sounds A Press b A Select a tone A Press b
Assign
Alarm Video
Main Menu
Set a video file to play with Alarm
H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Assign
Tone/Video:
Select Assign Alarm Video A Press b A Select a
video file A Press b
Snooze
Alarm operates repeatedly after Alarm Time
KEvery 5 minutes
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Snooze:
Select an interval A Press b
C For custom intervals, select Other A Press b A Enter
interval A Press b
11-6
Alarm Volume
Cancelling & Reactivating Alarm
Select Alarm Volume from seven levels
KLevel:5
H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Alarm
Main Menu
Volume:
Select a level A Press b
Duration
Switch Off
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Select an entry
Press e P A Select Switch Off A Press b
^ e disappears.
^ Reactivate Alarm to use the same settings.
Select duration for Alarm
K10 seconds
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Duration:
Select duration A Press b
Switch On
Reactivate Alarm with the same settings, or
change current settings
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Select an entry
C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter
time A Press b
Handset vibrates at Alarm Time
KOn
Press e P A Select Switch On A Press b
C To change settings, press e P A Select Select A
Press b A Edit settings (see P.11-5)
Deleting Alarm
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Open an entry A Vibration:
Select On, Link to Sound or Off A Press b
Reset Alarm
Tools
Vibration
Cancel Alarm and retain the settings
11
Delete Alarm setting one by one
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms A Select an entry
Press e P A Select Reset Alarm A Press b
A Press e i
Clear All
Delete all Alarm settings
Main Menu H Tools A Alarms
Select Clear All A Press b A Press e i
11-7
Calculator
Money Converter
Use Calculator for basic arithmetic (up to 12 digits) and
percentage calculation, or currency conversion (Money
Converter).
Key Assignments
Tools
11
11-8
+ (Add)
B
CM (Clear Memory)
e*
- (Subtract)
A
RM (Recall Memory)
e*
x (Multiply)
C
M+ (Add Memory)
e*
÷ (Divide)
D
. (Decimal)
;
= (Equal)
b
+/- (Switch)
:
C•CE (Clear)
i
% (Percent)
f
*Press e P to use these functions.
Main Menu H Tools
1
2
Select Calculator and press b
^ Use Keypad to enter numbers, and the assigned keys to calculate.
Press g to end
C For conversion between domestic and foreign currencies,
follow these steps after entering numbers. Conversion is
based on the preset exchange rate.
Press e P A Select Money Converter A
Press b A Select to Domestic or to Foreign A
Press b
C To change exchange rate, open Calculator and follow these
steps. Exchange rate of 1:1 is set by default.
Press e P A Select Money Converter A
Press b A Select Exchange Rate A Press b A
Select Domestic or Foreign A Press b A Enter
rate A Press b
Tip H ^ Incoming calls clear calculations. However, values
saved in Memory remain.
^ Clear Memory before starting Memory calculations.
^ Numbers saved in Memory remain even if Calculator is
closed, but are cleared when handset power is turned off.
3
Voice Recorder
Recording Voice
Use handset microphone to record voice onto SD Memory Card.
^ Make sure battery is adequately charged. When battery is low
(L), Voice Recorder does not record. If battery becomes low
(L) while recording, Voice Recorder shuts down automatically.
^ Select For Message to attach to MMS messages, or Extend
Voice to record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds.
^ To save recorded voice to handset memory, select For Message.
^ Conversations during calls cannot be recorded.
^ If incompatible microphone is connected, recording may fail.
1
Select Voice Recorder and
press b
Recording window opens.
C Record Time: see P.11-10
2
Nc
J
Voice Recorder
Ready to Record
Press b
Recording starts.
Options
Back
Recording is saved to SD Memory Card.
^ To resume recording, press b.
Recording is saved as a new file.
For Message
1 Press b to stop
^ Recording stops automatically when maximum
recording time is reached.
C To play the recording, select Playback A Press b
B Press e V to pause.
C To start over without saving, press d 3 A
Repeat from Step 2
C To attach to a MMS message, select Save and Send
A Press b A See P.14-9
B When Choice is selected in Save Rec. to setting,
select Handset Memory or Memory Card A Press
b A See P.14-9
2 Select Save and press b
C When Choice is selected in Save Rec. to setting,
select Handset Memory or Memory Card A Press b
Tools
Main Menu H Tools
Extended Voice
1 Press b to stop
11
Note H ^ Do not subject handset to shocks. May cause noise or
skipping.
^ Recording window may take long to open depending on
the amount of information on SD Memory Card.
Tip H ^ Default file name is also the recorded date and time,
which can be changed afterwards.
^ Alarm is disabled while recording, and starts when finished.
11-9
Recording Settings
Record Time
Playback
Select Extended Voice or For Message
KFor Message
Main Menu H Tools A Voice Recorder
Press e P A Select Record Time A Press b A
Select Extended Voice or For Message A Press b
Save Rec. to
Select storage media for For Message
KHandset Memory
Main Menu H Tools A Voice Recorder
Tools
11
Press e P A Select Save Rec. to A Press b
A Select Handset Memory, Memory Card or Choice
A Press b
^ Set to Choice to select media after every recording.
^ Sounds play from handset speaker.
^ Alternatively, use Multi Stereo Headphones (see P.7-3).
Main Menu H Tools A Voice Recorder
1
2
3
Press e P
Select My Sounds and press b
Select a file and press b
Playback starts.
C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.
N
J
Voice Player
04-12-15_16-08
Pause
Incoming Calls/Mail during Playback
C When calls arrive, playback stops and Ringtone sounds.
C For handset responses to incoming mail, see P.7-4.
11-10
Back
Barcode
Scan printed barcodes with mobile camera or download QR
Codes via Web or MMS.
^ Handset automatically detects code type and reads code data.
^ In Continuous Scan mode, scan up to 50 UPC (JAN) or 16 QR
Codes at one time. In some cases, continuous scans may be
disrupted depending on barcode data or data size.
^ Zoom function is not available.
1
Frame barcode in the centre of Display
2
Press b
3
Barcode recognition tone sounds and scan
results appear
^ Keep handset approximately 10 cm away from the barcode.
^ Slide Portrait/Macro Selector to Macro to scan barcodes.
C Press : to use Mobile Light.
Mobile camera scans the barcode.
C To stop scan, press d 3 A Repeat from Step 1
C Using Scan Results: see P.11-12
C To start over, while scan results appear, press d W A
Press e i A Repeat from Step 1
Note H If handset temperature is too high, Heat warning:
camera temporarily disabled. appears and mobile
camera cannot be activated. If handset temperature
becomes too high while scanning, Temperature is high.
Closing camera... appears and scanning ends.
Tools
Tip H ^ UPC (Universal Product Code) or JAN (Japanese
Article Number) is a series of varying width vertical lines
(called bars) and spaces. Bars and spaces together are
elements, combinations of which represent different
numbers. Handset cannot read other one-dimensional
barcodes (ITF Code, Code39, Codabar/NW-7, etc.).
^ QR (Quick Response) Code is a matrix symbology
consisting of an array of nominally square cells. It
allows omni-directional reading of up to 7,366
characters—numeric, alphanumeric, byte data as well
as kanji and kana.
Main Menu H Barcode A Scan Barcode
11
11-11
CUsing Scan Results
Continuous Scan
After scanning, Scan complete scan new? appears.
^ To continue scanning
Press e i A Frame barcode in the centre of
Display A Press b
Place Calls1
Select a number starting with TEL:2 A Press
b A The number appears A Press f
Send Mail3
Select a mail address including @ A Press b
A New Message window opens (See P.14-7 for
more.)
Quote &
Send Mail
Press e P A Select Send Message A
Press b A Preview appears A Press b
To use a part of text, press e P A
Select Send Message A Press b A
Preview appears A Press e P A
Select Cut A Press b A Highlight the first
character of the text block to cut A Press b
A Highlight the text block A Press b
(See P.14-7 for more.)
Save to
Phone Book1, 3
Select a number starting with TEL:2 or a mail
address including @ A Press e P A
Select Save to Ph.Book A Press b
(See P.4-3.)
Access Mobile
Internet Sites4
Select a URL starting with http:// or rtsp:// A
Press b (Handset connects to the Network.)
Save to Data
Folder (Images &
Melodies)
Select an image or melody file A Press e
P A Select To Data Folder A Press b
^ To exit
Press d c A Scan results appear
Split Data
C After scanning, Split data scan next symbol? appears.
^ To continue scanning
Press e i A Frame barcode in the centre of
Display A Press b
^ To exit
Tools
11
Press d c A Delete all information, OK?
appears A Press e i
C Data will not be saved until all split data is scanned.
C The scanning status appears on the first line of Display. For
example, b indicates that 1 of 4 codes has been scanned.
Note H ^ Scanning may fail if the barcode is smudged or unclear.
^ It is recommended to use Mobile Light when scanning
barcodes indoors.
^ Capture one barcode at a time. Otherwise handset may
fail to scan.
1Available when text is in TEL:U format.
2Text strings of 10 to 24 digits starting with 0 are recognised as
phone numbers.
3Available when text is in U@U format.
4Available when text is in http://U or rtsp://U format.
U represents one or more alphanumerics.
11-12
Save to Scanned
Results
Press e P A Select Save A Press b
^ Save up to 10 items.
Copy Text
Press e P A Select Copy A Press b
A Highlight the first character of the text block
to copy A Press b A Highlight the text block
A Press b
^ Paste the copied text into a text entry window.
Note H Operations (dialling, sending messages, etc.) are
available only when TEL:, @ http:// or rtsp:// is attached.
Tip H When MEMORY: or MAILTO: appears in scan results,
press b to save underlined text to Phone Book or send
messages. All underlined items are entered. However, text
after an invalid character is not underlined and is not copied.
Scanning during
Text Entry
Insert scan results into current cursor position
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Scan A Press b A Select Scan Code A Press b A
Frame barcode in the centre of Display A Press b
Note H Barcodes/text cannot be scanned when:
B Entering text during a call
B Saving scan results or during infrared transmission
B Using E-Book
B V-application is active
B Entering URL for Streaming
Open Barcode
Read saved barcode images in Data Folder
Select a barcode image A Press b
C For split data, press e i to scan next code.
B To cancel, press d W A Delete all information,
OK? appears A Press e i
C When scanning fails, select next barcode image manually A
Press b
Tools
Main Menu H Barcode A Open Barcode
11
Note H ^ Resized QR Codes may not be scanned.
^ For invalid codes, This data may be incorrect. appears.
Scanned
Results
Open files saved in Scanned Results
Main Menu H Barcode A Scanned Results
Select a file A Press b
^ The file cannot be re-saved.
11-13
Creating QR Codes
Create QR Codes from entered text, Phone Book, Pictures,
Sound & Ringtones, and Text Templates.
^ Save up to the equivalent of 513 digits or 131 kanji per QR Code.
^ Large size items are divided into maximum of 16 QR Codes.
^ Created QR Codes are saved to Data Folder (Pictures).
Phone Book
Encode name, reading, phone numbers, mail
addresses and note
Main Menu H Barcode A Create QR Code A Phone Book
Select an entry A Press b A QR Code appears A
Press e P A Select Save A Press b
Tools
11
^ Only name, reading, phone numbers, mail addresses and note
are encoded.
Text Input
Enter and encode text
Main Menu H Barcode A Create QR Code A Text Input
Enter text A Press b A QR Code appears A Press
e P A Select Save A Press b
Data Folder
Encode melody/image files or Text Templates
in Data Folder
Main Menu H Barcode A Create QR Code A Data Folder
Select a folder A Press b A Select an item A Press
b A QR Code appears A Press e P A Select
Save A Press b
11-14
Switching Storage Media
Before saving, press e P A Select Save To
A Press b A Select Handset or Memory Card A
Press b
Attaching to MMS Mail
Before saving, press e P A Select Send As
A Press b (See P.14-7 for more.)
Incoming Calls while Creating
Contents are temporarily saved. End the call to return.
Text Scanner
Scan text (URLs, mail addresses, phone numbers or roman
letters) with mobile camera.
^ Scan up to 60 single-byte characters within 3 lines. Scanning
over 35 characters at one time may yield poor results.
^ Some symbols cannot be read.
^ Zoom function is not available.
1
Frame text in the centre of Display
^ Adjust to frame text in [ ].
Letters at the ends may be distorted.
^ Text mode in Reversed Text setting is
set to Auto each time Text Scanner is
activated. Change the mode if text is
distorted in Auto (such as white text in
black background).
^ Keep handset approximately 10 cm
away from text.
^ Slide Portrait/Macro Selector to Macro to
scan fine text.
C Press : to use Mobile Light.
NKX67k1IAAJ
Text Scanner
Capture
characters.
1
2
Scan when bar is
the bluest.
Options
Back
Focus
Adjustment Bar
(Better focus in
darker blue)
2
Press b
3
Use E to select a line and press b
Mobile camera scans text.
C To stop scan, press i A Repeat from Step 1
Tools
Note H ^ Text Scanner is disabled while music plays or
V-application is active. When a confirmation to stop the
function appears, press e i to proceed.
^ If handset temperature is too high, Heat warning:
camera temporarily disabled. appears and Text
Scanner cannot be activated. If handset temperature
becomes too high while scanning, Temperature is
high. Closing camera... appears and scanning ends.
Main Menu H Barcode A Scan Text
11
^ Text Scanner reads one line per scan.
11-15
4
Scan results appear
Handset automatically recognises scan results as a URL, Email
Address, Phone Number or Text. If handset setting is incorrect,
select the correct mode.
C To change mode, press e P A Select Change Mode
A Press b A Select a type A Press b (Scan results and
alternatives list change accordingly.)
C To edit, press e P A Select Select/Edit A Press b
A Text entry window opens A Move cursor to the character
to edit A Select an alternative from the list or enter the
correction directly from Keypad
C To start over, press d W A Press e i A
Repeat from Step 1
Tip H If Text Exceeds Limit
Results appear with overage truncated.
Tools
11
5
Press b
^ Scan results can be used as follows:
URL
Access Mobile Internet, copy
Email address
Send mail, save to Phone Book, copy
Phone Number
Dial, save to Phone Book, copy
Text
Copy
C Using Scan Results: see P.11-12
Tip H ^ Follow these steps to scan more.
Press e P A Select Continue Part or
Scan More A Press b
B Continue Part
Select Continue Part to enter additional text. (Mode
remains the same.)
B Scan More
Select Scan More to enter text after a line break.
^ Continue Part and Scan More are disabled once 256
characters have been scanned.
Scanning during
Text Entry
Insert scan results into current cursor position
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Scan A Press b A Select Text Scanner A Press b
A Frame text in the centre of Display A Press b A
Select a line A Press b
11-16
Stopwatch
Record elapsed time for up to 24 hours (23 hours, 59
minutes and 59.9 seconds) in 0.1-second increments.
Use lap time feature to segment elapsed time.
^ Save times (including the last four lap times) to handset Text
Templates.
^ Stopwatch ends when battery level is low.
Main Menu H Tools A Stopwatch
Press b
2
Press b to stop
Stopwatch starts.
C To record lap times, press e ,.
B The last four lap times are recorded. The records are
deleted when Stopwatch is cancelled.
C To save the records to Text Templates, press e P A
Select Save to Template A Press b
B To check saved records, open Text Templates (see P.8-13).
C Press b to resume Stopwatch.
C To clear the record, press e P A Select Reset A
Press b
Press d W to exit
C To end Stopwatch when recording or stopped, press d W
A Press e i
Tip H ^ Records are deleted when Stopwatch is cancelled.
Save records to Text Templates.
^ Stopwatch is not affected by incoming calls. Press g
after the call to return to Stopwatch.
^ If Alarm Time arrives when Stopwatch window is open,
no tone will sound. Cancel Stopwatch to activate Alarm
(see P.11-5).
Tools
1
3
11
11-17
Tasks
Save event with deadlines. Check completed tasks.
Save up to 300 entries between Tasks and Calendar (see P.11-2).
8
Press d q
The entry is saved.
At Reminder Time
Reminder operates according to the settings.
Saving Entries
Stopping Reminder Tone
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks
Tools
1
2
3
4
5
11
Select Add New Entry and press b
Enter subject and press b
^ Enter up to 16 characters.
Enter due date and press b
Enter due time and press b
No Reminder
1 Select No Reminder and press b
Setting Reminder
1 Select from At Due Time to 1 day before and
press b
C For custom Reminder Time, select Other A Press b
A Enter date A Press b A Enter time A Press b
6
7
11-18
Select Description: and press b
Enter task details and press b
^ Enter up to 128 characters.
^ See P.11-19 "Tasks Options" to customise task related
settings, such as Reminder tone, Repeat or Secret mode
setting, etc.
Press d 3, g, c or i.
Tip H If Reminder Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound.
Press g after the call to activate Reminder.
Tasks Options
Opening Entries
Follow these steps after Step 7 on P.11-18.
Assign Tone
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks
Select tones for Reminder
KPattern 1
Preset Sounds
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/
Video: A Press b A Select Assign Tone A Press
b A Select Preset Sounds A Press b A Select a
tone A Press b A Press e U
1
2
Select an entry and press b
3
Press d W to end
Select duration time for Reminder
K15 seconds
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Duration: A
Press b A Select time A Press b
C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter
time A Press b
Secret
Add New Entry
Buy a gift
2004/12/23 16:00
Select
Set Secret mode for entries
KOff
Select Secret: A Press b A Choose On or Off A Press b
Back
Memory Status
Check the number of saved entries.
Set a video file to play with Reminder
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/
Video: A Press b A Select Assign Video A Press
b A Select a video file A Press b
Duration
C To check, press b.
B To uncheck, press b.
J
Tasks
Select an entry and press e P A Select
Memory Status A Press b
Tools
Assign Video
N
^ Entries with a check appear in c, entries
without a check appear in e.
My Sounds (Data Folder)
Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/Video:
A Press b A Select Assign Tone A Press b A Select
My Sounds A Press b A Select a tone A Press b
Use F to select 8 (all entries),
c (checked) or e (unchecked)
11
Editing Entries
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks A Select an entry
1
2
3
4
Press e P
Select Edit and press b
Select an item and press b
^ See "Saving Entries" on P.11-18 for more.
When finished editing, press d q
^ Secret mode entries appear only when handset is in Secret
mode (see P.10-12).
11-19
Deleting Entries
This Task
Delete one entry
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks A Select an entry
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Select This Task A Press b A Press e i
All Completed
Tasks
Delete all checked entries
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks
Tools
11
Press D A Press e P A Select Delete A
Press b A Select All Completed Tasks A Press b
A Press e i
^ All Completed Tasks appears only when there is a checked entry.
All Tasks
World Clock
Display local time and the time of another area in the world.
^ World Clock supports Daylight Saving time.
^ Select World Clock for Clock & Calendar setting to use World
Clock in Standby (see P.10-5).
Time Zone
Select from preset Time Zones or specify a new one by
entering area name and time difference between the area
and the local area.
Main Menu
1
Delete all entries
Use F to specify an area and press b
C To add Time Zones, in Time Zone setting window, press
e P A Select Set Custom Zone A Press b A Enter
city name A Press b A Enter time difference A Press b
Daylight Saving
Main Menu H Tools A Tasks
Press D A Press e P A Select Delete A Press
b A Select All Tasks A Press b A Press e i
Activate Daylight Saving to advance the selected area's
time by one hour.
Main Menu
1
11-20
H Tools A World Clock A Edit (e) A Set Time
Zone
H Tools A World Clock A Edit (e) A Daylight
Saving
Choose On and press b
C To cancel, choose Off A Press b
Countdown Timer
Set Countdown Timer up to 60 minutes in 1-second
increments. Alarm Tone sounds and Small Light flashes
when set time elapses.
Main Menu H Tools A Countdown Timer
1
^ To edit entered time, use F to move cursor and enter correct
time. If b is already pressed, follow the steps below.
^ When times over 60 minutes (60:00) are entered, Countdown
Timer returns to 00:00.
C To change time, press e P A Select Edit A Press b
A Enter time A Press b
Press b
Countdown starts.
Press b to stop countdown
C Press b to resume.
Tip H ^ Countdown is not affected by incoming calls.
Press g after the call to return to Countdown Timer window.
^ If Alarm Time arrives while Countdown Timer window is
open, no tone will sound. Cancel Countdown Timer to
activate Alarm.
^ Pen Light is disabled while Countdown Timer window is
open.
Tools
2
3
4
Enter time (00:01 - 60:00) and press b
Countdown Timer End
Timer Expired appears. Vibration activates and Alarm Tone
sounds according to the settings.
^ Alarm stops automatically after 60 seconds. Press d 3
to stop manually.
^ Manner settings take priority over.
^ When the set timer time elapsed during a call, Timer
Expired appears after g is pressed to end the call.
11
Press d W and then e i to exit
11-21
Expenses Memo
Use Expenses Memo to add expenses, such as travel expenses.
^ Enter up to 30 entries (up to 29,999,999.7 yen in total,
999,999.99 yen per entry).
^ Expenses Memo cannot be opened during a call.
Add New
Expense
Enter amount A Press b A Select a category A
Press b
Tools
^ The entry date and figure are saved.
^ If Clock is unset (see P.10-7), entry date and time will be saved as
--/--/-- --:--.
Totals
Check entries
Main Menu H Tools A Expenses Memo
Select Totals A Press b
C Use E to scroll through entries.
C To change category names, select an entry A Press e P
A Select Change Category A Press b A Edit A Press b
B Enter up to 14 characters.
C To change entry amount, select an entry A Press e P
A Select Change Amount A Press b A Edit A Press b
C To delete an entry, select an entry A Press e P A
Select Delete Item A Press b A Press e i
C To delete all entries, select an entry A Press e P A
Select Delete All A Press b A Press e i
11-22
Rename categories
Main Menu H Tools A Expenses Memo
Select Edit Category A Press b A Select a
category A Press b A Edit A Press b
^ Enter up to 14 characters.
Enter monetary figure and categorise it
Main Menu H Tools A Expenses Memo A Add New Expense
11
Edit Category
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is a standard
specification for requesting prints from digital cameras.
Select images from SD Memory Card and specify the
number of copies to print on DPOF-compatible printers, or
at digital printing services.
^ DPOF does not support images downloaded via Web or MMS.
^ If SD Memory Card capacity becomes insufficient during
operation, a warning message appears. Delete files and try again.
^ For printing procedures, see the printer manual.
Selecting Images & Prints
To specify same number of copies for all DCF images on
SD Memory Card, see right.
Print Settings
Add Date
Add dates to prints
KOff
Main Menu H Tools A Photo Print A Picture Setting
1
2
3
Select a folder and press b
Thumbnails appear.
Use G to select an image and press e W
Enter a number of copies to print (00 - 99) and
press b
C To cancel, enter 00 A Press b
Repeat Steps 2 - 3 for other images
Press d K
Note H ^ Print settings made on other devices cannot be
changed on handset.
^ Print settings on handset replace those made on other
devices.
^ Some settings may not be supported depending on the
printer or printing services.
^ Process may take a while if print settings are made for
many images.
^ If image files are deleted or renamed on PCs or other
devices, print settings change. Perform Cancel All and
start over with settings.
Select Add Date A Press b A Choose On (add
date) or Off (no date) A Press b
Index Print
Create Index Print (a print with thumbnails)
KOff
Main Menu H Tools A Photo Print A Settings
Select Index Print A Press b A Choose On (create
Index Print) or Off A Press b
Check
Print Setting
View current print settings
Tools
4
5
Main Menu H Tools A Photo Print A Settings
11
Main Menu H Tools A Photo Print A Settings
Select Check Print Setting A Press b
^ UUU may appear for Images and Total Copies.
Number of
Copies
Specify same number of copies for all DCF
images at once
Main Menu H Tools A Photo Print A Settings
Set All at Once
Select Number of Copies A Press b A Enter a
number (01 - 99) A Press b
Cancel All Print Settings
Select Cancel All A Press b A Press e i
11-23
E-Books
Read a variety of E-Books (XMDF or Text format) on SD
Memory Card.
^ Use handset as a dictionary by saving dictionary files.
^ For details, access Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site
(see P.13-11).
^ Handset may not support sounds or images embedded in
E-Books.
Reading Content
Main Menu H Tools
Tools
11
11-24
1
Select E-Book and press b
Book contents list appears. (When you press g to close
Reading window, the same page will open next time.)
C When playing sound, confirmation appears A Press e i
(Book data list or the last page you opened appears.)
C To read E-Books saved in other folders, press e P A
Select Change Folder A Press b A Select a folder A
Press b (The selected folder will open next time.)
C Press e P A Select Property A Press b to see the
title, author, etc.
2
Select content and press b
3
Press g to close
^ !% indicates location of the current page.
C If content is password protected, enter password A Press b
A Reading window opens
^ The last page you opened will appear next time.
Note H ^ E-Books cannot be opened while sounds play or a
V-application is paused.
^ E-Books automatically close for incoming calls, at
Alarm Time, when battery is low, or after five minutes of
inactivity.
^ Only files with zbf, zbk, txt or text extension appear in
book contents list.
^ Revised E-Books are not supported.
Folders and Files
Text Operations
C Adding Folders
C Jump to the first or last page.
In book contents list, press e P A Select
New Folder A Press b A Enter folder name A
Press b
C Editing Folder/File Names
In book contents list, select a folder/file A Press
e P A Select Change Name A Press b A
Edit A Press b
C Deleting Folders/Files
In book contents list, select a folder/file A Press
e P A Select Delete A Press b A Press
ei
In book contents list, select a file A Press e P
A Select Move A Press b A Select a location A
Press b twice
Key Assignments
C Operations vary by writing style as follows.
Lateral
Vertical
C
Scroll up (by line)
Backward (by page)
D
Scroll down (by line)
Forward (by page)
B
Backward (by page)
Scroll left (by line)
A
Forward (by page)
Scroll right (by line)
Press e P A Select % Shift A Press b A
Enter location by percentage (00 - 99) A Press b
C Select chapter when a table of contents is contained.
Press e P A Select Contents A Press b A
Select a chapter A Press b
C See P.11-26 to use Bookmarks.
C Reading window settings:
Press e P A Select Display Settings A
Press b A Select an item A Press b A Change
the setting A Press b
Item
Description
Default
Font Size
Select Tiny, Small,
Standard or Standard Plus
Standard
Text
Direction
Read text vertically or
horizontally
Vertical Text
Ruby
Show ruby annotations
Off
Tools
C Moving Files
Press e P A Select Home or End A Press b
C Move to a specific location.
11
^ Above settings are not available for some content.
11-25
Bookmark
Using Linked Info/Copying Text
C Use numbers, addresses or URLs to place calls, send MMS
messages or access Mobile Internet sites.
Select an item A Press e P A Select Jump
To Link A Press b A Press e i
^ Some linked information may not be used.
C Copy text in data (up to 20 double or single-byte characters).
In Reading window, press e P A Select
Copy A Press b A See P.3-14 for more
B Text in index window and search results list of dictionary
files cannot be copied.
B Images and ruby annotations cannot be copied.
Mask & Jump
Tools
11
Some content may contain hidden text or images (masked info)
or links (jump links).
^ Select a part with masked info and press b to show the
text or image. Press b again to hide.
^ Select a part with jump link and press b to jump to the specified
page. Press d W to return to the original location.
Add bookmarks to return to the pages easily.
Use two bookmarks per E-Book (for up to five E-Books).
1
2
3
Press e P
Select Bookmark and press b
Select Bookmark1 or Bookmark2 and press b
Bookmark is added.
Auto Bookmark
When you close Reading window, Auto Bookmark 1 is added to
the last page you opened. The next time you close the same
content, Auto Bookmark 1 is replaced with Auto Bookmark 2,
and added to the new last page.
^ Up to two Auto Bookmarks can be stored per E-Book, and
will be deleted older first when another is added.
^ E-Books automatically close and Auto Bookmark 1 is
added when incoming calls arrive while reading E-Books.
Opening Bookmarked Page
In Reading window, press e P A Select Move
to Bookmark A Press b A Select Bookmark1,
Bookmark2, Auto Bookmark1 or Auto Bookmark2
A Press b
11-26
Using E-Book Images
As Wallpaper
Save images as Wallpaper
Main Menu H Tools A E-Book A Open E-Book
Using A Dictionary
Look Up Word
Use downloaded e-book dictionaries to look up
word definitions, etc.
Main Menu H Tools A E-Book
Select an image A Press e P A Select Set as
Wallpaper A Press b A Press e K
Select a dictionary A Press b A Select an entry
field A Press b A Enter word A Press b
^ Some images may not be used.
^ Select an entry and press b to view its definitions.
^ For key assignments, see P.11-25.
Embedded
Information
Use information contained in images
Properties
Main Menu H Tools A E-Book A Open E-Book
Jump To Link
Select jump information to move to other
pages. Use linked information to send MMS
messages or access Mobile Internet sites
(book data will close). See P.11-26 "Using
Linked Info/Copying Text".
Toggle Mask
Hidden text or images appear
Main Menu H Tools A E-Book A Open E-Book
Press e P A Select Property A Press b
Tools
Select an image A Press e P A Select Jump
To Link, Toggle Mask or Play Animation A Press b
Open properties of dictionary and other
E-Book content
11
Play Animation Flip animation plays
11-27
Phone Help
Open quick guides to functions other than Main Menu functions.
Main Menu H Tools
1
Select Phone Help and press b
Phone Help window opens.
N
J
Handset Status and Key Press Method
Phone Help
▲
In standby,紙
press and hold紙
Operations (Keys)
壁紙
Power壁紙
On/Off
Function
▼
Tools
11
11-28
Back
2
3
Press E
Guide for another function appears.
Press d W to end
Optional Services
12-1
Optional Service Overview
^ When handset is out-of-range, access Optional Services from
a touch-tone landline.
^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General
Information (see P.16-32).
Optional Services
Call
Forwarding
When you know you will be unable to receive
calls to your handset, use Call Forwarding to
automatically transfer calls to another phone
number (see right).
Voice Mail
Unanswered calls are forwarded to Voice Mail.
Retrieve caller messages from handset or any
touch-tone phone, anytime. New Voice Mail
indicator appears on handset after message is
recorded (see P.12-4).
Call Waiting*
Call Waiting alerts you to incoming calls when
the line is already engaged. After the tone, place
the current call on hold and answer the second,
or alternate between calls (see P.12-5).
Conference
Call*
Open a second line while the first is engaged.
Switch back and forth between two lines or talk
on both simultaneously. Add other parties to an
existing conversation and talk on up to five lines
simultaneously (see P.12-6).
Call Barring
Restrict incoming/outgoing calls depending on
conditions (see P.12-7)
Caller ID
Show or hide your own number when placing
calls (see P.12-10)
12
*A separate subscription is required.
12-2
Call Forwarding
Transfer incoming calls to a specified phone number
according to the preset forwarding condition and service type.
^ Forwarding conditions
All Calls
Transfer all incoming calls immediately
When Busy
Automatically transfer during a call (when Call
Waiting is deactivated). Manually transfer calls
arrived while handset is ringing/vibrating.
No Answer
Transfer calls if phone is not answered within a
set ring time
Not Reachable
Transfer all incoming calls when your handset is
turned off or out-of-range
^ Call Forwarding and Voice Mail cannot be used at the same time.
^ Initiating Call Forwarding cancels Voice Mail.
^ Call Forwarding is not available when All Outgoing Calls or
All Incoming Calls in Call Barring is active. (Call Barring
takes priority.)
Call Forwarding
Main Menu
Initiate Call Forwarding
H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts A Select a
forwarding condition
Choose On A Press b A Select Enter Phone
Number A Press b A Enter a forwarding number
A Press b A Select ring time A Press b
C To specify a service type, select By Service A Press b A
Select an item A Press b
^ Ring time can be set when the forwarding condition is No Answer.
^ Include the dialling code for landlines.
Cancel Call Forwarding
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts
Each Forwarding Condition
Select a forwarding condition A Choose Off A
Press b
All Call Forwarding
Select Cancel All A Press b A Press e i
^ If all Call Forwarding settings are cancelled, Voice Mail settings
are cancelled at the same time.
^ Done. appears following Please wait....
Status
Main Menu
Check Call Forwarding status
H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts A Select a
forwarding condition
Select Status A Press b
^ Call Forwarding status appears.
Incoming Calls while Call Forwarding is Active
Optional Services
Tip H Adjust ring time to set the response priority when using Call
Forwarding together with Message Recorder (see P.2-20).
Example: Ring time for Call Forwarding: 10 seconds
Ring time for Message Recorder: 9 seconds
In this example, Message Recorder responds first.
(Priority may change depending on signal conditions.)
Phone Numbers Beginning with the Following
Numbers Cannot be Saved:
^ 1 (Public Service Numbers: 110, 119, 118, etc.)
^ 00 (International call numbers: 001, 0041, etc.)
^ 0120 (Toll Free Number)
^ 0990 (Fee-based services: Dial Q2, etc.)
Cancel
Forwarding
12
To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.
12-3
Voice Mail
Optional Services
12
Transfer incoming calls to Voice Mail according to the preset
conditions (same as those for Call Forwarding on P.12-2).
^ Calls are transferred to Voice Mail using Call Forwarding
function. Therefore, Voice Mail and Call Forwarding cannot be
used at the same time.
^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General
Information (see P.16-32).
^ Initiating Voice Mail cancels Call Forwarding.
^ Call Forwarding is not available when All Outgoing Calls or
All Incoming Calls in Call Barring is active. (Call Barring
takes priority.)
Voice Mail
Main Menu
Initiate Voice Mail
H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts A Select a
forwarding condition
Choose On A Press b A Select Voicemail Serv. A
Press b A Voice Mail Centre address appears A
Press b A Select ring time A Press b
C To change Voice Mail Centre address, press e P
while it appears A Select Edit A Press b A Change the
number (default: 09066517000) A Press b
^ Done. appears following Please wait....
^ Ring time can be set when the forwarding condition is No Answer.
12-4
Tip H Adjust ring time to set the response priority when using
Voice Mail together with Message Recorder (see P.2-20).
Example: Ring time for Voice Mail: 10 seconds
Ring time for Message Recorder: 9 seconds
In this example, Message Recorder responds first.
(Priority may change depending on signal conditions.)
Cancel
Voice Mail
Cancel transferring to Voice Mail
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts
Each Forwarding Condition
Select a forwarding condition A Choose Off A
Press b
All Voice Mail
Select Cancel All A Press b A Press e i
^ If all Voice Mail settings are cancelled, Call Forwarding settings
are cancelled at the same time.
^ Done. appears following Please wait....
Status
Main Menu
Check Voice Mail status
H Settings A Call Settings A Diverts A Select a
forwarding condition
Select Status A Press b
^ Voice Mail status appears.
Incoming Calls while Voice Mail is Active
To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.
Play Voice Mail
Check Voice Mail messages
Main Menu H Messages A Voice Mail
Select Call Voice Mail A Press b
^ Follow the guidance for further operations after handset
connects to Voice Mail Centre.
^ Alternatively, press 1 for 1+ seconds in Standby to connect
to Voice Mail Centre.
C Press g to end.
Tip H k disappears after messages are checked.
Separate Subscription Required
Start/Cancel
Call Waiting
Activate or deactivate Call Waiting
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Call Waiting
Put Line 1 on hold to answer Line 2
When a tone sounds during a call, press f
C Press f to switch between two lines.
Ending Calls while Someone is on Hold
When g is pressed or handset is closed, all lines are disconnected.
Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold
A beep sounds. Press d to talk with the other party on hold.
Tip H ^ Handset does not ring or vibrate for incoming calls
while a line is engaged. A tone sounds from Earpiece
and Call Waiting appears.
^ When Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is active,
unanswered incoming calls are transferred to Voice Mail
or the forwarding number. If All Calls is selected, then
all calls are transferred directly.
Optional Services
Call Waiting
Incoming Calls
12
Choose On or Off A Press b
^ Done. appears following Please wait....
Status
Check Call Waiting status
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Call Waiting
Select Status A Press b
^ Call Waiting status appears.
12-5
Conference Call
Separate Subscription Required
Dial New
Number
Open another line during a call
Enter a phone number during a call A Press f
^ Line 2 is open. Line 1 is put on hold.
^ Phone Book, Dialled Numbers, Received Calls and Missed
Calls are available.
Conference Call
Use up to five lines simultaneously
Press e P while switching between two lines
A Select Multi Party A Press b A Select
Conference All A Press b
Ending Calls during Conference Call
When g is pressed or handset is closed, all lines are disconnected.
Some Lines End during Conference Call
Other lines remain connected.
Switch Line
Optional Services
12
12-6
Switch between two open lines
During a call, press f
^ The line switches. The other lines are put on hold.
Ending Calls while Someone is on Hold
When g is pressed or handset is closed, all lines are disconnected.
Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold
A beep sounds. Press d to talk with the other party on hold.
Call Barring
All Outgoing Calls
Restrict all non-emergency calls
International Calls1
Allow only domestic calls
Only Local & Home2
Restrict all international calls except
to Japan
All Incoming Calls
Reject all calls
Bar if Abroad
Reject calls when outside Japan
1Example: During a stay in the United Kingdom, only calls within the
country are possible.
2Example: During a stay in the United Kingdom, both calls within the
country and to Japan are possible.
Tip H If call is attempted when Call Barring is active, Call Barred.
appears. It may take longer to appear in some areas. Check
Call Barring settings if the message does not appear.
Optional Services
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Restrict incoming/outgoing calls, including SMS messages.
Following restrictions are available:
Note H ^ Network Password selected at initial subscription (see
P.1-33) is required to change Call Barring settings.
^ If Network Password is incorrectly entered three times,
Call Barring settings are locked. To resolve, Network
Password and Centre Access Code must be changed.
For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre,
General Information (see P.16-32).
^ All Outgoing Calls and All Incoming Calls are
disabled when Call Forwarding or Voice Mail is active.
(Call Forwarding or Voice Mail takes priority.)
B If All Outgoing Calls or All Incoming Calls is set
while Call Forwarding or Voice Mail is active, Call
Barring becomes effective only for service types
which are not transferred.
12
Restrict dialling or reject incoming calls according to phone
numbers, or reject incoming calls without Caller ID.
Fixed Dialling No.
Allow calls only to designated numbers
(Currently not available)
Rejected Numbers Reject calls from designated numbers
Withheld Call
Reject incoming calls without Caller ID
12-7
Restricting Outgoing Calls
Set Restriction
Main Menu
Restrict outgoing calls by selecting a type of
restrictions and services
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Outgoing Calls
Select restriction A Press b A Select a service
type A Press b A Choose On A Press b A Enter
Network Password A Press b
Cancel
Restriction
Optional Services
12
Main Menu
Cancel restriction of outgoing calls
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Outgoing Calls
Each Restriction & Service Type
Select restriction A Press b A Select a service
type A Press b A Choose Off A Press b A Enter
Network Password A Press b
All Restrictions
Select Cancel All A Press b A Enter Network
Password A Press b
12-8
Status
Main Menu
Check Call Barring status for outgoing calls
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Outgoing Calls
Select restriction A Press b A Select a service
type A Press b A Select Status A Press b
^ Call Barring status appears.
Set Reject
Number
Restricting Incoming Calls
Set/Cancel
Restriction
Main Menu
Set or cancel restriction of incoming calls
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Incoming Calls
Select an entry A Press b A Enter a number A
Press b
Select restriction A Press b A Select a service
type A Press b A Choose On or Off A Press b A
Enter Network Password A Press b
All Restrictions
C To save from Phone Book, select an entry A Press e P
A Select Ph. Book list A Press b A Select an entry A
Press b A Select a number A Press b
^ Name appears for numbers saved from Phone Book.
Editing Numbers
Select a number A Press e P A Select Edit A
Press b A Edit a number A Press b
Deleting Numbers
Rejecting Calls
Reject incoming calls from designated numbers
KOff
Select a number A Press e P A Select Delete
A Press b A Press e i
Rejecting Calls without Caller ID
Withheld Call
Optional Services
Select Cancel All A Press b A Enter Network
Password A Press b
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Main Menu
Rejected Numbers A Switch On/Off
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Rejected Numbers A Set Reject Number
Adding New Numbers
Each Restriction & Service Type
Rejected
Numbers
Main Menu
Designate phone numbers to reject
12
Reject calls without Caller ID
Choose On or Off A Press b
KOff
Main Menu
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Withheld Call
Choose On or Off A Press b
12-9
Changing Network Password
Change N/W
Password
Main Menu
Change Network Password
H Settings A Call Settings A Call Barring A
Change N/W Password
Enter current Network Password A Press b A
Enter new Network Password A Press b A Enter
new Network Password again A Press b
Caller ID
Show or hide your own phone number when placing calls.
Regardless of this setting, sending or blocking Caller ID can
be selected for each call. Enter the following numbers
before a phone number when placing a call.
Send
186 or ;31:
Block
184 or :31:
Show Your
Number
Optional Services
12
Send or block Caller ID
KOn (Send)
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Show Your Number
Choose On or Off A Press b
Status
Check Caller ID status
Main Menu H Settings A Call Settings A Show Your Number
Select Status A Press b
^ Caller ID status appears.
12-10
Vodafone live! Overview
13-1
Vodafone live! Basics
Vodafone live! Services
Use Vodafone live! services to exchange text and multimedia messages with compatible handsets, download sounds and
images as well as V-applications or browse the Mobile Internet.
CWeb
Use Web to access the Mobile Internet directly from handset. Browse for image or sound files as well as information.
Web Information
Vodafone live! Overview
13
Access Vodafone live! compatible
Mobile Internet sites from Web Menu.
Mobile Internet
Enter Mobile Internet site URLs to visit
specific sites or pages directly.
Images
Text
Mobile Internet
Access
Sounds
An additional contract is required to use Web service.
CMessaging
Messaging services are also available outside Japan.
SMS
MMS
Exchange short text messages of up to 160 single-byte
alphanumerics with SMS compatible Vodafone handsets.
Text
Exchange long text messages of up to approximately 30,000 single-byte
alphanumerics with MMS compatible Vodafone handsets, e-mail
compatible handsets and PCs and other devices via the Internet. Attach
images, sounds or vFiles to send multimedia messages.
Sounds
Text
Images
vFiles
Service Centre
An additional contract is required to use MMS and receive e-mail from PCs, etc.
13-2
Service Centre
CV-applications
Download V-applications, including games and 3D graphics.
Web Downloads
Download V-applications via Web.
Network V-applications
Enjoy Network games or real time information.
Screensaver
Keep a V-application active in Standby.
Scores
Screensaver
Games
Download
Real Time
Stock Prices
Tip H For more details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
Vodafone live! Overview
^ Download and use 802SH compatible V-applications.
^ An additional contract is required to use V-applications.
13
13-3
Automatic Network Setup
Customising Handset Address
To use Vodafone live! services, first download network
connection information from Vodafone live! Service Centre.
Handset initiates Network Setup when e, d or b is
pressed for the first time. To download network connection
information for the second time and after, see
"Re-Provisioning" on P.9-18.
Vodafone live! Overview
13
1
Press e, d or b
2
Press e i
Re-Provisioning Do you want to get the latest provisioning
data and update? appears.
Handset connects to the Network and retrieves required
information.
^ Follow onscreen instructions.
C To cancel, press d 3.
(Press e, d or b to initiate Network Setup.)
Default
Custom
Account Name
Domain Name
Entered Account Name
$ varies by subscription area.
If you have further questions, please contact Vodafone Customer
Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
^ Handset must connect to the Network to customise handset
address.
^ Customising handset mail address helps reduce spam.
Main Menu H Vodafone live!
1
2
3
Select My Vodafone and press b
Select 各種変更手続き and press b
Select オリジナルメール設定・各種メール設定/
and press b
^ Follow onscreen instructions (Japanese only).
C For Web basic operations, see P.13-8
C Centre Access Code: see P.1-33
13-4
Getting Started
Web Info Content
Sample Web information page:
N4
J
ニュース(総合)
Disclaimer
[トピック1]
アメリカで行われた世
界腕相撲大会で、日本
の石橋さんが見事に優
勝。日本人の優勝は、
一昨年の木村さんに次
いで二人目の快挙。
→関連記事
Scroll Bar (see P.13-8)
Cursor (see P.13-8)
Back
Content
Cache Memory
Web information and Menus are saved temporarily in Cache
Memory. When full, oldest items are automatically deleted to
make space for new ones.
^ Previously opened information may load from Cache Memory.
^ Some information has expiry dates and are deleted from
Cache Memory upon expiry.
When a security notice appears, subscribers must decide for
themselves whether or not to open the information. Opening
secure information constitutes agreement to the terms of usage.
Vodafone, VeriSign Japan, Baltimore Technologies Japan and
Entrust Japan cannot be held liable for any damages
associated with the use of SSL.
Vodafone live! Overview
Options
CSSL
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is an encryption protocol for
secure Internet transmissions of important/sensitive
information such as credit card numbers.
Electronic certificates are saved on handset (see P.13-18).
13
13-5
Using Web
Use Web to access the Mobile Internet for information as
well as image, sound and other files.
Opening Web Menu
Access Mobile Internet sites by selecting a topic from
Vodafone Web Menu. Perform Network Setup before using
Web (see P.13-4).
1
Vodafone live! Overview
13
13-6
Press b, select Vodafone live! and press b
Vodafone Web Menu opens
^ Alternatively, press d [ in Standby to open Vodafone
Web Menu.
^ Address questions about Vodafone Web to Vodafone
Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
^ Vodafone Web Menu content is subject to change.
2
3
Highlight a menu item
4
5
Repeat Steps 2 - 3 to open additional links
Press b
^ Handset remains connected to the Network even if it is closed.
C To disconnect, press i.
C Basic Operations: see P.13-8
Press g and then e i to exit
Page Jump
Press d W to open previous page.
B To return to the original page after the above operation,
press e P A Select Forward A Press b
Opening Secured Information
When accessing SSL/TLS protected information, Entering
secure area. OK? appears.
Press e K to open information.
^ X appears.
^ To disable warning messages, see P.13-18.
When Authentication is Required
Information may require authentication for access.
If requested, enter user ID or password A Press b
Tip H Open information and Web Menus saved in Cache
Memory (see P.13-5) without connecting to the Network.
Entering URLs Directly
Enter URLs directly via Web to access Mobile Internet sites.
Perform Network Setup before using Web (see P.13-4).
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Go to URL
1
C To enter address prefix (http://, etc.), press e P A
Select Advanced A Press b A Select an item A Press b
Enter URL and press b
Press e P
Access Mobile Internet sites using previously entered URLs.
^ Perform Network Setup before using Web (see P.13-4).
^ Up to 10 domains are saved, and up to 30 information pages
are saved under each domain. When Log memory is full,
oldest items are deleted to make room for new ones.
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Access History
1
2
Select a domain folder and press b
3
Press g and then e i to exit
Select OK and press b
Information appears.
Press g and then e i to exit
Note H Some sites may not be accessed. Images, layouts, etc.
may not appear the same as on PCs.
Select an item and press b
C To open properties, select an item A Press e P A
Select Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To send URLs via SMS/MMS, select an item A Press e
P A Select Send Page A Press b A Create and
send message (see P.14-7 - 14-8)
Deleting URL Log
Open Access History and follow these steps.
Select a domain folder or item within (Skip this
step for Delete All.) A Press e P A Select
Delete or Delete All A Press b A Press e i
Vodafone live! Overview
2
3
4
5
Press b
Using URL Log
13
^ Delete All clears the entire domain folder when performed
for an item inside.
13-7
Basic Operations
Text Entry & Item Selection
Enter text or select items to send information.
Moving Cursor
Move cursor to select items. Selectable items are underlined.
Use E to scroll through items.
N4
Vodafone live! Overview
13
J
N4
J
N4
J
ニュース
ニュース
ニュース
1.国内ニュース
2.国際ニュース
3.経済ニュース
1.国内ニュース
2.国際ニュース
3.経済ニュース
1.国内ニュース
2.国際ニュース
3.経済ニュース
D
D
C
Options
Back
Back
お住まい
埼玉
東京
神奈川
Options
Back
Cursor
Use F to move left and right when multiple items are listed
in one row. Cursor does not appear when there are no
selectable items.
Scrolling Pages
Scroll Bar
Scroll bar appears on the right when
N4
J
information continues outside the current ニュース(総合)
window. Red part indicates the current
[トピック1]
アメリカで行われた世
position. Use E to scroll. Red part
界腕相撲大会で、日本
の石橋さんが見事に優
moves accordingly.
勝。日本人の優勝は、
一昨年の木村さんに次
いで二人目の快挙。
→関連記事
Options
13-8
J
性別
O男 O女
C
Options
N4
お名前
Back
送信
Options
Back
Text Entry Field
^ Highlight , and press b. Text
entry window opens. Enter text and
press b.
Check-box
^ Highlight O (check-box) and press
b. The box changes to P,
indicating that the item is selected.
^ In addition to O, ! may also appear
as selection indicators.
Menu List
^ Highlight the field and press b to
select an item.
Command Button
^ Use to send, reset, etc.
^ Highlight , and press b to
execute the indicated command.
Input Memory
C Entered text is saved to Input Memory, except Security Code
and entries made in secured sites. Use saved text in other
applications.
C Up to 20 entries are saved. When full, oldest entries are
deleted automatically to make room for new ones.
Using Input Memory
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Advanced A Press b A Select Input Memory A
Press b A Select text A Press b
2
Phone Numbers
1 Select a number and press b
2 Select Call or TV Call and press b
The number is dialled.
Mail Addresses
1 Highlight an address and press b
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7 - 14-8
URLs
1 Highlight a URL and press b
Using Linked Info
Use numbers (TEL:), addresses or URLs (http://, https://
or rtsp://) to place calls, send MMS messages or access
Mobile Internet sites.
^ Available only when numbers, addresses and URLs are underlined.
^ Words may be substituted for the numbers, addresses and URLs.
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Open information
1
Open information containing a phone number,
mail address or URL
Saving to Phone Book
Select a phone number A Press b A Select Save
to Phone Book A Press b A Select As New Entry
A Press b A See P.4-3 - 4-5 for more about Phone
Book
B To add to existing entry, select a Phone Book entry A
Press b A Press d q
Vodafone live! Overview
Handset connects to the Network.
^ For URLs with rtsp://, video or sound is played back
(see P.13-14 "Streaming").
13
13-9
Advanced Features
Saving to Data Folder
Save images, sounds, vFiles, etc. to Data Folder.
Files in Information
Main Menu
1
Select Save Items and press b
2
Select a file and press b
Vodafone live! Overview
13
13-10
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e)
Available files are listed.
C To open files, select a file A Press e P A Select
View A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To open properties, select a file A Press e P A
Select Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To send files via MMS, select a file A Press e P A
Select Send A Press b A Create and send message
(see P.14-7 - 14-8)
Data Folder opens.
C To switch to SD Memory Card, press A.
C To save to a sub folder, select folder A Press b
3
4
5
Select Save here and press b
Enter title (file name) and press b
^ To accept the default title (file name), press e K.
Press e K
File is saved to Data Folder.
^ When memory is full, notification appears. Delete files and try
again (see P.8-14).
Linked Files
In some pages, files may be downloaded from links.
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Open information
1
2
Save frequently used information/URLs to Bookmarks or My
Saved Pages.
Function
File details appear.
Press b
Download starts. A confirmation appears after download, and
file is saved to Data Folder.
C To cancel, press d 3.
Press b
The content plays or appears.
C Press d W to return.
Bookmarks
Description
Folder
Save links to Mobile Internet sites.
Handset connects to the Network
to access the site.
Available
Save Mobile Internet site content.
My Saved Page Handset does not connect to the
Network to open saved information.
N/A
^ Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site (Japanese Only) is
Bookmarked by default. Visit Space Town for various
downloads such as Wallpapers, games and Dictionary files.
^ Save frequently used information to My Saved Page.
Vodafone live! Overview
3
Select a link and press b
Bookmarks & My Saved Page
13
13-11
Saving URLs & Information
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Open information
1
2
Vodafone live! Overview
13
Press e P
^ Information can only be saved when Mark Page appears in Menu.
Bookmarks
1 Select Mark Page and press b
2 Press b
3 Enter title and press b
4 Press e K
5 Press b
Opening Saved Info & Links
Main Menu H Vodafone live!
1
2
My Saved Page
1 Select Advanced and press b
N4
J
Bookmarks
Sharp Space...
News
Movie Info
Games
Serial Novels
Options
Back
Bookmarks
My Saved Page
1 Select Advanced and press b
2 Select My Saved Page and N4
press b
My Saved Page
^ Information can only be saved when Save This Page
appears in Menu.
2 Select Save This Page and press b
3 Enter title and press b
4 Press e K
C To update items, press e P
A Select Update A Press b
C To open properties, select a title
A Press e P A Select
Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To show or hide date, select a
title A Press e P A
Select Show Date/Hide Date A
Press b
Saving URLs to Bookmarks
Enter URLs and save to Bookmarks.
13-12
Bookmarks
1 Select Bookmarks and
press b
C To open properties, select a file
A Press e P A Select
Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To send URL via MMS/SMS,
select a title A Press e P
A Select Send Page A Press
b A Create and send message
(see P.14-7 - 14-8)
C If the same title exists, press b A Change title A
Press b A Press e K A Press b
Press e P A Select Bookmarks A Press b
A Press e P A Select New A Press b A
Select Bookmark A Press b twice A Enter URL A
Press b A Press e P A Select OK A Press
b A Enter title A Press b A Press e K A
Press b
Press e P
3
Select a title and press b
J
Station Area Map
My Bunny
Timetable
Sports
Options
Back
My Saved Page
Editing Bookmarks & My Saved Page
Open Bookmarks or My Saved Page first (see P.13-12
"Opening Saved Info & Links").
Rename
Edit title or Bookmarks folder name
Select a title or folder A Press e P A Select
Rename A Press b twice A Enter title A Press b
A Press e K
Bookmarks
Folder
Sort Bookmarks into folders
Create a Folder
Open Bookmarks and press e P A Select New
A Press b A Select Folder A Press b twice A
Enter a name A Press b A Press e K
Move to Folder
Open Bookmarks and select a title A Press e P A
Select Move A Press b A Select a folder A Press b
^ Move can only be selected when there is a folder.
Delete
Delete entries
^ Before deleting a folder, delete all the titles in the folder.
Edit URL (only
for Bookmarks)
Edit URLs in Bookmarks
Select a title A Press e P A Select Edit URL
A Press b twice A Enter URL A Press b A Press
e P A Select OK A Press b
Vodafone live! Overview
Select a title or folder A Press e P A Select
Delete or Delete All A Press b A Press e i
13
13-13
Streaming
Play back a video or sound file while it is downloading.
^ Only compatible files are supported.
^ Downloaded files are not saved.
Main Menu
1
2
Vodafone live! Overview
13
13-14
H Media Player A Open Playlist A
Options (e)
Select Streaming and press b
Changing Display Size
Entering URLs
1 Select Enter URL and press b
2 Enter a URL
After Step 1, select Display Size A Press b A
Select Original Size or Enlarge A Press b
^ Enter up to 1024 alphanumerics.
C To save the source URL to My Saved Page, pause playback
and follow these steps.
Connecting from Favourites
1 Select Favourites and press b
2 Select a title
Connecting from Access Log
1 Select Access Log and press b
2 Select an item
3
When Manner Mode is Active
Manner mode active. Output sound? appears.
^ Press e i to cancel Manner mode temporarily.
Handset speaker outputs sound at the volume set for
Media Player.
^ Press d c to stay in Manner mode. Enjoy sound
discretely with Multi Stereo Headphones, etc.
Press b
Media Player plays back video or sound.
C Playing Music: see P.7-3
C Playing Video: see P.7-6
Favourites
Press e P A Select Favourites A Press b
A Select Add Current A Press b
^ Save up to 99 titles.
C To edit titles, perform Step 1 and follow these steps.
Select Favourites A Press b A Select an item A
Press e P A Select Edit Name A Press b A
Enter a title A Press b
^ Enter up to 128 characters.
C To delete titles, perform Step 1 and follow these steps.
Select Favourites A Press b A Select an item A
Press e P A Select Delete A Press b A
Press e i
Access Log
C Up to 10 previously accessed URLs are saved. When full,
oldest URLs are deleted automatically to make room for new
ones.
C To open properties, perform Step 1 on P.13-14 and follow
these steps.
Select Access Log A Press b A Select a URL A
Press e P A Select Detail A Press b
B Press d W to return.
C To edit and access URLs, perform Step 1 on P.13-14 and
follow these steps.
C To delete URLs, perform Step 1 on P.13-14 and follow these
steps.
Select Access Log A Press b A Press e P
A Select Delete All A Press b A Press e i
Note H Handset remains connected to the Network while Streaming.
Reload Page
Main Menu
Update information
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e)
Select Reload Page A Press b
Send Page
Main Menu
Send URLs via SMS/MMS
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced A Send Page
Create and send message (see P.14-7 - 14-8)
Properties
Main Menu
Open information details
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced
Select Details A Press b
C Press d W to return.
Vodafone live! Overview
Select Access Log A Press b A Select a URL A
Press e P A Select Edit URL A Press b A
Edit URL A Press b
Sub Menu Settings
13
13-15
Browser Data
Main Menu
Clear Cache, Cookies or Access History
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced A Browser Data
Select an item A Press b
Search
This Page
Main Menu
Search within information, or jump to the top or
end of information
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced A Search This Page
Text Search
Vodafone live! Overview
13
Select Search A Press b A Enter text to search A
Press b A Press e ]
^ Only the first text is highlighted if more than one is found.
Jump to Top or End of Information
Select Jump to Top or Jump to Bottom A Press b
Restart
Browser
Main Menu
Close browser and start it again
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced
Select Restart Browser A Press b
13-16
Open browser details
About
Main Menu
H Vodafone live! A Open information A Options
(e) A Advanced
Select About A Press b
C Press d W to return.
Uploading Files
Upload images or other files in Data Folder to
the Centre via Mobile Internet sites
Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Open information
Open a site and select Browse... A Press b A Data
Folder opens A Select a file (see P.8-4) A Press b
A Select Send A Press b
^ Example above is for reference only. Follow site instructions for
specific procedure.
^ Some files may not be uploadable.
Other Functions
Scroll Step
KSingle Line
Basic Settings
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Main Menu
Settings A Scroll Step
Enable or disable cookies
Cookies
Select from three scroll units
Select a unit A Press b
KEnabled
Main Menu
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Cookies
Select Enabled or Disabled A Press b
Downloads
Main Menu
Select whether to download images and
sounds on Mobile Internet sites automatically
or to open text information only
KDownloaded (all)
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Downloads
Select Images, Sounds or Objects A Press b A
Select Show images/Play sounds/Download objects
or Don't show images/Don't play sounds/Don't
download objects A Press b
IMEI Notification
Main Menu
Information may require user ID
Select whether or not to send user ID upon request
KOff
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A IMEI Notification
Change character size
KMedium
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Main Menu
Settings A Font Size
Select size A Press b
Download to
Select a destination of downloaded files
KMemory Card Pref.
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Main Menu
Settings A Download to
Select Handset Memory or Memory Card Pref. A
Press b
^ Even when Memory Card Pref., downloaded files are saved to
handset if SD Memory Card is not inserted. (Also, some files
may not be saved to SD Memory Card.)
Vodafone live! Overview
^ A cookie is a piece of information sent by a server for user
identification.
Font Size
13
In addition, choose whether or not to send location info
automatically. When Datum On/Off in LBS Settings (see
P.10-13) is set to Off, location info is not sent.
Choose On or Off A Press b
13-17
Security
Secure Prompt
Select whether to show or hide warning
messages before entering and exiting SSL/
TLS secured information
KShow
Main Menu
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Security A Secure Prompt
Select Show or Don't Show A Press b
Certificates
Vodafone live! Overview
13
Main Menu
View certification of currently opened
information
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Security
Select Certificates A Press b
C Press d W to return.
Root
Certificates
Main Menu
Open electronic certificates issued by
Certificate Authorities saved on handset
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Security A Root Certificates
Select a certificate A Press b
C Press d W to return.
Authentication
Previously entered user ID or password is
entered automatically for authentication
KOn
Main Menu
H Vodafone live! A Options (e) A Advanced A
Settings A Security A Authentication
Choose On or Off A Press b
13-18
Messaging
14-1
Incoming Text Messages
Information
The Centre automatically delivers text messages to handset.
Opening New Messages
1
N4
6
J
Messaging
2
3
Select a message and press b
Message
received.
Delivery Notice
Received folder opens (see P.14-19).
C When messages are automatically sorted to Personal
Folders, select a folder A Press b
Message window opens (see P.14-3
"Message Content").
C To download the entire MMS message,
see P.14-4.
N
J
kaoru kitayama
Mr. Yamamoto and Ms.
Kawahashi, please bring
a camera and a tripod
to the wedding. I will
bring a camcorder.
Press g and then press
e i to exit
Options
Back
Message Window
14-2
Information appears when Standby returns.
Tip H See P.14-17 to open Received folder when Delivery
Notice does not appear.
OK
Press b
4
To open messages, select an item A Press b A
Perform from Step 3
New Mail during Operations
When mail arrives, animation
plays and Delivery Notice appears
6 (SMS Mail) or 7 (MMS Mail) appears
according to message type.
^ When handset is closed (clamshell closed),
open handset (clamshell open) to see
Delivery Notice.
14
Number of unread messages appears in Standby.
In Viewer Position
Use Side Keys to open new messages in Viewer position.
1
When mail arrives, animation plays and Delivery
Notice appears
6 (SMS Mail) or 7 (MMS Mail) appears according to message type.
2
3
4
Press h
Received folder opens (see P.14-19).
C When messages are automatically sorted to Personal
Folders, select a folder A Press h
Use L or M to select a message and press h
Message Content
N
J
kaoru kitayama
Mr. Yamamoto and Ms.
Kawahashi, please bring
a camera and a tripod
to the wedding. I will
bring a camcorder.
Options
Back
Sender
^ Number, mail address or name appears.
^ If the number or mail address is not
saved in Phone Book, name
designated by the sender appears
except for the following:
B MMS Notice
B MMS messages not saved on the
Server
Message Text
Message window opens.
Press c to exit
Received folder returns.
C Press c to return to Standby.
Messaging
14
14-3
Retrieving a Message
Retrieving MMS Messages
The Centre delivers the initial portion of MMS messages when:
B A message was sent to multiple recipients
B Files are attached to the message
^ In Received folder, Q appears when the remaining portion of
MMS message (MMS Notice) is held at the Centre.
^ Alternatively, download MMS messages using Mail List (see
P.14-30).
Main Menu H Messages A Received
1
2
Select a message and press e P
^ Select a message with Q.
Select Download and press b
Download starts.
^ After the message is retrieved, Received folder returns.
Note H Messages up to 300 KB can be received.
Tip H Limit the size of incoming messages (see P.14-33).
Messaging
14
14-4
Retrieving Selected Messages
When more than one message is selected, some may not
be retrieved.
Main Menu H Messages A Received A Options (e)
1
2
3
Select Advanced and press b
4
Repeat Step 3 to select all messages to retrieve
Select a message and press b
4 appears on the right of the selected message.
^ Select a message with Q.
C To uncheck, select a message with 4 A Press b
C To select all, press e P A Select Select All A Press b
C To uncheck all, e P A Select Unselect All A Press b
Press e P
Select Download and press b
Download starts.
^ After messages are retrieved, Received folder opens.
C To cancel download, press d 3 A Press e i
Reply
Reply to messages
Open a message and press e P A Select
Reply or Reply all A Press b A Perform from Step 4
in "Replying to Messages" on P.14-23
^ For MMS messages, subject is automatically entered prefaced
with Re:.
^ Use MMS to send messages to up to 20 recipients at once.
^ Select Reply All to send the same message to all recipients
(To/Cc). Reply All may not appear for some messages.
Forward
Forward messages
Open a message and press e P A Select
Forward A Press b A Perform from Step 5 in
"Forwarding Messages" on P.14-23
^ For MMS messages, subject is automatically entered prefaced
with Fw:.
^ For MMS Notice, Server Mail is transferred (see P.14-31).
Call
Call sender directly from messages received
from Vodafone handsets
Open a message and press e P A Select Call
Contacts A Press b
Messaging
5
6
Select Multiple Select and press b
Using Received Messages
14
14-5
Sending Text Messages
Character Entry Limits
Character limits vary by Message Type.
Overview
Compose Message (see P.14-8)
Sound
vFile
Other File
Video
Enter Recipient (see P.14-12)
Messaging
14
Phone Book
14-6
Direct Entry
Enter Subject (MMS Mail: see P.14-13)
Send Message
160 single-byte alphanumerics
MMS Mail
Approximately 30,000 single-byte alphanumerics, up
to 300 KB including attachments
MMS message text character limit differs by attachment
size and number of recipients.
Attach Files (MMS Mail: see P.14-9)
Image
SMS Mail
Available Entry Items
Available entry items vary by Message Type.
Message
Attachments
Recipient
SMS Mail
Valid
N/A
Valid
Subject
N/A
MMS Mail
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Media Console
Creating a Message
Media Console appears in New Message window for
mail-related functions. When r is on Media Console, use
F to select icons.
Otherwise press D until r appears or press e P to
use the functions.
Send
Recipient Entry window opens.
Picture
N
J
Size:0
Attach still images.
Sound
Create New
SMS
1
2
3
4
Attach sound files.
Media Console
Options
Back
Attach other types of files, Phone
Book or schedule; create slides;
check message text or attached
files; or save to Draft or Templates.
J
Create New
SMS
Select Create New and press b
New Message window opens.
Enter message text and attach files
Press D until r appears on
Media Console
Send
Back
New Message
Window
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
5
Use F to select D N on
Media Console and press b
Recipient Entry window opens.
N
J
Phone Book List
Enter Phone Number
Enter Email Address
My Details
inoue
akira ueno
tomosi utida
takao okada
Select
Back
Recipient
Entry Window
Messaging
Send
N
Size:0
^ Alternatively, press e Y in
Standby.
Video
Attach video images.
Press b, select Messages and
press b
14
14-7
6
7
Enter a recipient and press b
Mail Setting window opens.
Enter subject or specify
Advanced settings, if necessary
C To return to New Message window,
press d W.
C Advanced Settings: see P.14-14
C Saving to Draft: see P.14-15
C Saving as Template: see P.14-16
8
N
J
Create New
Send Message
To:090392XXXX1
Subject:
Message Type:MMS
Preview Message
Advanced
Tip H ^ Messages are sent even if handset is closed.
^ When send fails, messages are saved to Unsent folder
(C appears).
Entering Message Text
Main Menu H Messages
Select
Back
Mail Setting
Window
Select Send Message and press b Q
C To cancel, open Unsent folder (see Step 1 on P.14-17) A
Select a message A Press e P A Select Cancel A
Press b
1
2
Incoming Calls during Message Creation
New Message window returns after call ends.
Preview Message
Messaging
14
14-8
To check messages before sending, select Preview
Message in Mail Setting window A Press b
B Press d W to return.
When Recipient Handset is Off or Out-of-Range
Messages are saved at the Centre, and delivered when
recipient handset connects to the Network.
^ To set the storage period, see P.14-14 "Expiry Time".
Message is deleted if not received by the set Expiry Time.
3
Select Create New and press b
New Message window opens.
N
J
Create New
Size:0
SMS
Enter a message
Press Keypad (0 - 9, ; or :)
for the first character of the message text to
open text entry window.
C Entry Modes: see P.3-2
C Character Entry Limits: see P.14-6
Press b
Send
Back
New Message
Window
C To edit the message, select the text entry field A Press b
A Edit A Press b
C To open Recipient Entry window, select D N on Media
Console A Press b A Perform from Step 2 on P.14-12
Inserting Signature
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Advanced A Press b A Select Signature A
Press b
^ Create signature beforehand (see P.14-31).
Changing Font Colour
In a text entry window, press e P A Select
Advanced A Press b A Select Font Colour A
Press b A Select a colour A Press b
^ Selected colour is applied to the entire text.
Tip H ^ Estimated message size appears in New Message
window.
^ For MMS messages, mail addresses count towards the
character limit.
Attaching Images & Sounds
Attach images, sound files or vFiles.
^ Attach up to 300 KB including message text.
^ To switch to SD Memory Card, press A in file list for Data
Folder (see Step 1 in "Opening Files" on P.8-4).
Main Menu H Messages A Create New
1
2
3
Enter text and press b
^ Files can be attached without entering text.
Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Attaching Images
1 Use F to select U (Picture) and press b
2 Select Saved Pictures and press b
3 Select an image and press b
C For large JPEG images, select a size A Press b
Attaching Sound Files
1 Use F to select F (Sound) and press b
2 Select Saved Sounds and press b
Messaging
C To capture images, select Take Picture A Press b
A Press b (Shoot) A Press e q A Proceed
to Step 4
14
C To record sound, select Record Sound A Press b
A Press b (Start) A Press b (Stop) A Select Save
and Send A Press b A Select Handset Memory or
Memory Card A Press b A Proceed to Step 4
3 Select a file and press b
14-9
Attaching Video Images
1 Use F to select G (Video) and press b
2 Select Saved Videos and press b
C To capture a video image, select Record Video A
Press b A Press b (Start) A Press b (Stop) A
Select Save and Send A Press b A Select To
Handset Memory or To Memory Card A Press b A
Proceed to Step 4
3 Select a file and press b
Attaching Phone Book
1 Use F to select 0 P and press b
2 Select Attach Ph. Book and press b
3 Select an entry and press b
6 appears next to the size indication.
^ Attached Phone Book entries are saved to Data Folder
(Other Documents).
Messaging
Attaching Other Files
1 Use F to select 0 P and press b
2 Select Attach File and press b
3 Select a folder and press b
4 Select a file and press b
14
14-10
6 appears next to the size indication.
4
5
When finished, press D until r appears
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Use F to select D N and press b
C Entering Recipient: see P.14-12
C Saving to Draft: see P.14-15
C Saving as Template: see P.14-16
Attaching Schedule
In New Message window, select 0 P on Media
Console A Press b A Select Attach Appt. A Press
b A Select a day with schedules A Press b A
Select an entry A Press b
Replacing Attachments
In New Message window, select a file A Press
e P A Select Replace Picture, Replace
Sound or Replace Video A Press b A Select a file
A Press b
Deleting Attachments
In New Message window, select a file A Press
e P A Select Remove Picture, Remove
Sound or Remove Video A Press b
B To delete message text, select the text entry field A
Press e P A Select Remove Text A Press b
Playing Sound Files/Video Images
In New Message window, select a file A Press
e P A Select Play A Press b
Preview Message
In New Message window, select 0 P on Media
Console A Press b A Select Preview Message A
Press b
B Press d W to return.
Checking Attachments
In New Message window (with 6), follow these steps:
Select 0 P on Media Console A Press b A
Select View Attachments A Press b (Attachment
list appears.)
B To open an attachment, select a file after the above
operation A Press b
B To delete an attachment, select a file after the above
operation A Press e P A Select Delete A Press b
B To delete all attachments, press e P after the
above operation A Select Delete All A Press b A
Press e i
Creating Slides
Combine message text with sounds or still/video images to
create slides. Received slides appear in order.
Attach up to two files to create a slide. (Select a still image
file and a sound file to attach two.)
Main Menu H Messages A Create New
1
2
3
4
5
Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Use F to select 0 P and press b
N
Select Add Slide Before or Add
Slide After and press b
J
Create New
Size:448 B
MMS
slide 1 (3sec)
Hello!
slide 2 (3sec)
Create next slide
^ Repeat Steps 2 - 6 to create additional slides.
Options
Back
Messaging
6
First Slide
Select Add Slide and press b
^ For Add Slide After, the first slide will be
text/file entered/attached in Step 1.
Note
Confirm compatibility with recipient handsets (file format,
services, etc.) before sending files.
Enter text, press b and attach a file
14
14-11
7
8
When finished, press D until r appears on
Media Console
Entering Recipient
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Main Menu H Messages A Create New A Enter text and others
Use F to select D N and press b
C Entering Recipient: see right
C Saving to Draft: see P.14-15
C Saving as Template: see P.14-16
1
Press D until r appears on Media Console
2
Use F to select D N and
press b
Adding Slides
In New Message window, select the place to insert
a new slide A Press e P A Select Add Slide
A Press b A Select Add Slide Before or Add Slide
After A Press b
Recipient Entry window opens.
Enter Phone Number
Enter Email Address
My Details
inoue
akira ueno
tomosi utida
takao okada
4
Press b
^ The last slide returns to a normal text message.
Messaging
Slide Duration
Set display time for each slide.
B When Custom Time is selected, enter time A Press b
J
Phone Book List
Phone Book
1 Select an entry and press b
2 Select recipient's mail
Select
Back
address or Vodafone
Recipient
Entry Window
handset number
Direct Entry
1 Select Enter Phone Number or Enter Email
Address and press b
2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number
or mail address
Deleting Slides
14
N
3
In New Message window, select a slide A Press
e P A Select Remove Slide A Press b
In New Message window, select a slide A Press
e P A Select Slide Duration A Press b A
Select time A Press b
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Mail Setting window opens.
C Entering Subject: see P.14-13
C Setting Message Type: see P.14-14
C Advanced Settings: see P.14-14
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7 - 14-8
C Saving to Draft: see P.14-15
C Saving as Template: see P.14-16
N
J
Create New
Send Message
To:090392XXXX1
Subject:
Message Type:MMS
Preview Message
Advanced
Select
Back
Mail Setting
Window
14-12
Editing Recipients
Adding Recipients
C Enter up to 20 recipients.
In Mail Setting window, select
the recipient entry field A Press
b A Address List appears A
Select Add Ph. Book A Press
b A Enter or select a number
or address (see P.14-12) A
Press b
B Press d W to return to Mail
Setting window.
N
In Address List, select a number or address A
Press e P A Select Edit Recipients A Press
b A Edit a number or address A Press b
J
Create New
Add Ph.Book
f 090392XXXX1
Deleting Recipients
In Address List, select a number or address A
Press e P A Select Remove A Press b
Select
Back
Address List
Sending from Phone Book Entries
C Open a Phone Book entry and follow these steps:
^ Phone Numbers
Select a number A Press b A Select Create Message
A Press b A Create a message (see P.14-7 - 14-8)
Recipient Type (To, Cc & Bcc)
C To edit, open Address List and follow these steps:
^ Mail Addresses
Select a number or address A Press e P A
Select Change to TO, Change to CC or Change to
BCC A Press b
C In Mail Setting window, press d W to open New
Message window.
B To edit text, select the text entry field A Press b A Edit
A Press b
^ To replace/delete attachments in New Message window,
see "Replacing Attachments" and "Deleting Attachments"
on P.14-10.
Tip H When a mail address is entered, do not use single-byte
katakana or Pictographs in message text and subject.
They may not appear properly on recipient devices.
Entering Subject
^ Subject field is only available for MMS messages.
^ Enter a subject in Mail Setting window (see Step 4 on P.14-12).
1
Messaging
^ Recipients cannot see numbers/addresses set to Bcc.
Editing Text/Attachments from Mail Setting Window
Select a mail address A Press b A Create a
message (see P.14-7 - 14-8)
14
In Mail Setting window, select the subject entry
field and press b
^ Enter up to 40 single-byte alphanumerics (13 single-byte
katakana or double-byte characters).
2
Enter subject and press b
14-13
Setting Message Type
^ Set a message type (SMS or MMS) in Mail Setting window
(see Step 4 on P.14-12).
^ SMS is not available when:
B Subject is entered
B Files are attached
B Sending to mail addresses
B Recipient's phone number is over 20 digits
B Text exceeds 160 single-byte alphanumerics
B Font Colour is not Black
B Priority in Advanced settings is not Normal
B Delivery Time in Advanced settings is not No delay
^ Message Type is set to Automatic by default.
Messaging
14
14-14
1
In Mail Setting window, select Message Type and
press b
2
Select Automatic, SMS or MMS and press b
^ Downgrading to selected message type is not allowed.
appears when SMS is not available.
Advanced Settings
^ These settings are valid for one message when set during
message composition.
^ Advanced settings are not available when resending messages.
^ Specify settings in Mail Setting window (see Step 4 on P.14-12).
Delivery
Report
Request a Delivery Report (see P.14-20) to
confirm message delivery
KOff
In Mail Setting window, select Advanced A Press b
A Select Delivery Report A Press b A Choose On
or Off A Press b
Expiry Time
Set a time limit to store sent messages at the
Centre
KMaximum
In Mail Setting window, select Advanced A Press b
A Select Expiry Time A Press b A Select a limit A
Press b
Priority
Set delivery priority when sending mail
C Available only for MMS messages.
KOff
In Mail Setting window, select Advanced A Press b
A Select Priority A Press b A Select from Low to
High A Press b
^ Priority does not affect delivery speed.
Delivery Time
Saving to Draft
Main Menu H Messages A Create New
1
2
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7
New Message Window
1 Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Set time delay for message delivery
2 Use F to select 0 P and press b
C Available only for MMS messages.
KNo delay
In Mail Setting window, select Advanced A Press b
A Select Delivery Time A Press b A Select a time
A Press b
Enter text and press b
Mail Setting Window
1 Select the recipient entry field and press
eP
3
Select Save to Drafts and press b
4
Press g and then e i to exit
The massage is saved to Draft folder.
^ When memory is low, original window returns. Delete
messages and try again (see P.14-25).
Messaging
Note H The order in which addresses (To, Cc and Bcc) or
attachments appear may change when saving MMS messages.
14
14-15
Creating Message from Template
Using Mail Templates
Save created messages as templates.
Saving as Template
Main Menu H Messages A Create New
1
2
Enter text and press b
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7
New Message Window
1 Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
2 Use F to select 0 P and press b
Mail Setting Window
1 Select the recipient entry field and press
eP
Messaging
14
14-16
3
4
5
6
Select Save as Template and press b
Enter name and press b
Press e P
Select Save and press b
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
Select Templates and press b
Template list appears.
Select a template and press b
New Message window opens.
Edit the template message
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7
Protecting/Unprotecting Templates
After Step 1, select a template A Press e P
A Select Lock or Unlock A Press b
Opening Properties
After Step 1, select a template A Press e P
A Select Message Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
Deleting Templates
After Step 1, select a template (Skip this step when
deleting all) A Press e P A Select Delete or
Delete All A Press b A Press e i
Mail Box
Checking Messages
Messages in Mail Box
Mail Box Type
Messages are organised in separate folders according to
the type.
Main Menu H Messages
1
Mail Box
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
Received
Received messages
Draft
Unfinished messages
Sent
Sent messages
Unsent
Transmission is in progress,
cancelled or failed.
Sort received messages into folders.
Handle messages as with those in
Received folder.
2
Select a message and press b
3
Press g and then e i to exit
Message window opens (see P.14-20 "Message Content").
^ If attached image is too large, it may not appear.
^ Attached slide appears automatically.
^ For Draft, New Message window opens (see P.14-7).
C Use E to scroll.
Note H Messages in Draft, Sent or Unsent may not open if
attached files are deleted from Data Folder.
Messaging
Personal Folders
Select Received, Draft, Sent or Unsent and
press b
14
14-17
Messages in Personal Folders
Resending Messages
C To resend failed messages, open Unsent folder and follow
these steps.
Select a message A Press e P A Select
Re-send A Press b
Editing Messages
Open Draft folder and select a message A Press b
A Edit the message
Open Unsent folder and select a message A Press
e P A Select Edit A Press b A Edit the
message
Tip H Press 0 - 9 to activate Display Backlight.
Messaging
14
14-18
See P.14-20 for details about Personal Folders.
Main Menu H Messages A Personal Folders
1
2
Select a folder and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
Select a message and press b
Message window opens (see P.14-20 "Message Content").
^ The succeeding steps are the same as those for Mail Box.
List Content
Message Type or Status
^ Message Status
e
Unread
H
Read
E
Sent
w
Failed
6
File attached
o
Protected
n
SMS Mail on
USIM Card
^ Message Type or Settings
u
p
N
MMS Mail1
Priority (Low)
V
Q
SMS Mail
MMS Notice2
Q
Delivery Report3
m
Priority (High)
J
Received
kaoru kitayama
Mr. Yamam...
12/20 19:37
tetuya kimura
The meeti...
1Appears only when MMS Mail is subscribed.
2Appears only in Received folder.
3Appears only in Sent folder.
12/20 16:05
ccc@xxx.yyy
Photo
12/19 21:02
Sender or Recipient
reiko katou
How are y ...
12/19 19:20
▼
Options
Back
Received or Sent Date & Time
Subject or Message Text
Subject (MMS Mail) or message text (SMS Mail) appears.
Messaging
^ Number, mail address or name appears.
^ If the number or mail address is not saved in Phone Book, name designated by the sender appears except for
the following:
B MMS Notice
B MMS messages not saved on the Server
14
14-19
Message Content
N
Personal Folders
J
Sender or Recipient
kaoru kitayama
Mr. Yamamoto and Ms.
Kawahashi, please bring
a camera and a tripod
to the wedding. I will
bring a camcorder.
Options
Back
^ Number, mail address or name
appears.
^ If the number or address is not
saved in Phone Book, name
designated by the sender appears
except for the following:
B MMS Notice
B MMS messages not saved on the
Server
Message Text
Confirming Report
Messaging
14
14-20
C Set Delivery Report (see P.14-14, P.14-31) to On and send
messages to receive Delivery Report from the Centre.
Delivery Report arrives A Delivery Notice appears
A Press b (Received folder opens) A Select a
message A Press b
B Press d W to return.
Sort received messages into seven Personal Folders.
Changing Folder Name
Main Menu H Messages A Personal Folders
1
2
3
4
Select a folder and press e P
5
Press e K
Select Rename and press b
Press b
Enter name and press b
^ Enter up to 100 single-byte alphanumerics (33 single-byte
katakana or double-byte characters).
Moving Messages
^ Incoming linked messages cannot be moved.
^ Move messages between folders in Personal Folders.
Main Menu H Messages
1
Select Received or Personal Folders and press b
2
3
4
5
6
Select a message and press e P
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
C For Personal Folders, select a folder A Press b
Select Advanced and press b
Select Move to Folder and press b
Select a folder and press b
Press g to exit
Messaging
14
14-21
Auto Sort
Sort messages automatically by phone number, mail
address or subject.
^ Create up to 5 Distribution Rules for one folder.
^ Distribution Rule with a smaller number has higher priority.
Main Menu H Messages A Settings
1
2
3
4
Select Personal Folders and press b
Select a folder and press b
Select a number and press b
Sorting by Phone Number/Address
1 Select Address and press b
2 Enter a number or address and press b
C Entering Recipient: see P.14-12
Messaging
Sorting by Subject
1 Select Subject and press b
2 Enter text and press b
14
14-22
^ Enter up to 40 single-byte alphanumerics (13 single-byte
katakana or double-byte characters).
3 Press b
5
Press g to exit
Editing Distribution Rule
After Step 2, select a number A Press e P A
Select Edit A Press b A Press e Z A Edit
the rule A Press b
Changing Distribution Rule (Phone Number/Address)
After Step 2, select a number A Press e P A
Select Replace A Press b A Enter a number or
address (see P.14-12) A Press b
Deleting Distribution Rule
After Step 2, select a number A Press e P A
Select Remove A Press b
Replying to Messages
Forwarding Messages
Main Menu H Messages A Received
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
Select a message and press b
Press e P
Select Reply or Reply All and press b
New Message window opens.
^ Use MMS to send messages to up to 20 recipients at once.
^ Select Reply All to send the same message to all recipients
(To/Cc). Reply All may not appear for some messages.
7
Select Send Message and press b Q
Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Use F to select D N and press b
Select Received or Sent and press b
8
Select Send Message and press b Q
Mail Setting window opens.
^ For MMS messages, subject is automatically entered
prefaced with Re:.
Tip H ^ If the sender has set reply address, that address
automatically appears in the To: field.
^ Set whether or not to quote original message (see P.14-32).
^ For Reply All, your handset is included in recipients.
Select a message and press b
Press e P
Select Forward and press b
New Message window opens.
Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Use F to select D N and press b
Recipient Entry window opens.
Enter recipient and press b
Mail Setting window opens.
^ For MMS messages, subject is automatically entered
prefaced with Fw:.
C Entering Recipient: see P.14-12
Message is forwarded.
^ Files attached to the original message are automatically
attached to the forwarding messages.
Messaging
4
5
6
Enter text and press b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
Tip H An MMS message is always forwarded as an MMS
message.
14-23
Sending from Draft
Main Menu H Messages A Draft
1
2
3
4
5
Select a message and press b
New Message window opens.
Press D until r appears on Media Console
^ Skip this step if it is already on Display.
Use F to select D N and press b
Enter a recipient if necessary and press b
C Entering Recipient: see P.14-12
Select Send Message and press b Q
Protecting a Message
Protect important messages in Received or Sent folder from
inadvertent deletion.
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
4
Select Received or Sent and press b
Select a message and press e P
^ To unprotect, select a message with o.
Select Advanced and press b
Select Lock or Unlock and press b
o appears for the protected message.
^ Sent messages are deleted from Draft.
Protecting Selected Messages
Editing Draft Messages
C After Step 1, edit a message and save it (see P.14-15).
(The original message is overwritten.)
Messaging
14
14-24
After Step 1, press e P A Select Advanced
A Press b A Select Multiple Select A Press b A
Select a message A Press b (4 appears) A
Select messages A Press e P A Select
Lock or Unlock A Press b
B To uncheck, select a message with 4 A Press b
B To select all, press e P A Select Select All A
Press b
B To uncheck all, press e P A Select Unselect All
A Press b
Deleting All in Mail Box
Deleting Messages
Selecting Messages to Delete
Main Menu H Messages
1
Select Received, Draft, Sent, Unsent or Personal
Folders (see P.14-17) and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
2
Deleting a Message
1 Select a message and press e P
2 Select Delete and press b
Deleting Selected Messages
1 Press e P
2 Select Advanced and press b
3 Select Multiple Select and press b
4 Select a message and press b
5 Repeat Step 4 to select messages
C To select all, press e P A Select Select All A
Press b
C To uncheck all, press e P A Select Unselect
All A Press b
Main Menu H Messages
1
Select Received, Draft, Sent or Unsent folder
(see P.14-17) and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
2
3
4
5
6
Press e P
Select Advanced and press b
Select Delete All and press b
Press e i
Press g to exit
Messaging
4 appears on the right of the selected message.
C To uncheck, select a message with 4 A Press b
Protected messages cannot be deleted.
14
6 Press e P
7 Select Delete and press b
3
4
Press e i
Press g to exit
14-25
Deleting All in Personal Folders
Linked Info
Protected messages cannot be deleted.
Main Menu H Messages A Personal Folders
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select a folder and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
Press e P
Select Advanced and press b
Select Delete All and press b
Press e i
Press g to exit
Saving Linked Info to Phone Book
Save linked phone numbers, mail addresses and URLs from
message text and sender's/recipient's address to Phone Book.
Selected numbers can only be saved when colour changes.
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
Select Received or Sent and press b
4
Select As New Entry and press b
Auto Delete
Messaging
14
14-26
When memory is full, oldest received/sent messages are
automatically replaced by new messages.
^ To prevent deletion, protect important messages (see P.14-24).
^ Sent is set by default.
Main Menu
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Auto Delete
1
Select an item and press b
2
Press g to exit
C To turn off Auto Delete, select None A Press b
C To set Auto Delete for both Received and Sent folders, select
Both A Press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
Select a message and press b
Saving Sender/Recipient Number or Address
1 Press e P
2 Select Save Address and press b
3 Select a number or address and press b
Saving Number in Text
1 Select a number and press b
2 Select Save to Phone Book and press b
Number or address is entered in corresponding Phone Book
field. Complete other fields and save (see P.4-3 - 4-5).
C To add to existing entry, select a Phone Book entry A Press
b A Press d q
Using Linked Info
Use numbers (TEL:), addresses or URLs (http://, https://
or rtsp://) to place calls, send MMS messages or access
Mobile Internet sites. Selected items can only be used when
colour changes.
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
Select Received or Sent and press b
3
Phone Numbers
1 Select a number and press b
2 Select Call or TV Call and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
Select a message and press b
Saving Attachments to Data Folder
Save attachments (images, sounds, vFiles, etc.) to Data Folder.
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
Select Received or Sent and press b
4
5
Press e P
6
Select Save here and press b
^ Open a message containing a phone number, mail address or
URL.
The number is dialled.
C Creating a Message: see P.14-7 - 14-8
URLs
1 Select a URL and press b
Select a message and press b
^ Select a message with attachments.
Select a file
C To open properties, select a file A Press e P A
Select Details A Press b
B Press d W to return.
Select Save Item and press b
Data Folder opens.
C To save to SD Memory Card Data Folder, press A.
C To save to a sub folder, select folder A Press b
Messaging
Mail Addresses
1 Select an address and press b
2 Select Message and press b
Message list appears (see P.14-19).
14
Handset connects to the Network.
^ For URLs with rtsp://, video or sound is played back
(see P.13-14 "Streaming").
14-27
7
8
9
Enter title (file name) and press b
^ To accept the default title (file name), press e K.
Press e K
File is saved to Data Folder.
^ When memory is full, notification appears. Delete files and try
again (see P.8-14).
Press g and then e i to exit
Mail Box List
Message Details
Open message properties
Main Menu H Messages
Select Received, Draft, Sent, Unsent or Personal Folders
(see P.14-17) A Press b A Select a message A Press
e P A Select Message Details A Press b
C Press d W to return.
Messaging
14
14-28
Read/Unread
Change received message status from read to
unread or vice versa
Main Menu H Messages A Received
Switching Status of a Message
Select a message A Press e P A Select
Advanced A Press b A Select Switch to Unread or
Switch to Read A Press b
Switching Status of Selected Messages
Press e P A Select Advanced A Press b A
Select Multiple Select A Press b A Select a
message A Press b (4 appears) A Select
messages A Press e P A Select Switch to
Unread or Switch to Read A Press b
C To uncheck, select a message with 4 A Press b
C To select all, press e P A Select Select All A Press b
C To uncheck all, press e P A Select Unselect All A
Press b
Tip H Status may not be changed depending on the message.
Server Mail
Checking Server Mail Volume
After Step 1, select Server Mail Volume A Press b
Retrieving Mail List
Use Acquire Mail List to receive Mail List from the Centre
then select messages to retrieve.
B To refresh, press e h A Press e i
B Press d W to return.
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
Select Server Mail Box and press b
C To open received Mail List, select Mail List A Press b
Select Acquire Mail List and press b
After download, Mail List appears.
^ When Mail List has already been received, it is refreshed.
Retrieving All Server Mail
After Step 1, select Retrieve All Mails A Press b
Deleting All Server Mail
Messaging
After Step 1, select Delete All Mails A Press b A
Press e i
14
14-29
Retrieving Selected Messages
Deleting Selected Messages
Main Menu H Messages
Main Menu H Messages
1
2
3
Messaging
14
14-30
Select Server Mail Box and press b
Select Mail List and press b
Select a message and press b
Download starts.
^ Retrieved messages are deleted from Mail List and saved to
Received folder.
1
2
3
4
5
Select Server Mail Box and press b
Select Mail List and press b
Select a message and press e P
Select Delete and press b
Press e i
Forwarding Server Mail
Mail Settings
Forward Server Mail directly to PCs, etc.
Main Menu H Messages A Received
1
2
3
4
Open a message (MMS Notice)
5
Select Send Message and press b Q
^ Select an MMS message with Q.
General Settings
Home Download
Press e P
Select Forward and press b
Main Menu
Set download option for Home Network system
(In Japan only default setting is available)
KAlways defer
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Home Download
Enter a forwarding number or address and press b
Select an item A Press b
Mail Setting window opens.
^ Subject is automatically entered prefaced with Fw:.
C Entering Recipient: see P.14-12
Roam.
Download
Main Menu
Message is forwarded.
Select roaming download option for handset
use outside Japan
KAlways defer
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Roam. Download
Select an item A Press b
From Mail List
Delivery Report
Request Delivery Reports for sent messages
(see P.14-20)
KOff
Main Menu
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Delivery Report
Choose On or Off A Press b
Edit Signature
Main Menu
Messaging
Press b A Select Messages A Press b A Select
Server Mail Box A Press b A Select Mail List A
Press b A Select a message A Press e P
A Select Remote Forward A Press b A Perform
Steps 4 - 5
14
Create or edit signature text
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A Edit
Signature
Press e P A Select Edit A Press b A Enter
signature A Press b twice
14-31
Delivery Rep.
Allow
Select whether or not to send delivery status to
senders requesting Delivery Reports.
KOff
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Main Menu
Delivery Rep. Allow
Choose On or Off A Press b
Reply History
Message Format
Select a message format for new SMS
messages
KNormal
H Messages A Settings A SMS Settings A
Main Menu
Message Format
Select a format A Press b
Quote the original message text when replying
Reply Path
KOff
H Messages A Settings A General Settings A
Main Menu
Reply History
Choose On or Off A Press b
In addition to above settings, use Expiry Time to set a time
limit to store sent messages at the Centre.
Main Menu
Select whether or not to use the same SMS
Centre Address for sent messages and replies
KOff
H Messages A Settings A SMS Settings A Reply
Path
Choose On or Off A Press b
Text
Optimisation
Replace some French/German special
characters with similar English alphabets
KOn
Messaging
14
H Messages A Settings A SMS Settings A Text
Main Menu
Optimisation
SMS Settings
Message Centre
Choose On or Off A Press b
Set SMS Centre Number
K+819066519300
Main Menu
H Messages A Settings A SMS Settings A
Message Centre
Press e P A Select Edit A Press b A Enter
SMS Centre Number A Press b twice
^ Do not change Centre Number unless instructed to do so.
14-32
MMS Settings
Slide Duration
Set a display time for each slide
K3 Seconds
Main Menu
H Messages A Settings A MMS Settings A Slide
Duration
Press e P A Select Edit A Press b A Enter
time A Press b twice
Max Message
Size
Reject messages larger than a specified size
K300 KB
H Messages A Settings A MMS Settings A Max
Main Menu
Message Size
Select a size A Press b
Memory Status
Main Menu H Messages
1
Select Memory Status and press b
C Press d W to return.
Messaging
Check memory status of Mail Box.
14
14-33
V-applications
15-1
V-application Basics
Getting Started
Network Connection
Network V-applications require a network connection.
^ Before using an application, a message appears indicating
that a network connection is required. To disable the network
connection confirmation message, see P.15-7.
^ For connection fees, contact Vodafone Customer Centre,
General Information (see P.16-32).
SD Memory Card
Synchronise SD Memory Cards used on other Vodafone
handsets, PCs and other devices to update V-appli Library.
^ Perform Network Setup before using Web (see P.13-4).
^ Update V-appli Library to avoid malfunction.
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Synchronisation
1
Press e i
Note H V-applications saved to SD Memory Cards from your
handset are exclusively for use on 802SH with your USIM
Card or a newly purchased Vodafone handset.
Tip H It may take some time to update V-appli Library
depending on the number of files saved, etc.
V-a pplica tions
15
15-2
V-application Properties
Downloading V-applications
^ Perform Network Setup before using Web (see P.13-4).
^ Some V-applications can be downloaded to SD Memory Cards.
^ Make sure signal is strong.
Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli Library A More V-Appli
1
2
Open a Mobile Internet site offering V-applications
Select a V-application and press b
After Application received data. Analysing..., properties
appear.
C When a V-application is paused (K appears in grey), press
e i.
3
Press b
4
V-application is automatically saved after
download and a confirmation appears
J
GOLF
Download to Handset
Title
Download Size:
XXKB
Save Size:
XXKB
Download?
OK
Download Size
Save Size
Cancel download (d)
Back
Start download (b)
Properties of V-applications appear before proceeding to
download. Check information and start.
Download starts.
^ Download may take time.
C To stop the download, press d W.
Press e i
Web closes and V-appli Library opens.
C To return to the site, press d c.
C Starting V-applications: see P.15-4
V-a pplica tions
^ When you download a new version of V-application set as
Screensaver, a confirmation appears.
5
N4
15
15-3
Starting V-applications
Operate V-applications with handset open (clamshell open).
Main Menu H V-appli
1
2
Select V-appli Library and press b
V-appli Library opens.
C When a V-application is paused (K appears in grey), press b.
C To use V-application on SD Memory Card, press A.
Select a V-application and press b
V-application starts (K appears).
^ For operations, refer to the source Mobile Internet site, etc.
^ If the V-application cannot be used, V-appli Library returns.
C When the V-application can be set as Screensaver, press e
i or d c.
Tip H When receiving calls/mail, a running V-application pauses.
To set it to remain active, see P.15-9 "Calls & Alarms".
V-a pplica tions
15
15-4
Starting Network V-applications
C When a network connection confirmation message appears
after Step 2, follow these steps.
Choose On or Off A Press b A V-application starts
^ To disable the confirmation message, see P.15-7.
C If Off Line Mode is active (see P.2-18), follow these steps
after Step 2.
Press e i or d c A V-application starts
C Set Security Level for some V-applications (see P.15-7).
Java! Licence Information
Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select
Information A Press b
Memory Status
Press b A Select Settings A Press b A Select
Memory Settings A Press b A Select Memory
Status A Press b A Select Handset or Memory
Card A Press b
Exit, Pause & Resume
Exiting or Pausing V-applications
1
2
Press g while using a V-application
Exiting V-application
1 Select End and press b
V-appli Library returns (K disappears).
Pausing V-application
1 Select Suspend and press b
View V-application details
Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli Library
Select a V-application A Press e P A Select
Information A Press b
C To read the rest, press D. (Press C to scroll back.)
B Press d W to return.
Vendor
Name of the distributor
(or supplier/manufacturer)
Version
Version of the V-application
Description
Description of the V-application
Save Size
File size of the V-application
Select Resume and press b
Recorded
Record game scores, etc. up to this size
C To end the V-application, select End A Press b
C To return to Main Menu, select Cancel A Press b
Screensaver
Compatibility for Screensaver
While a V-application is paused, press b in Standby
^ K (grey) remains in Standby when there is a paused
V-application.
Profile
Versions: VSCL (Overseas)/JCL (Domestic)
Link
Web information of the linked site
Certification
Trusted/Untrusted
Push
Compatibility for Push service
V-a pplica tions
Title of the V-application
Resuming V-applications
2
Properties
Title
Standby returns with K (grey).
^ V-application resumes from where it was paused.
1
Managing V-applications
15
15-5
Move to Card
Move V-applications to SD Memory Card
Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli Library
Select a V-application A Press e P A Select
Move to Card A Press b
C When an older version of the V-application is saved, press
e i or d c.
B Press e i to overwrite.
^ A V-application cannot be moved to SD Memory Card when
the same V-application is already saved.
Delete
Delete V-applications
Using V-applications
Setting Screensaver
Activate a V-application to run in Standby.
^ Only one V-application can be set at a time, and some do not
run in Standby.
^ This setting is not available when a V-application is paused
(K appears in grey).
^ V-applications on SD Memory Card cannot be set as Screensaver.
^ Screensaver is Off by default.
Main Menu H V-appli A Screensaver A Switch On/Off
Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli Library
Select a V-application A Press e P A Select
Delete A Press b A Press e i
V-a pplica tions
15
15-6
^ Handset Code may be required.
^ If the V-application is set as Screensaver, a confirmation
appears and V-appli Library returns. To proceed, cancel the
setting and retry.
1
2
3
4
5
Choose On and press b
C To cancel, choose Off A Press b
Select Set Application and press b
Select a V-application and press b
Press e i
Press g to exit
Activation Time
V-application set as Screensaver starts after Activation Time
elapses. Set time as follows.
Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select
Screensaver A Press b A Select Activation Time
A Press b A Enter time (01 - 10 seconds) A Press b
Suspend Time
Set idle time before V-application set as Screensaver pauses.
Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select
Screensaver A Press b A Select Suspend Time
A Press b A Select time A Press b
Customise the method of confirmation, etc. for each
V-application operation below.
^ Settings:
Phone Call
Place Voice Calls
Network Access
Connect to the Network
Messaging
Send/receive messages
Auto Run
Execute Auto Run files
Local Connection
Connect to other devices
Read User Data
Access Phone Book, Calendar, etc.
Write User Data
Edit Phone Book, Calendar, etc.
Use Multimedia
Use Media Player
Location Access
Send location info
^ These settings are also available for V-applications on SD
Memory Card.
^ Security Level setting may not be available for some V-applications.
Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli Library
1
2
3
Select a V-application and press e P
Select Security Level and press b
Select an item and press b
V-a pplica tions
Note H ^ If handset (with SD Memory Card) is connected to Multi
Stereo Headphones, V-application set as Screensaver
does not start. V-application set as Screensaver closes if
you connect Headphones to handset (with SD Memory
Card).
^ V-applications may not start when an external device
(handsfree kit, etc.) is connected to handset.
^ V-application set as Screensaver that also responds to
incoming communications may take priority over settings
for incoming communications in Mode Settings.
Setting Security Level
15
15-7
4
Select an option and press b
^ Some options may not appear.
Session
Confirmation appears every time
V-applications start
Ask Once
Confirmation appears before the specific
operation
Blanket
No confirmation
No
Reject the operation
Additional Functions
V-application Operational Settings
Application
Volume
Adjust the volume of V-application sounds
KLevel:3
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Application Volume
Use E (adjust the volume) A Press b
^ In Manner mode, volume set in Manner settings applies.
Backlight
Select a Backlight status for V-applications
KNormal Settings
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Backlight A Switch On/Off
Select from Always On to Normal Settings A Press b
V-a pplica tions
15
Always On
Backlight remains on while V-applications
are running
Always Off
Backlight does not turn on while
V-applications are running
Normal
Settings
Backlight turns on/off depending on Backlight
setting in Display Settings (see P.10-6)
Blink
Backlight flashes while compatible
V-applications play
KOn
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Backlight A Blink
Choose On or Off A Press b
15-8
Vibration
Handset vibrates while compatible
V-applications play
Reset
KOn
Choose On, Link to Sound or Off A Press b
^ In Manner mode, vibration set in Manner settings applies.
Calls & Alarms
Select a handset response to incoming calls,
etc. while a V-application is active
KCall/Message/Alarm Priority
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Calls & Alarms
Select from Incoming Call to Alarm A Press b A
Select a handset response A Press b
Call/Message/ V-applications pause for incoming calls,
Alarm Priority mail, etc.
^ For V-applications set as Screensaver, appropriate Notice
appears regardless of the settings.
All settings for V-applications return to default
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Set to Default
Enter Handset Code A Press b A Press e i
^ The settings affected by Set to Default:
Application Volume
Level:3
Backlight
Switch On/Off: Normal Settings
Blink: On
Vibration
On
Calls & Alarms
Call/Message/Alarm Priority
Activation Time
3 seconds
Suspend Time
Off
Memory All
Clear
Delete all V-applications in V-appli Library
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Memory All Clear
Enter Handset Code A Press b A Press e i
V-a pplica tions
A message appears for incoming calls,
Call/Message/ mail, etc. For example, 7090392XXXX1
Alarm Notice appears. Press f to answer the call or
read the message, etc.
Set to Default
Screensaver
Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Vibration
15
15-9
Appendix
16-1
Function Menu
Main Menu
V-appli
Vodafone live!
Media Player
Messages
Camera
Sub Menu
V-appli Library
Screensaver
Settings
Information
Create New
Received
Personal Folders
Draft
Templates
Sent
Unsent
Server Mail Box
Voice Mail
Settings
Memory Status
-
Refer to
P.15-4
P.15-6
P.15-8
P.15-4
P.13-6
P.7-2
P.14-7
P.14-17
P.14-20
P.14-17
P.14-16
P.14-17
P.14-17
P.14-29
P.12-4
P.14-31
P.14-33
P.6-2
Main Menu
Data Folder
Tools
Appendix
16
Phone Book
Sub Menu
Pictures
DCIM
Videos
Sounds&Ringtones
V-appli
Bookmarks
My Saved Page
Text Templates
Other Documents
Calendar
Alarms
Calculator
Voice Recorder
Stopwatch
Tasks
World Clock
Countdown Timer
Expenses Memo
SD Local
SIM Application*
Photo Print
E-Book
Phone Help
Phone Book List
Manage Group
Speed Dial List
My Details
Advanced
Refer to
P.8-2
P.8-2
P.8-2
P.8-2
P.15-2
P.13-11
P.13-11
P.8-13
P.8-2
P.11-2
P.11-5
P.11-8
P.11-9
P.11-17
P.11-18
P.11-20
P.11-21
P.11-22
P.11-22
P.11-24
P.11-28
P.4-2
P.4-7
P.4-12
P.4-13
P.4-8
*Available only when compatible USIM Card is used.
16-2
Main Menu
Barcode
Connectivity
Call Log
Refer to
P.11-11
P.11-13
P.11-14
P.11-15
P.11-13
P.9-3
P.9-9
P.9-14
P.9-15
P.9-19
P.2-11
P.2-11
P.2-11
P.2-11
P.2-12
P.2-13
P.2-20
P.10-2
P.10-4
P.10-6
P.10-7
P.10-5
P.10-8
P.10-9
P.5-5
P.10-10
P.10-13
P.10-13
P.10-14
Appendix
Settings
Sub Menu
Scan Barcode
Open Barcode
Create QR Code
Scan Text
Scanned Results
Bluetooth
Infrared
Network Settings
Internet Setting
Backup/Restore
All Calls
Missed Calls
Received Calls
Dialled Numbers
Call Timers
Call Costs
Message Recorder
Mode Settings
Display Settings
Sound Settings
Time & Date
言語選択 (Language)
User Dictionary
Call Settings
TV Call Settings
Security
Memory Settings
LBS Settings
Master Reset
16
16-3
Troubleshooting
Problem
^ Is Switch On/Off in PIN Entry On?
^ When Switch On/Off in PIN Entry is On, PIN1 is
required. Follow onscreen instructions (see P.10-10).
^ Is USIM Card inserted properly?
^ Is IC chip or terminal clean without fingerprints, etc.?
^ Check if USIM Card is inserted properly. If
inserted properly, Card may be damaged.
^ Check if an appropriate USIM Card is inserted.
Inserted Card may be improper.
^ Wipe with clean, dry cloth and insert properly.
Keypad does not respond
^ Is Keypad Lock active? (b appears)
^ Is Phone Lock active? (l appears)
^ Cancel Keypad Lock (see P.1-29).
^ Cancel Phone Lock (see P.10-11).
^ Dial the number including the dialling code or 0.
Beep continues after dialling
and call cannot be connected
^ Did you dial the number including the dialling
code or first 0?
^ Is handset out-of-range?
(S appears)
^ Is handset off-line? (e appears)
^ Is handset out-of-range?
^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.
Handset does not respond
Insert SIM Card appears when
handset is turned on or
operation is attempted
Appendix
16-4
Solution
^ Press g for 2+ seconds.
^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.
^ Install battery properly.
Handset does not turn on
16
Possible Cause
^ Is g pressed for 2+ seconds?
^ Is battery low or dead?
^ Is battery installed?
S appears and cannot make
calls from handset
^ Is USIM Card correct?
^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.
^ Cancel Off Line Mode (see P.2-18).
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
Calls are interrupted or cut
^ Is signal weak?
^ Is battery low or dead?
^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.
^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.
Cannot enter numbers from
handset Keypad
^ Is Keypad Lock active? (b appears)
^ Is Phone Lock active? (l appears)
^ Cancel Keypad Lock (see P.1-29).
^ Cancel Phone Lock (see P.10-11).
Cannot place calls from
Phone Book
^ Is the number saved as Secret mode entry?
^ Is Phone Book Lock active?
^ Activate Secret mode (see P.10-12).
^ Cancel Phone Book Lock (see P.10-11).
Hear noise while talking
^ This may happen when signal is weak or unstable. ^ Move to a place where signal is strong.
Cannot charge battery
^ Is AC Charger connected correctly to handset or
Desktop Holder?
^ Is AC Charger plugged in firmly?
^ Is battery installed?
^ Is handset in Desktop Holder correctly?
^ Are handset, battery, Charger terminals &
Connection Terminal (Desktop Holder) and
External Device Connector clean?
^ Battery may not be charged if temperature is not
within 5]C to 35]C.
^ Battery has run out or is defective.
^ Plug in again.
^
^
^
^
Plug in again.
Install battery properly.
Insert correctly.
Clean with a cotton swab.
^ Handle within ambient temperature of 5]C - 35]C.
^ Replace battery with a new one.
-
^ AC Charger or Desktop Holder may heat up while
Handset or accessories are hot
charging. Handset may also heat up if used for long
periods. This is normal if they are not extremely hot.
-
Appendix
^ Charging time shortens when battery is not empty.
Charging time is shorter
16
16-5
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
Battery runs out quickly
^ Battery runs out faster depending on the
environment (temperatures, charging/signal
conditions), usage or settings.
^ Refer to "Estimated Hours of Use (fully charged
battery)", "Battery Time" and "Extend Battery Time"
(see P.1-17 - 1-18).
Display flickers
^ Display may flicker under fluorescent lights.
-
Display is dark when
Backlight is off
^ Panel construction characteristic; not a malfunction.
Sound does not come from
handset speaker
^ Is Manner mode set?
^ Cancel Manner mode (see P.2-17).
Cannot use Bluetooth or USB
transmission with Handset
Manager
^ Is PC port for Bluetooth or USB connection the
same as the port set in Handset Manager?
^ Set the same port in interface settings of Handset
Manager.
Cannot connect handset with
Handset Manager
^ Is Handset Manager operating properly?
^ Reboot the computer.
-
Tip H ^ If transmission is cancelled with handset while files are being transferred using Handset Manager, the command may not be
accepted depending on timing.
^ For repairs and after-sales services, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance (see P.16-32).
Indicators & Recharge Warning
Appendix
16
16-6
CS appears
Handset is out-of-range. Move for a better signal.
CRecharge battery. appears and short beeps sound
Battery is low (see P.1-19).
Charge or replace battery immediately.
Cb appears
Keypad Lock is active (see P.1-29).
Cancel to use Keypad. Press keys for Any Key Answer to
answer calls (see P.2-5).
Cl appears
Phone Lock is active (see P.10-11).
Cancel to place calls, etc. Press keys for Any Key Answer to
answer calls (see P.2-5).
V-application Display Messages
Display
Application is
currently
suspended. End
application?
○○
Download to Handset
Cause
Solution
^ A V-application is paused.
^ Close the application and try again.
^ Download may fail due to low battery.
^ Charge battery beforehand.
^ Library memory is full.
^ Press e K to continue downloading and press
d W to cancel.
^ 100 V-applications are already saved. The message
appears as a confirmation.
^ Delete applications and try again (see P.15-6).
Download Size:
XXKB
Save Size:
XXKB
Download?
Battery low.
Download may not
complete.
○○
Not Enough Memory
in Handset.
Download to
Memory Card
Appendix
Download Size:
XXKB
Save Size:
XXKB
Download?
Exceeds limit
cannot save.
16
16-7
Display
New Version Found
Continue Download?
Cause
Solution
^ You are downloading a new version of the saved
application.
^ Press e i to continue downloading and press
d c to cancel.
Tip H V-applications cannot be downloaded when the following messages appear:
^ Improper data cannot download application.
^ Application size too large. Cannot download.
Display Messages (Messaging)
CMessages with image attachments cannot be sent
Possible causes include the following. For details, contact
Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.16-32).
^ Recipient does not subscribe to MMS, Super Mail or Long Mail.
^ Recipient handset is not MMS compatible.
B The maximum size which recipient can receive differs
depending on recipient handset.
^ Recipient handset is not JPEG compatible.
B Convert JPEG files to PNG files before sending to PNG
compatible handsets (see P.8-13).
Appendix
16
16-8
CWhen handset memory is full
New messages cannot be delivered. A confirmation
message appears (Y appears in red). Undeliverable mail is
saved at the Centre.
^ Delete messages to free memory for new ones (see P.14-25).
When memory is available, new messages are delivered
automatically.
^ Delete unprotected messages automatically to receive new
ones (see P.14-26).
^ Even if memory is not full, handset cannot receive new
messages larger than remaining memory.
Character Code List
First Three
Digits
0
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
010
(スペース) 、 。 , .・ : ; ?
011 ! ゛ ゜ ´ ` ¨ ^  ̄ _ ヽ
012 ヾ ゝ ゞ 〃 仝 々 〆 〇 ー ―
013 ‐ / \ ∼ ‖ | … ‥‘ ’
014 “ ”( )〔 〕[ ]{ }
015 〈 〉《 》「 」『 』【 】
016 + − ± × ÷ = ≠ < > ≦
017 ≧ ∞ ∴ ♂ ♀ ° ′ ″ ℃ ¥
018 $ ¢ £ % # & @ § ☆
019 ★ ○ ● ◎ ◇
020
◆□■△▲▽▼※〒
021 → ← ↑ ↓ 〓
022
∈∋⊆⊇
023 ⊂ ⊃ ∪ ∩
024
∧∨¬⇒⇔∀∃
026
027
028
029
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMNOPQ
RSTUVWXYZ
abcde
fghijklmno
pqrstuvwxy
z
ぁあぃいぅうぇえぉ
おかがきぎくぐけげこ
ごさざしじすずせぜそ
ぞただちぢっつづてで
とどなにぬねのはばぱ
ひびぴふぶぷへべぺほ
ぼぽまみむめもゃやゅ
Last Digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
First Three
Digits
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
161
162
163
ァ ア ィ イ ゥ ウ ェ エ ォ 164
オカガキギクグケゲコ
ゴ サ ザ シ ジ ス ズ セ ゼ ソ 164
ゾ タ ダ チ ヂ ッ ツ ヅ テ デ 165
ト ド ナ ニ ヌ ネ ノ ハ バ パ 166
ヒ ビ ピ フ ブ プ ヘ ベ ペ ホ 167
ボ ポ マ ミ ム メ モ ャ ヤ ュ 168
ユ ョ ヨ ラ リ ル レ ロ ヮ ワ 169
170
ヰヱヲンヴヵヶ
060
061
062
063
064
065
ΑΒΓΔΕΖΗΘΙ
ΚΛΜΝΞΟΠΡΣΤ
ΥΦΧΨΩ
αβγδεζη
θικλμνξοπρ
στυφχψω
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
АБВГДЕЁЖЗ
ИЙКЛМНОПРС
ТУФХЦЧШЩЪЫ
ЬЭЮЯ
а
бвгдеёжзий
клмнопрсту
фхцчшщъыьэ
юя
080
081
082
083
─│┌┐┘└├┬┤
┴┼━┃┏┓┛┗┣┳
┫┻╋┠┯┨┷┿┝┰
┥┸╂
047
048
160
ゆょよらりるれろゎわ
ゐゑをん
170
171
172
173
173
174
175
176
177
178
178
179
180
181
182
182
183
184
185
186
あ
亜 唖 娃 阿 哀 愛 挨 姶 逢 187
Last Digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
葵茜穐悪握渥旭葦芦鯵
梓圧斡扱宛姐虻飴絢綾
鮎或粟袷安庵按暗案闇
鞍杏
い
以伊位依偉囲夷委
威尉惟意慰易椅為畏異
移維緯胃萎衣謂違遺医
井亥域育郁磯一壱溢逸
稲茨芋鰯允印咽員因姻
引飲淫胤蔭
院陰隠韻吋
う
右宇烏羽
迂雨卯鵜窺丑碓臼渦嘘
唄欝蔚鰻姥厩浦瓜閏噂
云運雲
え
荏餌叡営嬰影映
曳栄永泳洩瑛盈穎頴英
衛詠鋭液疫益駅悦謁越
閲榎厭円園堰奄宴延怨
掩援沿演炎焔煙燕猿縁
艶苑薗遠鉛鴛塩
お
於汚甥
凹央奥往応
押旺横欧殴王翁襖鴬
鴎黄岡沖荻億屋憶臆桶
牡乙俺卸恩温穏音
か
下化
仮何伽価佳加可嘉夏嫁
家寡科暇果架歌河火珂
禍禾稼箇花苛茄荷華菓
蝦課嘩貨迦過霞蚊俄峨
我牙画臥芽蛾賀雅餓駕
First Three
Digits
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
Last Digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
介会解回塊壊廻快怪悔
恢懐戒拐改
魁晦械海灰界皆絵芥
蟹開階貝凱劾外咳害崖
慨概涯碍蓋街該鎧骸浬
馨蛙垣柿蛎鈎劃嚇各廓
拡撹格核殻獲確穫覚角
赫較郭閣隔革学岳楽額
顎掛笠樫橿梶鰍潟割喝
恰括活渇滑葛褐轄且鰹
叶椛樺鞄株兜竃蒲釜鎌
噛鴨栢茅萱
粥刈苅瓦乾侃冠寒刊
勘勧巻喚堪姦完官寛干
幹患感慣憾換敢柑桓棺
款歓汗漢澗潅環甘監看
竿管簡緩缶翰肝艦莞観
諌貫還鑑間閑関陥韓館
舘丸含岸巌玩癌眼岩翫
贋雁頑顔願
き
企伎危喜器
基奇嬉寄岐希幾忌揮机
旗既期棋棄
機帰毅気汽畿祈季稀
紀徽規記貴起軌輝飢騎
鬼亀偽儀妓宜戯技擬欺
犠疑祇義蟻誼議掬菊鞠
吉吃喫桔橘詰砧杵黍却
客脚虐逆丘久仇休及吸
宮弓急救朽求汲泣灸球
究窮笈級糾給旧牛去居
巨拒拠挙渠虚許距鋸漁
禦魚亨享京
供侠僑兇競共凶協匡
卿叫喬境峡強彊怯恐恭
挟教橋況狂狭矯胸脅興
Appendix
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
∠⊥͡∂∇≡≒≪≫√
∽∝∵∫∬
ʼn♯♭♪†‡¶
⃝
First Three
Digits
16
16-9
First Three
Digits
0
223
224
225
226
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
Appendix
16
16-10
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
蕎郷鏡響饗驚仰凝尭暁
業局曲極玉桐粁僅勤均
巾錦斤欣欽琴禁禽筋緊
芹菌衿襟謹近金吟銀
く
九
倶句区狗玖矩苦躯駆駈
駒具愚虞喰空偶寓遇隅
串櫛釧屑屈
掘窟沓靴轡窪熊隈粂
栗繰桑鍬勲君薫訓群軍
郡
け
卦袈祁係傾刑兄啓圭
珪型契形径恵慶慧憩掲
携敬景桂渓畦稽系経継
繋罫茎荊蛍計詣警軽頚
鶏芸迎鯨劇戟撃激隙桁
傑欠決潔穴結血訣月件
倹倦健兼券剣喧圏堅嫌
建憲懸拳捲
検権牽犬献研硯絹県
肩見謙賢軒遣鍵険顕験
鹸元原厳幻弦減源玄現
絃舷言諺限
こ
乎個古呼固
姑孤己庫弧戸故枯湖狐
糊袴股胡菰虎誇跨鈷雇
顧鼓五互伍午呉吾娯後
御悟梧檎瑚碁語誤護醐
乞鯉交佼侯候倖光公功
効勾厚口向
后喉坑垢好孔孝宏工
巧巷幸広庚康弘恒慌抗
拘控攻昂晃更杭校梗構
江洪浩港溝甲皇硬稿糠
紅紘絞綱耕考肯肱腔膏
航荒行衡講貢購郊酵鉱
砿鋼閤降項香高鴻剛劫
First Three
Digits
0
257
258
259
260
261
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
号合壕拷濠豪轟麹克刻
告国穀酷鵠黒獄漉腰甑
忽惚骨狛込
此頃今困坤墾婚恨懇
昏昆根梱混痕紺艮魂
さ
些
佐叉唆嵯左差査沙瑳砂
詐鎖裟坐座挫債催再最
哉塞妻宰彩才採栽歳済
災采犀砕砦祭斎細菜裁
載際剤在材罪財冴坂阪
堺榊肴咲崎埼碕鷺作削
咋搾昨朔柵窄策索錯桜
鮭笹匙冊刷
察拶撮擦札殺薩雑皐
鯖捌錆鮫皿晒三傘参山
惨撒散桟燦珊産算纂蚕
讃賛酸餐斬暫残
し
仕仔伺
使刺司史嗣四士始姉姿
子屍市師志思指支孜斯
施旨枝止死氏獅祉私糸
紙紫肢脂至視詞詩試誌
諮資賜雌飼歯事似侍児
字寺慈持時
次滋治爾璽痔磁示而
耳自蒔辞汐鹿式識鴫竺
軸宍雫七叱執失嫉室悉
湿漆疾質実蔀篠偲柴芝
屡蕊縞舎写射捨赦斜煮
社紗者謝車遮蛇邪借勺
尺杓灼爵酌釈錫若寂弱
惹主取守手朱殊狩珠種
腫趣酒首儒受呪寿授樹
綬需囚収周
宗就州修愁拾洲秀秋
終繍習臭舟蒐衆襲讐蹴
輯週酋酬集醜什住充十
First Three
Digits
0
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
315
316
317
318
319
320
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
従戎柔汁渋獣縦重銃叔
夙宿淑祝縮粛塾熟出術
述俊峻春瞬竣舜駿准循
旬楯殉淳準潤盾純巡遵
醇順処初所暑曙渚庶緒
署書薯藷諸助叙女序徐
恕鋤除傷償
勝匠升召哨商唱嘗奨
妾娼宵将小少尚庄床廠
彰承抄招掌捷昇昌昭晶
松梢樟樵沼消渉湘焼焦
照症省硝礁祥称章笑粧
紹肖菖蒋蕉衝裳訟証詔
詳象賞醤鉦鍾鐘障鞘上
丈丞乗冗剰城場壌嬢常
情擾条杖浄状畳穣蒸譲
醸錠嘱埴飾
拭植殖燭織職色触食
蝕辱尻伸信侵唇娠寝審
心慎振新晋森榛浸深申
疹真神秦紳臣芯薪親診
身辛進針震人仁刃塵壬
尋甚尽腎訊迅陣靭
す
笥諏
須酢図厨逗吹垂帥推水
炊睡粋翠衰遂酔錐錘随
瑞髄崇嵩数枢趨雛据杉
椙菅頗雀裾
澄摺寸
せ
世瀬畝是凄制
勢姓征性成政整星晴棲
栖正清牲生盛精聖声製
西誠誓請逝醒青静斉税
脆隻席惜戚斥昔析石積
籍績脊責赤跡蹟碩切拙
接摂折設窃節説雪絶舌
蝉仙先千占宣専尖川戦
扇撰栓栴泉浅洗染潜煎
First Three
Digits
0
329
330
331
332
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
煽旋穿箭線
繊羨腺舛船薦詮賎践
選遷銭銑閃鮮前善漸然
全禅繕膳糎
そ
噌塑岨措曾
曽楚狙疏疎礎祖租粗素
組蘇訴阻遡鼠僧創双叢
倉喪壮奏爽宋層匝惣想
捜掃挿掻操早曹巣槍槽
漕燥争痩相窓糟総綜聡
草荘葬蒼藻装走送遭鎗
霜騒像増憎
臓蔵贈造促側則即息
捉束測足速俗属賊族続
卒袖其揃存孫尊損村遜
た
他多太汰詑唾堕妥惰打
柁舵楕陀駄騨体堆対耐
岱帯待怠態戴替泰滞胎
腿苔袋貸退逮隊黛鯛代
台大第醍題鷹滝瀧卓啄
宅托択拓沢濯琢託鐸濁
諾茸凧蛸只
叩但達辰奪脱巽竪辿
棚谷狸鱈樽誰丹単嘆坦
担探旦歎淡湛炭短端箪
綻耽胆蛋誕鍛団壇弾断
暖檀段男談
ち
値知地弛恥
智池痴稚置致蜘遅馳築
畜竹筑蓄逐秩窒茶嫡着
中仲宙忠抽昼柱注虫衷
註酎鋳駐樗瀦猪苧著貯
丁兆凋喋寵
帖帳庁弔張彫徴懲挑
暢朝潮牒町眺聴脹腸蝶
調諜超跳銚長頂鳥勅捗
直朕沈珍賃鎮陳
First Three
Digits
0
363
364
365
366
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
386
387
388
388
389
390
390
391
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
つ
津墜椎
槌追鎚痛通塚栂掴槻佃
漬柘辻蔦綴鍔椿潰坪壷
嬬紬爪吊釣鶴
て
亭低停偵
剃貞呈堤定帝底庭廷弟
悌抵挺提梯汀碇禎程締
艇訂諦蹄逓
邸鄭釘鼎泥摘擢敵滴
的笛適鏑溺哲徹撤轍迭
鉄典填天展店添纏甜貼
転顛点伝殿澱田電
と
兎吐
堵塗妬屠徒斗杜渡登菟
賭途都鍍砥砺努度土奴
怒倒党冬凍刀唐塔塘套
宕島嶋悼投搭東桃梼棟
盗淘湯涛灯燈当痘祷等
答筒糖統到
董蕩藤討謄豆踏逃透
鐙陶頭騰闘働動同堂導
憧撞洞瞳童胴萄道銅峠
鴇匿得徳涜特督禿篤毒
独読栃橡凸突椴届鳶苫
寅酉瀞噸屯惇敦沌豚遁
頓呑曇鈍
な
奈那内乍凪薙
謎灘捺鍋楢馴縄畷南楠
軟難汝
に
二尼弐迩匂賑肉
虹廿日乳入
如尿韮任妊忍認
ぬ∼の
濡禰
祢寧葱猫熱年念捻撚燃
First Three
Digits
0
392
393
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
422
423
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
粘乃廼之埜嚢悩濃納能
脳膿農覗蚤
は
巴把播覇杷
波派琶破婆罵芭馬俳廃
拝排敗杯盃牌背肺輩配
倍培媒梅楳煤狽買売賠
陪這蝿秤矧萩伯剥博拍
柏泊白箔粕舶薄迫曝漠
爆縛莫駁麦
函箱硲箸肇筈櫨幡肌
畑畠八鉢溌発醗髪伐罰
抜筏閥鳩噺塙蛤隼伴判
半反叛帆搬斑板氾汎版
犯班畔繁般藩販範釆煩
頒飯挽晩番盤磐蕃蛮
ひ
匪
卑否妃庇彼悲扉批披斐
比泌疲皮碑秘緋罷肥被
誹費避非飛樋簸備尾微
枇毘琵眉美
鼻柊稗匹疋髭彦膝菱
肘弼必畢筆逼桧姫媛紐
百謬俵彪標氷漂瓢票表
評豹廟描病秒苗錨鋲蒜
蛭鰭品彬斌浜瀕貧賓頻
敏瓶
ふ
不付埠夫婦富冨布
府怖扶敷斧普浮父符腐
膚芙譜負賦赴阜附侮撫
武舞葡蕪部封楓風葺蕗
伏副復幅服
福腹複覆淵弗払沸仏
物鮒分吻噴墳憤扮焚奮
粉糞紛雰文聞
へ
丙併兵塀
幣平弊柄並蔽閉陛米頁
First Three
Digits
0
424
425
426
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
436
437
438
439
440
440
441
441
442
442
443
444
444
445
446
447
447
448
449
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
僻壁癖碧別瞥蔑箆偏変
片篇編辺返遍便勉娩弁
鞭
ほ
保舗鋪圃捕歩甫補輔
穂募墓慕戊暮母簿菩倣
俸包呆報奉宝峰峯崩庖
抱捧放方朋
法泡烹砲縫胞芳萌蓬
蜂褒訪豊邦鋒飽鳳鵬乏
亡傍剖坊妨帽忘忙房暴
望某棒冒紡肪膨謀貌貿
鉾防吠頬北僕卜墨撲朴
牧睦穆釦勃没殆堀幌奔
本翻凡盆
ま
摩磨魔麻埋妹
昧枚毎哩槙幕膜枕鮪柾
鱒桝亦俣又抹末沫迄侭
繭麿万慢満
漫蔓
み
味未魅巳箕岬密
蜜湊蓑稔脈妙粍民眠
む
務
夢無牟矛霧鵡椋婿娘
め
冥
名命明盟迷銘鳴姪牝滅
免棉綿緬面麺
も
摸模茂妄
孟毛猛盲網耗蒙儲木黙
目杢勿餅尤戻籾貰問悶
紋門匁
や
也冶夜爺耶野弥
矢厄役約薬訳躍靖柳薮
鑓
First Three
Digits
0
449
450
451
452
452
453
454
455
456
456
457
458
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
470
471
472
473
473
474
475
476
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ゆ
愉愈油癒
諭輸唯佑優勇友宥幽
悠憂揖有柚湧涌猶猷由
祐裕誘遊邑郵雄融夕
よ
予
余与誉輿預傭幼妖容庸
揚揺擁曜楊様洋溶熔用
窯羊耀葉蓉要謡踊遥陽
養慾抑欲沃浴翌翼淀
ら
羅
螺裸来莱頼雷洛絡落酪
乱卵嵐欄濫藍蘭覧
り
利吏
履李梨理璃
痢裏裡里離陸律率立
葎掠略劉流溜琉留硫粒
隆竜龍侶慮旅虜了亮僚
両凌寮料梁涼猟療瞭稜
糧良諒遼量陵領力緑倫
厘林淋燐琳臨輪隣鱗麟
る∼れ
瑠塁涙累類令伶例冷励
嶺怜玲礼苓鈴隷零霊麗
齢暦歴列劣烈裂廉恋憐
漣煉簾練聯
蓮連錬
ろ
呂魯櫓炉賂路
露労婁廊弄朗楼榔浪漏
牢狼篭老聾蝋郎六麓禄
肋録論
わ
倭和話歪賄脇惑
枠鷲亙亘鰐詫藁蕨椀湾
碗腕
Appendix
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
Last Digit
1
16
16-11
First Three
Digits
0
Appendix
16
16-12
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
弌丐丕个丱丶丼丿乂
乖乘亂亅豫亊舒弍于亞
亟亠亢亰亳亶从仍仄仆
仂仗仞仭仟价伉佚估佛
佝佗佇佶侈侏侘佻佩佰
侑佯來侖儘俔俟俎俘俛
俑俚俐俤俥倚倨倔倪倥
倅伜俶倡倩倬俾俯們倆
偃假會偕偐偈做偖偬偸
傀傚傅傴傲
僉僊傳僂僖僞僥僭僣
僮價僵儉儁儂儖儕儔儚
儡儺儷儼儻儿兀兒兌兔
兢竸兩兪兮冀冂囘册冉
冏冑冓冕冖冤冦冢冩冪
冫决冱冲冰况冽凅凉凛
几處凩凭凰凵凾刄刋刔
刎刧刪刮刳刹剏剄剋剌
剞剔剪剴剩剳剿剽劍劔
劒剱劈劑辨
辧劬劭劼劵勁勍勗勞
勣勦飭勠勳勵勸勹匆匈
甸匍匐匏匕匚匣匯匱匳
匸區卆卅丗卉卍凖卞卩
卮夘卻卷厂厖厠厦厥厮
厰厶參簒雙叟曼燮叮叨
叭叺吁吽呀听吭吼吮吶
吩吝呎咏呵咎呟呱呷呰
咒呻咀呶咄咐咆哇咢咸
咥咬哄哈咨
咫哂咤咾咼哘哥哦唏
唔哽哮哭哺哢唹啀啣啌
售啜啅啖啗唸唳啝喙喀
咯喊喟啻啾喘喞單啼喃
喩喇喨嗚嗅嗟嗄嗜嗤嗔
嘔嗷嘖嗾嗽嘛嗹噎噐營
嘴嘶嘲嘸噫噤嘯噬噪嚆
First Three
Digits
0
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
嚀嚊嚠嚔嚏嚥嚮嚶嚴囂
嚼囁囃囀囈囎囑囓囗囮
囹圀囿圄圉
圈國圍圓團圖嗇圜圦
圷圸坎圻址坏坩埀垈坡
坿垉垓垠垳垤垪垰埃埆
埔埒埓堊埖埣堋堙堝塲
堡塢塋塰毀塒堽塹墅墹
墟墫墺壞墻墸墮壅壓壑
壗壙壘壥壜壤壟壯壺壹
壻壼壽夂夊夐夛梦夥夬
夭夲夸夾竒奕奐奎奚奘
奢奠奧奬奩
奸妁妝佞侫妣妲姆姨
姜妍姙姚娥娟娑娜娉娚
婀婬婉娵娶婢婪媚媼媾
嫋嫂媽嫣嫗嫦嫩嫖嫺嫻
嬌嬋嬖嬲嫐嬪嬶嬾孃孅
孀孑孕孚孛孥孩孰孳孵
學斈孺宀它宦宸寃寇寉
寔寐寤實寢寞寥寫寰寶
寳尅將專對尓尠尢尨尸
尹屁屆屎屓
屐屏孱屬屮乢屶屹岌
岑岔妛岫岻岶岼岷峅岾
峇峙峩峽峺峭嶌峪崋崕
崗嵜崟崛崑崔崢崚崙崘
嵌嵒嵎嵋嵬嵳嵶嶇嶄嶂
嶢嶝嶬嶮嶽嶐嶷嶼巉巍
巓巒巖巛巫已巵帋帚帙
帑帛帶帷幄幃幀幎幗幔
幟幢幤幇幵并幺麼广庠
廁廂廈廐廏
廖廣廝廚廛廢廡廨廩
廬廱廳廰廴廸廾弃弉彝
彜弋弑弖弩弭弸彁彈彌
彎弯彑彖彗彙彡彭彳彷
徃徂彿徊很徑徇從徙徘
徠徨徭徼忖忻忤忸忱忝
悳忿怡恠怙怐怩怎怱怛
First Three
Digits
0
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
怕怫怦怏怺恚恁恪恷恟
恊恆恍恣恃恤恂恬恫恙
悁悍惧悃悚
悄悛悖悗悒悧悋惡悸
惠惓悴忰悽惆悵惘慍愕
愆惶惷愀惴惺愃愡惻惱
愍愎慇愾愨愧慊愿愼愬
愴愽慂慄慳慷慘慙慚慫
慴慯慥慱慟慝慓慵憙憖
憇憬憔憚憊憑憫憮懌懊
應懷懈懃懆憺懋罹懍懦
懣懶懺懴懿懽懼懾戀戈
戉戍戌戔戛
戞戡截戮戰戲戳扁扎
扞扣扛扠扨扼抂抉找抒
抓抖拔抃抔拗拑抻拏拿
拆擔拈拜拌拊拂拇抛拉
挌拮拱挧挂挈拯拵捐挾
捍搜捏掖掎掀掫捶掣掏
掉掟掵捫捩掾揩揀揆揣
揉插揶揄搖搴搆搓搦搶
攝搗搨搏摧摯摶摎攪撕
撓撥撩撈撼
據擒擅擇撻擘擂擱擧
舉擠擡抬擣擯攬擶擴擲
擺攀擽攘攜攅攤攣攫攴
攵攷收攸畋效敖敕敍敘
敞敝敲數斂斃變斛斟斫
斷旃旆旁旄旌旒旛旙无
旡旱杲昊昃旻杳昵昶昴
昜晏晄晉晁晞晝晤晧晨
晟晢晰暃暈暎暉暄暘暝
曁暹曉暾暼
曄暸曖曚曠昿曦曩曰
曵曷朏朖朞朦朧霸朮朿
朶杁朸朷杆杞杠杙杣杤
枉杰枩杼杪枌枋枦枡枅
枷柯枴柬枳柩枸柤柞柝
柢柮枹柎柆柧檜栞框栩
桀桍栲桎梳栫桙档桷桿
First Three
Digits
0
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
梟梏梭梔條梛梃檮梹桴
梵梠梺椏梍桾椁棊椈棘
椢椦棡椌棍
棔棧棕椶椒椄棗棣椥
棹棠棯椨椪椚椣椡棆楹
楷楜楸楫楔楾楮椹楴椽
楙椰楡楞楝榁楪榲榮槐
榿槁槓榾槎寨槊槝榻槃
榧樮榑榠榜榕榴槞槨樂
樛槿權槹槲槧樅榱樞槭
樔槫樊樒櫁樣樓橄樌橲
樶橸橇橢橙橦橈樸樢檐
檍檠檄檢檣
檗蘗檻櫃櫂檸檳檬櫞
櫑櫟檪櫚櫪櫻欅蘖櫺欒
欖鬱欟欸欷盜欹飮歇歃
歉歐歙歔歛歟歡歸歹歿
殀殄殃殍殘殕殞殤殪殫
殯殲殱殳殷殼毆毋毓毟
毬毫毳毯麾氈氓气氛氤
氣汞汕汢汪沂沍沚沁沛
汾汨汳沒沐泄泱泓沽泗
泅泝沮沱沾
沺泛泯泙泪洟衍洶洫
洽洸洙洵洳洒洌浣涓浤
浚浹浙涎涕濤涅淹渕渊
涵淇淦涸淆淬淞淌淨淒
淅淺淙淤淕淪淮渭湮渮
渙湲湟渾渣湫渫湶湍渟
湃渺湎渤滿渝游溂溪溘
滉溷滓溽溯滄溲滔滕溏
溥滂溟潁漑灌滬滸滾漿
滲漱滯漲滌
漾漓滷澆潺潸澁澀潯
潛濳潭澂潼潘澎澑濂潦
澳澣澡澤澹濆澪濟濕濬
濔濘濱濮濛瀉瀋濺瀑瀁
瀏濾瀛瀚潴瀝瀘瀟瀰瀾
瀲灑灣炙炒炯烱炬炸炳
炮烟烋烝烙焉烽焜焙煥
First Three
Digits
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
煕熈煦煢煌煖煬熏燻熄
熕熨熬燗熹熾燒燉燔燎
燠燬燧燵燼
燹燿爍爐爛爨爭爬爰
爲爻爼爿牀牆牋牘牴牾
犂犁犇犒犖犢犧犹犲狃
狆狄狎狒狢狠狡狹狷倏
猗猊猜猖猝猴猯猩猥猾
獎獏默獗獪獨獰獸獵獻
獺珈玳珎玻珀珥珮珞璢
琅瑯琥珸琲琺瑕琿瑟瑙
瑁瑜瑩瑰瑣瑪瑶瑾璋璞
璧瓊瓏瓔珱
瓠瓣瓧瓩瓮瓲瓰瓱瓸
瓷甄甃甅甌甎甍甕甓甞
甦甬甼畄畍畊畉畛畆畚
畩畤畧畫畭畸當疆疇畴
疊疉疂疔疚疝疥疣痂疳
痃疵疽疸疼疱痍痊痒痙
痣痞痾痿痼瘁痰痺痲痳
瘋瘍瘉瘟瘧瘠瘡瘢瘤瘴
瘰瘻癇癈癆癜癘癡癢癨
癩癪癧癬癰
癲癶癸發皀皃皈皋皎
皖皓皙皚皰皴皸皹皺盂
盍盖盒盞盡盥盧盪蘯盻
眈眇眄眩眤眞眥眦眛眷
眸睇睚睨睫睛睥睿睾睹
瞎瞋瞑瞠瞞瞰瞶瞹瞿瞼
瞽瞻矇矍矗矚矜矣矮矼
砌砒礦砠礪硅碎硴碆硼
碚碌碣碵碪碯磑磆磋磔
碾碼磅磊磬
磧磚磽磴礇礒礑礙礬
礫祀祠祗祟祚祕祓祺祿
禊禝禧齋禪禮禳禹禺秉
秕秧秬秡秣稈稍稘稙稠
稟禀稱稻稾稷穃穗穉穡
穢穩龝穰穹穽窈窗窕窘
窖窩竈窰窶竅竄窿邃竇
First Three
Digits
0
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
竊竍竏竕竓站竚竝竡竢
竦竭竰笂笏笊笆笳笘笙
笞笵笨笶筐
筺笄筍笋筌筅筵筥筴
筧筰筱筬筮箝箘箟箍箜
箚箋箒箏筝箙篋篁篌篏
箴篆篝篩簑簔篦篥籠簀
簇簓篳篷簗簍篶簣簧簪
簟簷簫簽籌籃籔籏籀籐
籘籟籤籖籥籬籵粃粐粤
粭粢粫粡粨粳粲粱粮粹
粽糀糅糂糘糒糜糢鬻糯
糲糴糶糺紆
紂紜紕紊絅絋紮紲紿
紵絆絳絖絎絲絨絮絏絣
經綉絛綏絽綛綺綮綣綵
緇綽綫總綢綯緜綸綟綰
緘緝緤緞緻緲緡縅縊縣
縡縒縱縟縉縋縢繆繦縻
縵縹繃縷縲縺繧繝繖繞
繙繚繹繪繩繼繻纃緕繽
辮繿纈纉續纒纐纓纔纖
纎纛纜缸缺
罅罌罍罎罐网罕罔罘
罟罠罨罩罧罸羂羆羃羈
羇羌羔羞羝羚羣羯羲羹
羮羶羸譱翅翆翊翕翔翡
翦翩翳翹飜耆耄耋耒耘
耙耜耡耨耿耻聊聆聒聘
聚聟聢聨聳聲聰聶聹聽
聿肄肆肅肛肓肚肭冐肬
胛胥胙胝胄胚胖脉胯胱
脛脩脣脯腋
隋腆脾腓腑胼腱腮腥
腦腴膃膈膊膀膂膠膕膤
膣腟膓膩膰膵膾膸膽臀
臂膺臉臍臑臙臘臈臚臟
臠臧臺臻臾舁舂舅與舊
舍舐舖舩舫舸舳艀艙艘
艝艚艟艤艢艨艪艫舮艱
First Three
Digits
0
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
艷艸艾芍芒芫芟芻芬苡
苣苟苒苴苳苺莓范苻苹
苞茆苜茉苙
茵茴茖茲茱荀茹荐荅
茯茫茗茘莅莚莪莟莢莖
茣莎莇莊荼莵荳荵莠莉
莨菴萓菫菎菽萃菘萋菁
菷萇菠菲萍萢萠莽萸蔆
菻葭萪萼蕚蒄葷葫蒭葮
蒂葩葆萬葯葹萵蓊葢蒹
蒿蒟蓙蓍蒻蓚蓐蓁蓆蓖
蒡蔡蓿蓴蔗蔘蔬蔟蔕蔔
蓼蕀蕣蕘蕈
蕁蘂蕋蕕薀薤薈薑薊
薨蕭薔薛藪薇薜蕷蕾薐
藉薺藏薹藐藕藝藥藜藹
蘊蘓蘋藾藺蘆蘢蘚蘰蘿
虍乕虔號虧虱蚓蚣蚩蚪
蚋蚌蚶蚯蛄蛆蚰蛉蠣蚫
蛔蛞蛩蛬蛟蛛蛯蜒蜆蜈
蜀蜃蛻蜑蜉蜍蛹蜊蜴蜿
蜷蜻蜥蜩蜚蝠蝟蝸蝌蝎
蝴蝗蝨蝮蝙
蝓蝣蝪蠅螢螟螂螯蟋
螽蟀蟐雖螫蟄螳蟇蟆螻
蟯蟲蟠蠏蠍蟾蟶蟷蠎蟒
蠑蠖蠕蠢蠡蠱蠶蠹蠧蠻
衄衂衒衙衞衢衫袁衾袞
衵衽袵衲袂袗袒袮袙袢
袍袤袰袿袱裃裄裔裘裙
裝裹褂裼裴裨裲褄褌褊
褓襃褞褥褪褫襁襄褻褶
褸襌褝襠襞
襦襤襭襪襯襴襷襾覃
覈覊覓覘覡覩覦覬覯覲
覺覽覿觀觚觜觝觧觴觸
訃訖訐訌訛訝訥訶詁詛
詒詆詈詼詭詬詢誅誂誄
誨誡誑誥誦誚誣諄諍諂
諚諫諳諧諤諱謔諠諢諷
First Three
Digits
0
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
諞諛謌謇謚諡謖謐謗謠
謳鞫謦謫謾謨譁譌譏譎
證譖譛譚譫
譟譬譯譴譽讀讌讎讒
讓讖讙讚谺豁谿豈豌豎
豐豕豢豬豸豺貂貉貅貊
貍貎貔豼貘戝貭貪貽貲
貳貮貶賈賁賤賣賚賽賺
賻贄贅贊贇贏贍贐齎贓
賍贔贖赧赭赱赳趁趙跂
趾趺跏跚跖跌跛跋跪跫
跟跣跼踈踉跿踝踞踐踟
蹂踵踰踴蹊
蹇蹉蹌蹐蹈蹙蹤蹠踪
蹣蹕蹶蹲蹼躁躇躅躄躋
躊躓躑躔躙躪躡躬躰軆
躱躾軅軈軋軛軣軼軻軫
軾輊輅輕輒輙輓輜輟輛
輌輦輳輻輹轅轂輾轌轉
轆轎轗轜轢轣轤辜辟辣
辭辯辷迚迥迢迪迯邇迴
逅迹迺逑逕逡逍逞逖逋
逧逶逵逹迸
遏遐遑遒逎遉逾遖遘
遞遨遯遶隨遲邂遽邁邀
邊邉邏邨邯邱邵郢郤扈
郛鄂鄒鄙鄲鄰酊酖酘酣
酥酩酳酲醋醉醂醢醫醯
醪醵醴醺釀釁釉釋釐釖
釟釡釛釼釵釶鈞釿鈔鈬
鈕鈑鉞鉗鉅鉉鉤鉈銕鈿
鉋鉐銜銖銓銛鉚鋏銹銷
鋩錏鋺鍄錮
錙錢錚錣錺錵錻鍜鍠
鍼鍮鍖鎰鎬鎭鎔鎹鏖鏗
鏨鏥鏘鏃鏝鏐鏈鏤鐚鐔
鐓鐃鐇鐐鐶鐫鐵鐡鐺鑁
鑒鑄鑛鑠鑢鑞鑪鈩鑰鑵
鑷鑽鑚鑼鑾钁鑿閂閇閊
閔閖閘閙閠閨閧閭閼閻
Appendix
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
Last Digit
1
16
16-13
First Three
Digits
0
Appendix
16
16-14
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
閹閾闊濶闃闍闌闕闔闖
關闡闥闢阡阨阮阯陂陌
陏陋陷陜陞
陝陟陦陲陬隍隘隕隗
險隧隱隲隰隴隶隸隹雎
雋雉雍襍雜霍雕雹霄霆
霈霓霎霑霏霖霙霤霪霰
霹霽霾靄靆靈靂靉靜靠
靤靦靨勒靫靱靹鞅靼鞁
靺鞆鞋鞏鞐鞜鞨鞦鞣鞳
鞴韃韆韈韋韜韭齏韲竟
韶韵頏頌頸頤頡頷頽顆
顏顋顫顯顰
顱顴顳颪颯颱颶飄飃
飆飩飫餃餉餒餔餘餡餝
餞餤餠餬餮餽餾饂饉饅
饐饋饑饒饌饕馗馘馥馭
馮馼駟駛駝駘駑駭駮駱
駲駻駸騁騏騅駢騙騫騷
驅驂驀驃騾驕驍驛驗驟
驢驥驤驩驫驪骭骰骼髀
髏髑髓體髞髟髢髣髦髯
髫髮髴髱髷
髻鬆鬘鬚鬟鬢鬣鬥鬧
鬨鬩鬪鬮鬯鬲魄魃魏魍
魎魑魘魴鮓鮃鮑鮖鮗鮟
鮠鮨鮴鯀鯊鮹鯆鯏鯑鯒
鯣鯢鯤鯔鯡鰺鯲鯱鯰鰕
鰔鰉鰓鰌鰆鰈鰒鰊鰄鰮
鰛鰥鰤鰡鰰鱇鰲鱆鰾鱚
鱠鱧鱶鱸鳧鳬鳰鴉鴈鳫
鴃鴆鴪鴦鶯鴣鴟鵄鴕鴒
鵁鴿鴾鵆鵈
鵝鵞鵤鵑鵐鵙鵲鶉鶇
鶫鵯鵺鶚鶤鶩鶲鷄鷁鶻
鶸鶺鷆鷏鷂鷙鷓鷸鷦鷭
鷯鷽鸚鸛鸞鹵鹹鹽麁麈
麋麌麒麕麑麝麥麩麸麪
麭靡黌黎黏黐黔黜點黝
黠黥黨黯黴黶黷黹黻黼
First Three
Digits
0
837
838
839
840
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
黽鼇鼈皷鼕鼡鼬鼾齊齒
齔齣齟齠齡齦齧齬齪齷
齲齶龕龜龠
堯槇遙瑤凜熙
First Three
Digits
0
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
First Three
Digits
0
Last Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pictograph List
Open Pictograph Code mode and press d a.
Use G to select a Pictograph and press b to enter it.
CPictograph Code 1
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
01
19
37
55
73
02
20
38
56
74
03
21
39
57
75
04
22
40
58
76
05
23
41
59
77
06
24
42
60
78
07
25
43
61
79
08
26
44
62
80
Pictograph
09
27
45
63
81
10
28
46
64
82
11
29
47
65
83
12
30
48
66
84
13
31
49
67
85
14
32
50
68
86
15
33
51
69
87
16
34
52
70
88
Appendix
17
35
53
71
89
16
18
36
54
72
90
Note H Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.
Tip H Pictographs in 2 are animated.
16-15
CPictograph Code 2
Code
Appendix
16
16-16
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
01
19
37
55
73
02
20
38
56
74
03
21
39
57
75
04
22
40
58
76
05
23
41
59
77
06
24
42
60
78
07
25
43
61
79
08
26
44
62
80
09
27
45
63
81
10
28
46
64
82
11
29
47
65
83
12
30
48
66
84
13
31
49
67
85
14
32
50
68
86
15
33
51
69
87
16
34
52
70
88
17
35
53
71
89
18
36
54
72
90
Pictograph
CPictograph Code 3
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
01
19
37
55
73
02
20
38
56
74
03
21
39
57
75
04
22
40
58
76
05
23
41
59
77
06
24
42
60
78
07
25
43
61
79
08
26
44
62
80
27
45
63
81
10
28
46
64
82
11
29
47
65
83
12
30
48
66
13
31
49
67
14
32
50
68
15
33
51
69
16
34
52
70
17
35
53
71
18
36
54
72
Note H Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.
Tip H Pictographs in 2 are animated.
Appendix
09
Pictograph
16
16-17
CPictograph Code 4
Code
01
Appendix
16
16-18
Pictograph
Code
17
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
33
49
65
02
18
34
50
66
03
19
35
51
67
04
20
36
52
68
05
21
37
53
69
06
22
38
54
70
07
23
39
55
71
08
24
40
56
72
09
25
41
57
73
10
26
42
58
74
11
27
43
59
75
12
28
44
60
76
13
29
45
61
77
14
30
46
62
15
31
47
63
16
32
48
64
Pictograph
CPictograph Code 5
Code
Pictograph
Code
01
17
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
33
49
65
02
18
34
50
66
03
19
35
51
67
04
20
36
52
68
05
21
37
53
69
06
22
38
54
70
07
23
39
55
71
08
24
40
56
72
09
25
41
57
73
10
26
42
58
74
11
27
43
59
75
12
28
44
60
76
13
29
45
61
14
30
46
62
15
31
47
63
16
32
48
64
Tip H Pictographs in 2 are animated.
Appendix
Note H Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.
Pictograph
16
16-19
CPictograph Code 6
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
Pictograph
Code
13
25
37
49
02
14
26
38
50
03
15
27
39
51
04
16
28
40
52
05
17
29
41
53
06
18
30
42
54
07
19
31
43
55
08
20
32
44
56
09
21
33
45
57
10
22
34
46
58
11
23
35
47
12
24
36
48
Tip H Pictographs in 2 are animated.
Appendix
16-20
Code
01
Note H Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.
16
Pictograph
Pictograph
Specifications
C802SH
^ Call Time and Standby Time will decrease if Display Backlight
is used frequently.
Weight
Approximately 141 g (with battery)
^ Call Time and Standby Time may decrease when a
Continuous Call Time
Approximately 150 minutes (3G)
Approximately 240 minutes (GSM)
^ Call Time and Standby Time may decrease when handset is
Continuous Standby Time Approximately 240 hours (3G)
(when closed)
Approximately 250 hours (GSM)
TV Call Continuous
Call Time
Approximately 90 minutes
Charging Time
(Power off)
AC Charger: Approximately 135 minutes
In-Car Charger: Approximately
145 minutes
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Approximately 50 x 102 x 26 mm
(when closed, without protruding parts)
Maximum Output
0.25 W (3G)
2.0 W (GSM)
fully charged battery, with stable signals. Continuous Call
Time may be less than half this value if handset is
out-of-range or signal is weak.
^ Continuous Standby Time is an average measured with a new,
fully charged battery, with handset closed (clamshell closed)
without calls or operations, in Standby with stable signals.
Standby Time may be less than half this value if handset is
out-of-range or signal is weak. Standby Time may vary by
environment (battery status, temperature, etc.).
used in poor conditions (see P.1-17 "Battery Time").
^ Display employs precision technology. However, some pixels
may appear brighter or darker.
Appendix
^ Continuous Call Time is an average measured with a new,
V-application is active.
16
16-21
CAC Charger
CBattery
Power Source
100 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage
3.7 V
Power Consumption
13 VA
Battery Type
Lithium-ion
Capacity
870 mAh
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Approximately 37.5 x 5.8 x 44.7 mm
(without protruding parts)
Output Voltage/Current 5.2 VDC/650 mA
Charging Temperature
5]C - 35]C
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Approximately 53 x 49 x 20 mm
(without protruding parts, cord)
Cord Length
Approximately 1.5 m
CDesktop Holder
Input Voltage/Current
Appendix
16-22
Weight
Approximately 11 g
Cord Length
Approximately 90 cm
5.2 VDC/650 mA
Output Voltage/Current 5.2 VDC/650 mA
16
CMulti Stereo Headphones
CHandsfree Microphone
Charging Temperature
5]C - 35]C
Weight
Approximately 12 g
Approximately 58.5 x 26 x 132 mm
(without protruding parts)
Cord Length
Approximately 75 cm
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Index
B
Backlight ..................................................... 5-5, 7-7, 10-6, 15-8
Backup & Restore ..............................................................9-19
Barcode (scanning)..........................................................11-11
battery ........................................................................1-16, 1-20
Battery Strength indicator........................................1-18, 1-19
Blink (V-application) ..........................................................15-8
Bluetooth (introducing handset) ........................................ 9-4
Bluetooth ..............................................................................9-3
Bluetooth Timeout ...............................................................9-8
Bookmarks (accessing from)..........................................13-12
Bookmarks (deleting) ......................................................13-13
Bookmarks (editing) ........................................................13-13
Bookmarks (folder) ..........................................................13-13
Bookmarks (saving)......................................................... 13-12
Bookmarks........................................................................13-11
Bracket .................................................................................. 6-8
Brightness ..........................................................................10-6
Browser Data ....................................................................13-16
By Group (Phone Book search)..........................................4-9
By Katakana (Phone Book search).....................................4-9
By Reading Order (Phone Book search)............................4-9
A
About (browser)................................................................13-16
AC Charger .........................................................................1-22
Access Log (Web) ............................................................13-15
Access Point..............................................................9-16, 9-18
Acquire Dictionary .............................................................10-8
Acquire Mail List...............................................................14-29
Activation Time (Screensaver)..........................................15-7
Add Email Address ..............................................................4-2
Add Slide................................................................14-11, 14-12
Advanced Settings ...........................................................14-14
Alarm ...................................................................................11-5
All Calls ...............................................................................2-11
Alternative Image (TV Call)..................................................5-5
Any Key Answer ..........................................................2-5, 10-3
Application.................................................................9-15, 9-17
Application Volume (V-application)..................................15-8
attaching files .....................................................................14-9
Authentication (Web) .......................................................13-18
Authorisation code.............................................................. 9-9
Auto (System Settings)......................................................2-14
Auto Delete .......................................................................14-26
Auto Save............................................................................6-18
C
Appendix
Numbers
3G (System Settings) .........................................................2-14
3G/GSM GPRS Modem.......................................................9-13
16
Cache memory (Web) ........................................................13-5
Calculator............................................................................11-8
Calendar..............................................................................11-2
Calendar Format.................................................................10-7
16-23
Appendix
16
16-24
Call Barring .........................................................................12-7
Call Costs............................................................................2-13
Call Forwarding ..................................................................12-2
Call Settings........................................................................10-9
Call Timers ..........................................................................2-12
Call Waiting.........................................................................12-5
Call/Message Notice (V-application).................................15-9
Call/Message Priority (V-application) ...............................15-9
Caller ID (sending/blocking).....................................2-2, 12-10
Calls & Alarms (V-application) ..........................................15-9
calls (ending) ........................................................................2-2
calls (placing) ...................................................... 2-2, 2-15, 5-3
Centre Access Code ..........................................................1-33
Certificates (Web).............................................................13-18
Change to BCC.................................................................14-13
Change to CC....................................................................14-13
Change to TO....................................................................14-13
Character Code (list) ..........................................................16-9
Character Code.....................................................................3-9
charging time................................................... 1-22, 1-23, 1-24
clamshell closed.................................................................1-13
clamshell open ...................................................................1-13
Clear DNS Cache ................................................................9-18
clearing Conversion Log ...................................................3-13
Clock & Calendar................................................................10-5
Conference Call ..................................................................12-6
confirming report .............................................................14-20
Connectivity..........................................................................9-2
Continuous Shoot ................................................................6-8
Cookies .............................................................................13-17
Copy ....................................................................................3-14
Cost Units ...........................................................................2-13
Countdown Timer.............................................................11-21
Country Codes ...................................................................10-9
Create 120x160 (240x320)..................................................8-12
Create New (Profile) ..................................................9-17, 9-18
Create QR Code................................................................ 11-14
Crop.......................................................................................7-8
Cut (image) ........................................................................... 8-7
Cut ....................................................................................... 3-14
D
Data Folder ........................................................................... 8-2
Date/Time Format...............................................................10-7
Datum On/Off....................................................................10-13
Daylight Saving .......................................................10-7, 11-20
Default Image (TV Call) ........................................................5-5
Delete All Mails.................................................................14-29
Delete Before ........................................................................7-8
Delete Posterior.................................................................. 3-15
deleting characters ............................................................3-14
Delivery Rep. Allow..........................................................14-32
Delivery Report......................................................14-14, 14-31
Delivery Time....................................................................14-15
Desktop Holder...................................................................1-23
Device Name (Bluetooth).....................................................9-8
Dialled Numbers..........................................................2-4, 2-11
Display ................................................................................ 1-11
Display Call Info ...............................................................10-11
Display Call Timer ............................................................10-11
Display Saving....................................................................10-6
Display Settings .................................................................10-4
Display Size ...............................................................7-7, 13-14
Downloads (downloading text only)...............................13-17
DPOF .................................................................................11-22
Draft (editing)....................................................................14-24
Draft (Mail Box).................................................................14-17
Draft (saving to)................................................................14-15
Draft (sending from).........................................................14-24
E
F
Face Arrange ........................................................................8-9
fast forward/reverse .............................................................7-5
Favourites (Streaming) ....................................................13-14
Font Colour .........................................................................14-9
Font Settings ......................................................................10-5
Font Size ...........................................................................13-17
Format Card ......................................................................10-13
G
General Settings...............................................................14-31
Greeting Message ..............................................................10-5
GSM (System Settings)......................................................2-14
H
Handset Code ..........................................................1-33, 10-12
Handset Lock....................................................................10-11
Handset Manager ...............................................................9-14
handset phone number (opening My Details) ................. 4-13
Handsfree Devices (Bluetooth)...........................................9-8
Handsfree Setting ................................................................9-8
Help .....................................................................................6-17
Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion.........3-12
Hold .......................................................................................2-3
Home Download ...............................................................14-31
I
images (editing).................................................................... 8-6
IMEI Notification ...............................................................13-17
In-Car Charger ....................................................................1-24
incoming calls (answering) ..........................................2-5, 5-3
Index Print.........................................................................11-23
Information ..................................................................2-6, 15-4
information content ........................................................... 13-5
Infrared.................................................................................. 9-9
Input Memory (Web)........................................................... 13-9
Appendix
Earpiece Volume ..................................................................2-9
E-Book...............................................................................11-24
Edit Signature ...................................................................14-31
Edit Subtitle ..........................................................................7-9
Emoticons .............................................................................3-7
Enlarge/Reduce ....................................................................8-8
entering characters ..............................................................3-5
entry modes ..........................................................................3-2
Execute Pending ................................................................9-18
Expenses Memo ...............................................................11-22
Expiry Time .......................................................................14-14
Exposure .............................................................................6-15
External Light (calls/messaging) ......................................10-3
Forward .........................................................14-5, 14-23, 14-31
Frame ..................................................................................8-13
Function Menu....................................................................16-2
16
16-25
international call...................................................................2-3
International Prefix.............................................................10-9
international roaming.........................................................2-14
Internet (entering URLs directly) ......................................13-7
Internet Setting ...................................................................9-15
J
Jump to Bottom (Web).....................................................13-16
Jump to Top (Web)...........................................................13-16
K
key assignments ..................................................................3-3
Keypad Lock .......................................................................1-29
Keypad Tones.....................................................................10-3
L
Appendix
16
16-26
Language (言語選択): 日本語/English................................10-5
Language ............................................................................10-5
LBS Settings ..........................................................10-13, 13-17
LBS URL Setting...............................................................10-13
List Content ......................................................................14-19
Lock/Unlock ......................................................................14-24
Loudspeaker ..................................................................2-9, 5-5
M
Mail address (customising handset address) .................13-4
Mail Box.............................................................................14-17
Main Menu...........................................................................1-30
Manage Group (Phone Book)..............................................4-7
Manner mode ......................................................................2-16
Master Reset .....................................................................10-16
Max Cost .............................................................................2-13
Max Message Size............................................................14-33
Media Console....................................................................14-7
Media Player .........................................................................7-2
Memory All Clear (V-application)...................................... 15-9
Memory Card ......................................................................1-25
Memory Settings ..............................................................10-13
Memory Status ..................................... 4-6, 10-13, 14-33, 15-4
Merge Panorama ................................................................8-11
Message Centre................................................................ 14-32
Message Content ....................................................14-3, 14-20
Message Details ...............................................................14-28
Message Format...............................................................14-32
Message Recorder .............................................................2-20
Message Type...................................................................14-14
Messaging (checking messages) ...................................14-17
Messaging (creating/sending messages) ........................ 14-7
Messaging (deleting messages) .....................................14-25
Messaging (editing messages) .......................................14-18
Messaging (entering message text) .................................14-8
Messaging (entering recipient) .......................................14-12
Messaging (entering subject) .........................................14-13
Messaging (opening new messages)............................... 14-2
Messaging (retrieving MMS messages) ...........................14-4
Messaging...........................................................................14-2
Microphone......................................................................... 6-17
Minute Minder.....................................................................10-9
Missed Calls .......................................................................2-11
MMS.....................................................................................13-2
MMS Settings....................................................................14-33
mobile camera ......................................................................6-2
Mobile Internet (accessing)...............................................13-6
Mobile Light (camera) ........................................................6-14
Mode Settings.....................................................................10-2
Move to Card.......................................................................15-6
Move to Folder..................................................................14-21
Multi Selector............................................................................i
Music Player .........................................................................7-4
Mute Microphone...........................................................2-3, 5-5
My Details (Owner Profile).................................................4-13
My Saved Page (accessing from) ...................................13-12
My Saved Page (deleting) ................................................13-13
My Saved Page (saving to) ..............................................13-12
My Saved Page .................................................................13-11
N
Network (add/change/delete) ............................................9-14
network connection ...........................................................15-2
Network Information ..........................................................9-15
Network Password ..................................................1-33, 12-10
Network Settings .......................................................2-14, 9-14
O
Appendix
Off Line Mode .....................................................................2-18
One Hiragana Predictive Entry..........................................3-13
One Hiragana Word Call ....................................................3-13
One-Hiragana Conversion .................................................3-11
Operator Name ...................................................................10-5
Options (Media Console) ...................................................14-7
out-of-range ........................................................................16-4
Overlap mode .......................................................................6-8
P
Pager Code ........................................................................... 3-9
Pager Code list ...................................................................3-10
Paired Devices (Bluetooth) .................................................9-5
passcode...............................................................................9-3
Paste....................................................................................3-14
Pen Light.............................................................................1-29
Personal Folders (Auto Sort) ..........................................14-22
Personal Folders ...................................................14-17, 14-20
Phone Book (deleting entries) ..........................................4-11
Phone Book (editing) .........................................................4-10
Phone Book (inserting in text) ..........................................3-15
Phone Book (Memory Status) .............................................4-6
Phone Book (saving) ...........................................................4-2
Phone Book (searching)...................................................... 4-9
Phone Book Lock.............................................................10-11
Phone Help ....................................................................... 11-28
Phone Lock....................................................................... 10-11
Phonetic Conversion .........................................................3-11
Photo Camera.......................................................................6-5
Photo Frame .......................................................................6-10
Photo Print........................................................................11-22
Pictograph ............................................................................3-7
Pictograph List .................................................................16-15
Picture (Media Console) ...........................................14-7, 14-9
Picture (Phone Book)...........................................................4-5
Picture Size......................................................................... 6-13
Picture Size......................................................................... 6-15
Picture/Video Quality .........................................................6-16
PIN ..............................................................................1-7, 10-12
16
16-27
Playback Pattern ...........................................................7-6, 7-7
playing Voice Mail ..............................................................12-5
Playlist (Media Player) .......................................................7-11
Power Off Sound ................................................................10-3
Power On Sound ................................................................10-3
Power on/off........................................................................1-28
Predictive ..............................................................................3-6
Preview Message.....................................................14-8, 14-11
Previous Usage ....................................................................3-6
Priority...............................................................................14-15
properties.................................................. 7-4, 8-5, 13-15, 15-5
Proxy ..........................................................................9-16, 9-18
Q
Quick Conversion...............................................................3-12
R
Appendix
16
16-28
Received (Mail Box) .........................................................14-17
Received Calls .............................................................2-7, 2-11
Record Time........................................................................6-16
Reformat file .......................................................................8-13
Rejected Numbers..............................................................12-9
Reload Page (Web)...........................................................13-15
Remove Picture ................................................................14-10
Remove Slide....................................................................14-12
Remove Sound .................................................................14-10
Remove Text .....................................................................14-10
Remove Video...................................................................14-10
Rename (folders) ..............................................................14-20
Replace Picture ................................................................14-10
Replace Sound .................................................................14-10
Replace Video...................................................................14-10
replacing characters ..........................................................3-14
Reply ........................................................................14-5, 14-23
Reply All...................................................................14-5, 14-23
Reply Path.........................................................................14-32
Re-Provisioning.................................................................. 9-18
Re-send .............................................................................14-18
Reset All............................................................................10-14
Reset Settings ..................................................................10-14
Restart Browser ...............................................................13-16
Restore from Card..............................................................9-20
restricting incoming calls..................................................12-9
restricting outgoing calls ..................................................12-8
Retouch.................................................................................8-8
Retrieve All Mails .............................................................14-29
Retrieve NW Info .......................................................9-18, 13-4
Ringtone/Ringvideo ....................................................4-4, 10-2
Roam. Download ..............................................................14-31
Root Certificates ..............................................................13-18
Rotate (image) ....................................................................8-13
S
Save and Send (video).......................................................6-12
Save as Template .............................................................14-16
Save Item (attachments).................................................. 14-27
Save to (camera) ................................................................6-17
Save to Card .......................................................................9-20
Save to Phone Book ...............................................13-9, 14-26
Scan Text ..........................................................................11-15
Scene (camera)...................................................................6-15
Screensaver........................................................................15-6
Small Light..........................................................................1-19
SMS .....................................................................................13-2
SMS Settings ....................................................................14-32
SMSC Address ...................................................................9-18
Soft Keys.............................................................................1-31
Sort ..........................................................................7-4, 7-7, 8-3
Sound (Media Console) ............................................14-7, 14-9
Sound Settings...................................................................10-6
Speed Dial...........................................................................4-12
Split Picture ........................................................................8-12
SSL ......................................................................................13-5
Standby ...............................................................................1-28
Stopwatch .........................................................................11-17
Streaming (Web)...............................................................13-14
Suspend Time (Screensaver)............................................15-7
SVG file .................................................................................8-5
Switch Line ......................................................................... 12-6
Switch to Read .................................................................14-28
Switch to Unread..............................................................14-28
switch Viewfinder size .......................................................6-13
Symbols ................................................................................3-7
Synchronisation .................................................................15-2
System Graphics................................................................10-4
System Settings .................................................................2-14
System Sounds .................................................................. 10-3
T
Appendix
Scroll Step (Web)..............................................................13-17
Scrolling (Media Player).....................................................7-10
Search for Devices (Bluetooth)...........................................9-4
Search This Page .............................................................13-16
Secret mode......................................................................10-12
Secure Prompt..................................................................13-18
Security ..................................................................10-10, 13-18
Security Codes ...................................................................1-33
Security Level .....................................................................15-7
Select Network....................................................................2-14
Select Two Points.................................................................7-8
Self Portrait position ..........................................................1-14
Send (Media Console)........................................................14-7
Send All (Bluetooth).............................................................9-7
Send All (Infrared) ..............................................................9-11
Send Page (sending URLs via SMS/MMS) .....................13-15
Sent (Mail Box) .................................................................14-17
Server Mail Box ................................................................14-29
Server Mail Volume ..........................................................14-29
Set Custom Zone................................................................10-7
Set Date/Time......................................................................10-7
Set Preferred.......................................................................9-15
Set Time Zone..........................................................10-7, 11-20
Set to Default (V-application) ............................................15-9
Settings (V-application) .....................................................15-8
Shortcuts.............................................................................1-32
Shutter Sound.....................................................................6-15
Side Keys ..................................................................................i
slide ...................................................................................14-11
Slide Duration ........................................................14-12, 14-33
SM Orig. Address ...............................................................9-18
16
Tasks .................................................................................11-18
Template ...........................................................................14-16
Text Optimisation.............................................................14-32
Text Search....................................................................... 13-16
16-29
Text Templates ..........................................................3-15, 8-13
Time & Date.........................................................................10-7
Timer (camera)....................................................................6-14
Tone Control .........................................................................7-5
Touch Tone ...........................................................................2-9
TV Call (Hold Guidance Pict)...............................................5-5
TV Call ...................................................................................5-2
TV Call Settings ....................................................................5-5
U
Unsent (Mail Box) .............................................................14-17
URL log (Access History) ..................................................13-7
User Dictionary...................................................................10-8
USIM Card .............................................................................1-4
V
Appendix
16
16-30
V-appli Library ....................................................................15-4
V-application (deleting)......................................................15-6
V-application (downloading) .............................................15-3
V-application (exiting or pausing) ....................................15-5
V-application (resuming) ...................................................15-5
V-application (starting) ......................................................15-4
V-application.......................................................................15-2
V-application properties (before downloading)...............15-3
Vibration.....................................................................10-3, 15-9
Video (Media Console)............................................14-7, 14-10
Video Camera .....................................................................6-10
Video Encode......................................................................6-17
Video Player..........................................................................7-6
View Attachments ............................................................14-11
Viewer position...................................................................1-14
Vodafone live!.....................................................................13-2
Vodafone Web ....................................................................13-6
Voice Mail............................................................................12-4
Voice Recorder...................................................................11-9
Volume ................................................................................ 10-2
W
Wallpaper ............................................................................10-4
Warning Tone .....................................................................10-3
Web (moving cursor) .........................................................13-8
Web (saving files).............................................................13-10
Web (uploading files).......................................................13-16
Web......................................................................................13-5
White List ............................................................................9-18
Withheld Call ......................................................................12-9
World Clock ......................................................................11-20
Z
zoom (camera)......................................................................6-4
Warranty & After-Sales Services
CWarranty
Warranty is provided when you purchase 802SH.
^ Check the name of distributor and date of purchase.
^ Read through contents and keep in a safe place.
^ The warranty term is described in the warranty.
Appendix
CAfter-Sales Services
See P.16-4 "Troubleshooting" before contacting us for repair. If
you cannot find solutions or solve problems, contact Vodafone
Customer Centre, Customer Assistance (see P.16-32) of your
subscription area and provide detailed description.
^ During the warranty term, repairs are performed under the
terms and conditions described in the warranty.
^ After the warranty term, repairs are performed if possible
upon your request at your expense.
For other services, contact the distributor, the nearest
Vodafone shop or Vodafone Customer Centre, General
Information (see P.16-32).
Replacement parts are warranted for 6 years after
termination of production.
Note H ^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from
use of this product.
^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from
accidental loss/alteration of handset data. Please keep
a separate record of Phone Book entries, etc.
^ Disassembling or modifying handset may violate the
Radio Law. Modified handsets will not be repaired.
16
16-31
Customer Service
If you have questions about Vodafone handsets or services, please call General Information. For repairs, please
call Customer Assistance.
Vodafone Customer Centres
From a Vodafone handset, call toll free at
157 for General Information or
113 for Customer Assistance
CCall these toll free numbers from landlines:
Subscription Area
Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi, Fukushima, Niigata, Tokyo,
Kanagawa, Chiba, Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma, Yamanashi, Nagano,
Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui
Service Centre
G 0088-240-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-240-113
General Information
G 0088-241-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-241-113
General Information
G 0088-242-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-242-113
Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka
Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama
Appendix
16
General Information
G 0088-259-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-259-113
Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane
General Information
G 0088-247-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-247-113
General Information
G 0088-250-157
Customer Assistance
G 0088-250-113
Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi
Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita, Kumamoto, Miyazaki, Kagoshima, Okinawa
16-32
Phone Number
General Information
Vodafone 802SH Instruction Manual
March 2005, First Edition
Vodafone K.K.
For additional information, please visit a Vodafone shop.
Model: Vodafone 802SH
Manufacturer: SHARP Corporation
Please help the mobile industry maintain high environmental standards. Recycle your old
handsets, batteries and charger units (all manufacturers and brands). Before you recycle, please
remember these important points:
^ Handset, batteries and chargers submitted for recycling cannot be returned.
^ Always be sure to erase all data recorded on old handsets (Phone Book entries, call records, mail, etc.) before recycling.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising